UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT

STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE

MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

STUDY GUIDE

NAVAL CULTURE

TOTAL QUESTIONS: 448

AREA NO. TOPICS:
1
HISTORICAL BACKGROUND.
2
IN THE SEA, IN THE AIR, ON LAND....TO SERVE MEXICO .

3. NAVAL COMMANDS.

4. INDEPENDENT MARINE INFANTRY BRIGADES, BATTALIONS AND COMPANIES.

5. ADVANCED NAVAL STATIONS.

6. SQUADRON IS AIRNAVALS AND AIRCRAFT.

7. NAVAL SEARCH, RESCUE AND MARITIME SURVEILLANCE STATIONS (ENSAR).

8. SHIPYARDS AND REPAIR CENTERS OF THE MEXICO NAVY.

CULTURE
NAVAL 9. NAVAL UNIVERSITY.

10. PORT AND MARITIME AFFAIRS UNIT OF CAPTAINS (UNICAPAM).

1. UNIFORM.

12. THE USE OF THE SABER; COMMAND SYMBOL.

13. UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON THE LAW OF THE SEA (UNCLOS).

14
INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA (SOLAS).

15. HONORS.

16. NAVAL CIVIL PROTECTION UNIT (UNAPROCIV).

17. MARINE PLAN.

1 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM –2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

1 .- HISTORICAL BACKGROUND. 14. Larger ships that between June and July 1824 were acquired by
Mariano Michelena in England and Sweden, joining the fleet of the
(FIRST PART) National Navy.
Frigate Libertad and the brigs Bravo and Victoria.
1. Date on which Mexico consummated its independence, when the
Trigarante army triumphantly entered Mexico City. 15. He was appointed general commander of the Navy Department of
September 27, 1821. Veracruz on July 27, 1825, who was given the task of reorganizing
the national squadron to establish the naval blockade of the island
2. On November 14, 1821, he was appointed president of the of San Juan de Ulúa.
Sovereign Provisional Government Board and the Regency, which Captain Pedro Sainz de Baranda y Borreyro.
were the two organizations that supported the Mexican empire
while awaiting the arrival of the European monarch. 16. Date on which Frigate Captain Pedro Sainz de Baranda y Borreyro
Agustín de Iturbide. was appointed general commander of the Navy Department of
Veracruz, who took on the task of reorganizing the national
3. He was appointed as Supreme Chief of the Sea and Land Arms, squadron to establish the naval blockade of the island of San Juan
with the rank of admiral generalissimo by the Sovereign de Ulúa .
Provisional Government Board and the Regency due to the July 27, 1825.
absence of the European prince.
Agustín de Iturbide. 17. Military man who was in command of the fortress, and had to
negotiate the capitulation of San Juan de Ulúa, as a result of the
4. Date on which 4 Executive ministries were established: Foreign aforementioned naval blockade.
and Interior Relations, Justice and Ecclesiastical Affairs, Treasury Brigadier José Coppinger.
and War and Navy.
October 4, 1821. 18. Date on which the last Spanish redoubt set sail for Havana, the
Spanish flag was lowered and the national flag was raised, as a
5. He was the first Minister of War and Navy. symbol of the consolidation of national Independence,
Antonio de Medina. corresponding to the Navy.
November 23, 1825.
6. General who took the fortress of San Juan de Ulúa in command of
200 soldiers on October 26, 1821, with the purpose of having 19. Number of times that Mexico, as an independent country, has been
control of the city and port of Veracruz because Spain did not invaded by foreign forces, moments in which sailors with great
recognize the independence of Mexico. pride bravely defended sovereignty, even at the cost of their lives.
José María Dávila. 4 occasions.

7. Number of soldiers that the fortress of San Juan de Ulúa had under
the command of General José Ma. Dávila, because he received
artillery pieces sent from Spain and Cuba.
2,000 soldiers.
8. It was sent in 1822 by the Mexican government to the United
States with the purpose of acquiring the ships that would make up
Mexico's first naval squadron.
Captain Eugenio Cortés.
9. They were the ships that made up the first naval squadron of
Mexico, brought from the United States by Captain Eugenio Cortés
in 1822.
Schooners: Iguala and Anáhuac and the gun sloops: Chalco,
Chapala, Texcoco, Orizaba, Campechana, Zumpango, Tampico,
Papaloapan and Tlaxcalteca.
10. It was the first ship to officially hoist the national flag, having arrived
in Mexico on April 17, 1822.
Schooner Iguala.
11. A soldier who, on September 25, 1823, in command of the fortress
of San Juan de Ulúa, ordered the bombardment of Veracruz
because the dock was closed so that they could not get supplies.
General Francisco Lemaur.
12. Date on which the naval blockade of the San Juan de Ulúa
Fortress was declared, after the bombing of the port of Veracruz.
October 8, 1823.
20. Mishap due to which the French demanded a payment of 600
thousand pesos from the government of Mexico, asking for the
ratification of the Provisional Declarations of 1827, where they
sought special treatment and protection for their economic
interests, and in the face of the refusal, diplomatic relations were
broken, imposing a naval blockade of the Port of Veracruz.
Unsettled account in a pastry shop in Tacubaya in Mexico City, by
some Santa Anna officials.
21. Date of the first French intervention called the "Cake War",
beginning with the bombing of the castle of San Juan de Ulúa at
02:30 in the afternoon.
November 27, 1838.
22. Sailors who brought a letter as a last attempt by the Mexican
government to reach an agreement with the French ship Nereida,
prior to hostilities within the first French intervention.
Luis Valle and Pedro Díaz Mirón.
23. Marino stood out for his bravery and tenacity, who commanded the
defense line of the San Miguel bastion of the San Juan de Ulúa
fortress against the French attack, where he lost his left hand and
leg.
Frigate Captain Blas Godínez Brito.
2. UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT

13. General who on November 13, 1823, rose to the highest platform
in the country to present his report on the situation with respect to
Ulúa, highlighting that: "having changed the aspect of the war, the
Navy only has to complete this great work and
consolidate forever the independence
national".
General José Joaquín de Herrera.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
24. Date on which the “Cake War” came to an end with the signing
of the Peace Treaty, after the intervention of Minister Richard
Pakenham who mediated between both nations since English
interests were affected due to the naval blockade.
March 9, 1839.
25. War that resulted in the loss of 55% of its national territory, after
7 years since the signing of the Peace Treaty with France.
Mexican-United States War of 1846-1848.
26. He was tasked with the mission of implementing a more solid
fortification of the port of Alvarado, Veracruz, due to the North
American strategy that included the landing of its troops.
Captain Tomas Marín.
27. Sailors who were ordered by Captain Tomás Marín to fortify and
arm the batteries on the banks of the Papaloapan River, after
the North American strategy that included the landing of their
troops in Alvarado, Veracruz.
Frigate Captain Pedro Díaz Mirón and Second Lieutenant Juan
Lainé.
28. Military man who on October 15, 1846, in command of the North
American naval force, ordered the occupation of the port of
Alvarado by opening fire on the coast.
Commodore Conner.
29. He directed the fort's batteries on the American ship Vixen,
causing considerable damage.
Lieutenant Juan Lainé.
30. Ships that descended on the Papaloapan River to confront the
North American forces which undertook the withdrawal, a battle
that was one of the few military successes of Mexico against the
United States and was carried out by the Mexican Navy.
Vessels Veracruzano Libre, Zempoalteca and Águila.
31. It joined Commodore Conner's naval fleet on March 9, 1847,
after the defeat at Alvarado and the change in strategy by
transferring its landing to the port of Veracruz, integrating an
invasion fleet with 100 vessels of different types and about
13,000 troops.
General Winfield Scott.
32. Date on which General Winfield Scott urged General Morales to
surrender the plaza of Veracruz, a request that was denied so at
04:00 pm, the American bombardment of the port of Veracruz
began.
March 22, 1847.
33. Date on which the port of Veracruz surrendered, after the
bombardment of the naval fleet of Commodore Conner and
General Winfield Scott.
March 27, 1847.
34. His patriotism was evident during the bombardment of March
24, 1847, who, in command of the defense of the Santa Bárbara
bastion, did not stop firing on the enemy batteries, destroying
some of them, after the enemy fire caused the national flag to
fall. , picked it up and tied it to the merlon, falling again with it,
an action praised by the Americans and by General Winfield
Scott. Lieutenant Sebastián Holzinger.
35. He helped Lieutenant Sebastián Holzinger to place the flag back
on the flagpole under enemy fire during the American
bombardment of the Santa Bárbara stronghold on March 24,
1847.
By: AEGV
Second Lieutenant Francisco A. Velez.
36. Place and date on which a Treaty of Peace, Friendship, Limits
and Definitive Agreement was signed between Mexico and the
United States known as the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, which
established the border line between both countries, with Mexico
losing a large part of its territories, which They would be paid for
a sum of 15 million pesos.
In Villa de Guadalupe Hidalgo, Mexico City, on February 2,
1848.
37. Date on which the tripartite troops made up of France, England
and Spain landed in the port of Veracruz, after the suspension of
payment of the foreign debt issued by President Benito Juárez.
January 9, 1861.
38. Date on which France declared war on Mexico after the
suspension of payment of the foreign debt issued by President
Benito Juárez.
April 16, 1861.
39. He was crowned emperor after the French victory against
Mexico in the war of 1861.
Maximilian of Habsburg.
40. During his administration as emperor, he showed great interest
in the development of an efficient navy since it was in total
abandonment, issuing documents that included strategic
studies, creation of ports, construction of ships, enlistment of
crews, organization of these, security social, relays, uniforms,
among others.
Maximilian of Habsburg.
41. During his government, the Navy had a significant development:
The presence on both coasts was increased with the acquisition
of 4 war steamers and 4 gunboats, the Naval Military School
was founded, two training ships were acquired; Yucatán and
Zaragoza, opened teaching schools and the Guaymas shipyard,
Salina Cruz and Veracruz dams and the National Arsenal were
built.
Porfirio Diaz.
42. Date of the Foundation of the Naval Military School.
1 July 1897.
43. He was the first director of the Naval Military School founded on
July 1, 1897.
Captain Manuel Estanislao Izaguirre.
44. Training ship that made the first circumnavigation trip.
Saragossa.
45. His participation during the territorial problems that occurred with
Belize in the Porfirista government was highlighted.
Ángel Ortiz Monasterio and Miguel Rebolledo.
46. He directed the founding of Chetumal and surveillance on the
river and maritime border in the region.
Othón P. White.
3 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
47. He formed the constitutionalist army with which he intended to
restore the constitutional order, after having taken up arms
against President Victoriano Huerta and his federalist army.
Venustiano Carranza.
48. Date on which Second Lieutenant Hilario Rodríguez Malpica
Sáliba, accompanied by a part of the gunboat Tampico, joined
the cause of fighting the federalists and their naval fleet.
February 22, 1914.
49. Date on which the revolutionary Sonora biplane, piloted by
Captain Gustavo Salinas Camiña, attacked from the air with
rudimentary bombs launched by the naval machinist Teodoro
Madariaga to the General Guerrero transport ship in
Topolobampo, a military action considered one of the first air-
naval combats in the world .
April 15, 1914.
50. Pilot and Naval Machinist aboard the revolutionary Sonora
biplane, which attacked the General Guerrero transport ship
from the air with rudimentary bombs, a military action
considered one of the first air-naval combats in the world.
Gustavo Salinas Camiña and Teodoro Madariaga.
51. Very marked ideology during the Porfiriato, which affected the
bilateral relationship between Mexico and the United States
especially at the end of the Porfirian era, due to economic
interests and rivalry between the neighboring country to the
north and the European powers.
French.
52. North American president who did not recognize the
government of Victoriano Huerta, who had come to power
through a coup d'état, which was frowned upon for American
interests, so he looked for some excuse to intervene in the
affairs of Mexico.
Woodrow Wilson.
53. Prohibition violated by 10 North American sailors from the crew
of the ship USS Dolphin, who, under the excuse of the need to
buy gasoline, sailed upriver, being apprehended and taken to
the military command in Tampico.
Robbery of national and foreign vessels due to the political-
social conflicts that occurred in the country.
54. General who ordered the immediate release of the sailors of the
USS Dolphin after being detained in the port of Tampico during
the political-social conflicts that were taking place in the country.
General Ignacio Morelos Zaragoza.
55. He held a vigorous protest demanding a public apology, as well
as the raising of his country's flag and a 21-gun salute in the
central plaza of Tampico, after the arrest of 10 American sailors
from the USS Dolphin.
Rear Admiral Henry T. May.
56. Pretext that President Wilson used to intervene in national
affairs.
The refusal of the Mexican government not to salute and raise
the American flag.
57. German steamship that had on board an important shipment of
weapons for Huerta's army, which would be landed in the port of
Veracruz, a fact that led the president of the United States
Woodrow Wilson to change the landing of North American
troops from Tampico to Veracruz. Ypiranga.
58. On the morning of April 21, 1914, he received the order from his
By: AEGV
Secretary of the Navy "capture the customs, do not allow the
war supplies to reach Huerta or any other shipment." Rear
Admiral Frank Friday Fletcher.
59. He was the Military Commander of the Plaza de Veracruz during
the landing of the North American troops on April 21, 1914.
General Gustavo Mass.
60. Instructions given by General Mass upon receiving the message
of the landing of North American troops in the port of Veracruz,
preparing to defend the homeland since he considered it an
offensive action.
That the military train engines be put to safety, part of the 19th
Infantry Regiment should go to the terminal dock to repel the
foreign troops and prevent the disembarkation from continuing,
and that the citizen volunteers and soldiers should be armed.
prisoners in the military prison to defend the country.
61. He was the Commander of the San Juan de Ulúa arsenal during
the invasion of Veracruz on April 21, 1914, a fortress that
Admiral Fletcher considered as an obstacle to the landing force.
Captain Alejandro Cerizola.
62. Time and date of the beginning of the landing of North American
troops under the command of Admiral Fletcher at the Porfirio
Días docks, terminal and fiscal, during the invasion of the port of
Veracruz.
11:20 a.m. on April 21, 1914.
63. He was in charge of providing training in the handling of
weapons and in the execution of simple military maneuvers to
the civilians who made up the Society of Defenders of the Port
of Veracruz, which armed the civilian population and freed all
the inmates and distributed the rest of the weapons during the
North American invasion.
Lieutenant Colonel Manuel Contreras.
64. Ships that counterattacked the Naval Academy cadets who
attacked the marines who disembarked from the ship Utah
during the events of April 21, 1914.
Prairie and Chester.
65. Director of the Naval School during the invasion of the port of
Veracruz on April 21, 1914, which was informed by English
professor Antonio Espinoza that at 11 in the morning the North
American troops had planned to disembark.
Frigate Captain Rafael Carrión.
66. He was the Deputy Director of the Naval School during the
invasion of the port of Veracruz on April 21, 1914, the same who
the Director, Frigate Captain Rafael Carrión, ordered to go to
the Military Command to receive instructions, however, upon his
return He reported that the military facilities were empty.
Senior Lieutenant Ángel Corzo.
4 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
67. Colonel who, along with his men and some officers and troop
personnel belonging to the 23rd Regiment of
Infantry, in addition to the group of volunteers and prisoners of
Colonel Manuel Contreras, had begun the defense of the
homeland, after General Gustavo Mass abandoned the plaza
along with his troops.
Albino Rodríguez Cerillo.
68. During the invasion of the port of Veracruz on April 21, 1914, he
arrived at the campus shouting at his entrance in the patio
"Long live Mexico! Long live Mexico! Long live Mexico!" Being
answered enthusiastically by the cadets, he delivered the
harangue “To arms, boys, the country is in danger!”; and the
young cadets ran to arm themselves and take shelter in defense
of the homeland.
Commodore Manuel Azueta Perillos.
69. Characters who were in charge of supplying weapons and
ammunition at the Naval Academy during the invasion of the
port of Veracruz on April 21, 1914, soon coming to an end
because the aforementioned supplies were not sufficient.
David Coello and Juan de Dios Bonilla.
70. He went to the barracks and artillery warehouses of the
Command to take the weapons and ammunition necessary to
supply the cadets and staff of the Naval Academy.
Second Lieutenant Antonio Gómez Maqueo.
71. State of strength of the Naval Academy between management
personnel, services and students during the invasion of the port
of Veracruz on April 21, 1914, which proceeded to carry out the
organization for the defense.
128 elements.
72. Ships that targeted the Naval Academy with their 80” guns
during the invasion of the port of Veracruz on April 21, 1914.
Prairie and Chester.
73. He died during the hostilities a few days before turning 18 years
old. He was on one of the balconies shooting at the invading
enemy. However, during the rifle reloading procedure, he was
hit by an expansive bullet which pierced his skull. .
Virgilio Uribe.
74. He provided first aid in the Naval Academy infirmary to cadet
Virgilio Uribe.
Luis Moya.
75. Cadet who, during his guard service, when a projectile hit the
guard, reducing it to rubble and causing said cadet to fall, got
up, dusted himself off and resumed his position, the guard
officer asked if he was alright to which he responded “There is
nothing new, my lieutenant”, this gesture of bravery earned him
a promotion to corporal by Commodore Azueta.
Eduardo Colina.
76. He requested to be assigned to the Army as an artillery officer,
and was discharged on December 9 in the Fixed Battery of
Veracruz with the office of tactical artillery lieutenant.
José Azueta.
77. Character who, upon learning of the events that were happening
at the dock, went to the Naval Academy. On his way, on the
corner of Landero and Coss streets and Esteban Morales, he
found an abandoned machine gun that he nicknamed “the
skinny one”; From there he began shooting at the invaders,
causing numerous casualties.
José Azueta.
By: AEGV
78. Cadet who witnessed the act of patriotism of Lieutenant José
Azueta Abad, who upon seeing him wounded in both legs came
to his aid to transfer him to a place where he could be protected
from the enemy's bullets, being transferred to the White Cross
aid station. at the Fire Station.
Juan Castañón.
79. Admiral who learned of the patriotic action of José Azueta, who
sent some doctors from his fleet to intervene in the cures, but
when he saw them enter he ordered them to immediately leave
his home, so that they would not desecrate his house or his
body, preferring to die rather than be cured by an enemy of his
country.
Fletcher.
80. Date on which Lieutenant José Azueta Abad died, at whose
funeral approximately 10 thousand people from all social strata
of the port of Veracruz attended.
May 11, 1914.
81. Place to which the Naval Academy personnel first retired, after
Commodore Manuel Azueta and Captain Aurelio Aguilar
determined not to expose the lives of the students, in search of
federal forces.
Cocos Station.
82. Surgeon who reported that Cadet Uribe had died.
Marcelino D. Mendoza.
83. Date and time in which the personnel of the Naval Academy
under the Command of Commodore Manuel Azuela arrived in
Mexico City, after receiving the order to join the capital by train,
shortly after arriving in Tejería.
April 26 at 12:30.
84. He was questioned by cadet Uribe's parents if they brought any
souvenir of their son, showing a blood stain impregnated on his
jacket, to which Virgilio Uribe's father, with tears in his eyes,
leaned down and kissed his son's blood several times.
exclaiming “He died for his country.”
Commodore Manuel Azueta.
85. Date on which the occupation of the port of Veracruz was
completed after the invasion of April 21, 1914.
April 22 at 11 in the morning.
86. Date on which it was decreed to place the adjective “HEROIC”
before the Naval Military School for the glorious deeds of its
children, becoming known from that date as HEROIC NAVAL
MILITARY SCHOOL.
December 20, 1949.
87. Date of the promulgation of the Magna Carta by President
Venustiano Carranza.
February 5, 1917.
5 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
88. Requirement established in article 32 of the Magna Carta of
1917, to belong to the Navy and occupy the positions of captain,
skipper and first engineer in the Merchant Navy. Being Mexican
by birth.
89. Date on which the Tabasco ship sailed from the port of Veracruz
bound for Progreso, Yucatán, with a completely Mexican crew, a
fact that since then every June 1st has been commemorated as
National Navy Day. June 1, 1942.
90. Captain who was in command of the ship Tabasco when it set
sail from the port of Veracruz bound for Progreso, Yucatán, with
the first completely Mexican crew.
Captain Rafael Izaguirre Castañares.
91. President who established in 1942 that National Navy Day will
be celebrated every June 1.
Manuel Ávila Camacho.
92. President who visualized the strategic importance of developing
the naval power of the federation, in the international context of
the Second World War three months after the war began.
Lazaro Cardenas.
93. Date on which the Law of Secretariats and Departments of State
was published in the Official Gazette of the Federation, in which
the Department of the National Navy was created in order to be
in charge of the country's maritime affairs.
December 30, 1939.
94. He was appointed as the first head of the National Navy
Department.
Naval Machinist Commodore Roberto Gómez Maqueo.
95. Date on which the Secretary of the Navy is created.
December 31, 1940.
96. He was the first Secretary of the Navy.
General Heriberto Jara Corona.
97. In the first years of its creation, the military and administrative
structure of the institution was developed and consolidated,
several Corps and services were created: Naval General Staff,
Naval Council, Military School of Training and Seamanship,
Corps of Naval Mechanical Engineers, Infantry Corps Naval,
Naval Health Corps, Naval Aviation School, Gulf Naval School
and Pacific Naval School.
Marine Secretary.
98. He was the Commander of the first Marine Infantry Battalion
created in September 1823, whose objective was to recruit and
organize the Marine Battalions. Among his war actions, the
taking of Sacrifice Island in 1824 stood out.
John Davis Bradburn.
99. During his government, the Pacific Marine Infantry Battalion was
created in 1916, with headquarters in Mazatlán, Sinaloa.
Venustiano Carranza.
100. He was the Commander of the Pacific Marine Infantry Battalion
created in 1916, based in Mazatlán, Sinaloa.
Hiram Hernandez.
101. He was the first Commander of the Gulf Marine Infantry
Battalion created in 1920, with its headquarters in the port of
Veracruz.
Alfonso Calcaneo Díaz.
102. Precursor of the Mexican Naval Aviation, he was the first air-
naval pilot of the Mexican Navy who was part of the veteran foot
of the Seaplane Corps.
By: AEGV
Carlos Castillo Bretón.
103. Date on which the First Aeronaval Squadron was created in
Mexico. February 23, 1943.
104. He was the Commander of the First Naval Air Squadron in
Mexico, made up of 6 Sykorsky aircraft, with the port of
Tampico, Tamaulipas, being designated as the Naval Air Base.
Rafael Santibáñez Fernández.
105. It has remained at the forefront of its aircraft, which have
performed both for the protection of the Mexican coasts, high-
impact operations and search and rescue, with the objective of
safeguarding national sovereignty.
Naval Aviation.
2.- IN THE SEA, IN THE AIR AND ON LAND.
106. By 2040, it aims to consolidate itself as an institution that
contributes to achieving conditions of peace and security in the
Mexican Marine Zones, to promote the prosperity and well-being
of the nation.
Vision of the Secretary of the Navy.
107. It is to consolidate an agile, dynamic, efficient and effective
Institution, valued for its service to the country, by guaranteeing
the protection of maritime interests and the necessary security
conditions in marine areas, coasts and national ports for the
development of the country.
Goal of the Secretary of the Navy.
108. They are the fundamental values of the Secretary of the Navy -
Navy of Mexico.
Honor, duty, loyalty and patriotism.
109. It is a bi-oceanic country that has ____________ kilometers of
coasts, with more than _____________of square kilometers
Exclusive Economic Zone and with __________ ports that
They connect the world.
11,122 km, 3,000,000 km 2 and 102 ports.
110. It is the agency of the Federal Public Administration, responsible
for exercising the Naval Power of the Federation through its
operational component The Mexican Navy.
Marine Secretary.
111. It is a permanent National Military Institution that seeks to
contribute at all times to the maritime development of the
country, by ensuring security in our seas.
Navy of mexico.
112. Mexico is an eminently maritime country, since it has direct
access to two large oceans, as well as their resources. It has
islands, islets, reefs and shoals.
4,111.
113. It is the maritime surface of Mexico, equivalent to one and a half
times the land surface of the country.
3,000,000 km 2 .
114. It is the width of the Territorial Sea.
12 nautical miles from the coast.
115. It is the width of the Contiguous Zone.
24 nautical miles from the coast.
6 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
116. It is the width of the Exclusive Economic Zone.
200 nautical miles from the coast.
117. World place that Mexico occupies due to its territorial extension.
Fourteenth (14).
118. World place that Mexico occupies due to its endowment in
natural resources due to its geographical location between two
oceanic slopes: that of the Mexican Pacific, including the Gulfs
of California and Gulf of Tehuantepec; and that of the Atlantic,
with the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea.
Twelfth (12).
119. They are the States of the Republic (Federal Entities) that have
a maritime coast, where more than 57 million people live,
contributing 41% of the country's gross domestic product (GDP).
17 States.
120. Mexico has 102 ports and 15 offshore maritime terminals: _____
in the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea, and ___________
in the Pacific Ocean.
59 in the Gulf and 58 in the Pacific.
121. It is a Secretary of State of the Federal Public Administration,
whose mission is to "Exercise National Maritime Power, protect
maritime interests, maintain the rule of law in Mexican marine
areas, coasts, rivers, lake areas and port areas, as well as apply
the National Maritime authority, to guarantee sovereignty and
promote the development of the country." READ THE 22 COMPETENCIES
OF THE SEMAR (PP. 24 AND 25). Marine Secretary.
122. It is made up of two Naval Forces, which constitute the first
line defense maritime in high seas in both
coastlines, with capacity to execute various types of
amphibious, surface and naval air operations.
Navy.
123. Date on which the reform to the Organic Laws of the Federal
Public Administration and the Mexican Navy was published in
the DOF, replacing the function of the Maritime Police with that
of the Coast Guard; term recognized in the field of International
Law, to carry out operations other than war.
May 19, 2017.
124. They perform Coast Guard functions, carrying out permanent
operations in the Coastal Zone (10 kilometers inland from the
coast) and in the Territorial Sea, in order to maintain greater
presence, control and surveillance of the maritime and port
activities of our country.
Naval Regions.
125. They carry out operations in the Exclusive Economic Zone with
highly autonomous maritime patrol aircraft, ships, helicopters
and embarked patrols, in order to safeguard human life at sea,
maintain surveillance of maritime traffic and protect our natural
resources.
Naval Regions.
126. They operate on the high seas (beyond 200 nautical miles)
when necessary, primarily on search and rescue missions, as
well as to provide international humanitarian aid. Naval Forces.
127. It is the operational body of the Mexican Navy, equipped with
infrastructure, equipment and systems informative and
communications, for the transfer of information, as well as
personnel trained to integrate, process and analyze information
from both internal and external sources that influences naval
operations or affects the civilian population.
By: AEGV
Command and Control Center (CC2).
128. It is the area responsible for generating the information required
by the different levels of command, to develop their decision-
making processes in the conception, preparation and conduct of
naval operations, it is empowered to establish coordination and
cooperation in the matter, with dependencies and national and
international organizations. Naval Intelligence Unit (UIN).
129. To comply with the regulations regarding maritime surveillance,
the Mexican Navy, through the Command and Control Center
and the Naval Intelligence Unit, distributes the common
panorama to its operational units, to strengthen the surveillance
and interception of suspicious vessels.
Maritime Operational Component.
130. They are the surface, air and land means used by naval
personnel to fulfill the mission of the Mexican Navy. They have
the appropriate equipment and capabilities to perform in the
various scenarios and conditions where the country requires
them.
Operational Units.
131. They are interceptor, coastal and oceanic patrols, used to fulfill
the mission of the Secretary of the Navy. Mexican Navy
increased its operational capabilities in the maritime field.
Surface Units.
132. These units are designed to fulfill the missions entrusted to the
Navy, by carrying out foreign defense operations and
safeguarding the nation's maritime interests. They are classified
into ships of the line, amphibious warfare and logistical support.
Warships.
133. They are represented by the POLA, a multipurpose frigate
whose function is surveillance and protection to safeguard
national sovereignty, beyond the Exclusive Economic Zone, in
addition to carrying out search and rescue operations, national
and international humanitarian aid and multinational exercises.
Line Vessels.
134. They are designed for the transport of Marine Corps personnel
and material by sea. One of its main characteristics is the ability
to disembark troops and vehicles on the beach.
Amphibious Warfare Ships.
135. They are ships used to transport cargo, supplies and personnel,
as well as in support operations for the civilian population in
disaster zones and international humanitarian aid.
Logistics Support Vessels.
136. Vessels used in Coast Guard functions, responsible for
maintaining the rule of law in the EEZ and MT, as well as
protecting natural resources, preventing marine pollution and
safeguarding human life at sea, are divided into: oceanic and
coastal patrols and interceptors.
Vessels for the maintenance of the rule of law.
7 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

137. They have the mission of carrying out patrol and surveillance
operations in the Exclusive Economic Zone, to maintain the Rule
of Law at sea, in addition to carrying out search and rescue
operations to safeguard human life.
Ocean Patrols.
138. With them, patrol and surveillance operations are carried out in
the Territorial Sea, where most maritime activities are carried
out.
Coastal Patrols.
139. High-speed boat, whose main function is maritime interception,
that is, carrying out the pursuit and arrest of fast boats violating
the law.
Interceptor Patrols.
140. They are used to safeguard human life at sea, they are
specialized vessels to carry out search and rescue operations
expeditiously, they are assigned to the ENSAR on both coasts.
Vessels for Maritime Search and Rescue.
141. They are self-righting vessels, with the capacity to carry out
search and rescue operations in adverse weather conditions.
MLB boat.
142. They are high-speed vessels with rapid deployment to carry out
search and rescue operations, they are also used for the
inspection and surveillance of protected natural areas.
Defender FC-33 boat.
143. They are used to fulfill support functions for the Navy and Coast
Guard, as well as other functions related to national maritime
development. They are mainly divided into tankers, dredgers,
tugboats and research vessels. Auxiliary Vessels.
150. Date on which all the elite groups of Special Forces were
concentrated in a single unit with the objective of strengthening
their operational capacity and contributing to guaranteeing
national security and protection of the marine environment,
through the execution of high-level special operations. strategic
value, directly under the orders of the High Command.
October 1, 2014.
151. These are activities that are carried out in the event of any threat
to the maintenance of the rule of law or internal or external
security of the country, in coordination with the Navy commands
or independently.
Special operations.
152. High mobility multipurpose vehicle, it has mounting for the
placement of different weapons, level V armor capable of
withstanding impacts from .50 caliber weapons, its design allows
it to travel any type of road and cross-country terrain, even
under extreme weather conditions, without sacrificing its
mobility, reliability or performance.
Humvee type vehicle.
153. It is a fully armored, all-terrain vehicle, with the ability to travel
long distances without refueling. Its design allows it to be
equipped with high-caliber machine guns. The personnel
operating on board are fully protected, even against explosive
devices.
Sherpa type vehicle.
154. It has multi-layer ballistic glass, 360° exterior viewing cameras, a
water tank with a capacity of 10,000 liters, a water pump with a
capacity of 500 gallons per minute, and a fire extinguisher
system around it.
Anti-riot type vehicle.

144. They are used to supply water or fuel to ships or establishments.
Tanker.
145. They have the function of extracting materials from the seabed
in maneuver areas, channels and access to ports, to maintain
sufficient depth to allow ships to navigate safely.
Dredge.
155. They are operational units in charge of carrying out, in Coast
Guard functions, surveillance, inspection and control actions
inside port areas. They depend on the commands of the
Regions, Zones and Naval Sectors where they are established.
Naval Port Protection Unit (UNAPROP).

146. They are used for maneuvers on the high seas, and in port for
maneuvers in the bay.
Tug.

147. They are vessels designated for oceanographic, hydrographic

and meteorological tasks; They support environmental programs
and contingencies in coastal areas on both coasts of the
country, in coordination with different federal government
entities, educational institutions and research centers.
Investigation.

148. It is mainly made up of IM personnel, performing functions as

diverse as ranging from combat to defend the national territory,
to maintaining the rule of law in the coastal strip, or supporting
the population in disaster zones and humanitarian aid. , as well
as assisting the authorities of the three levels of government in
the internal security of the country.
Land Operational Component.

149. It is a unit equipped and trained to carry out special operations

of strategic value, capable of operating in diverse geographical
environments: jungle, desert, mountains, beaches, urban areas,
seas and rivers.
Special Operations Unit (UNOPES).

8 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

(SECOND PART) flotillas, squadrons, units, establishments and attached,

incorporated or deployed forces. The Commander will be of the
Admiral Category subordinate to the Zone Commander.
3.- NAVAL COMMANDS. Naval Sectors.

156. It is the level of command exercised by the President of the 168. It is the location of the Pacific Naval Force.
Republic. Supreme Command. Manzanillo, Col.
157. It is the command level exercised by the Secretary of the Navy,
169. It is the location of the Gulf Naval Force.
who in turn is responsible to the Supreme Command.
Tuxpan, Ver.
High Command.
170. It is the location of the General Cartel of the High Command.
158. Command that, to fulfill its powers, will have: General Staff of Mexico City.
the Navy, Naval Forces, Regions, Naval Zones and Sectors,
High Command Headquarters, Collegiate Bodies, Disciplinary 171. It is the location of First Naval Region (RN-1).
Bodies and Naval Board, Establishments and Operational Veracruz, Ver.
Units .
High Command. 172. It is the location of Second Naval Region (RN-2).
Ensenada, BC
159. It is the level of command exercised by the heads of the Naval
Regions, Naval Forces and the High Command Headquarters. 173. It is the location of Third Naval Region (RN-3).
Senior Commanders in Chief. Lerma, Camp.

160. It is the command level exercised by the heads of the Naval 174. It is the location of Fourth Naval Region (RN-4).
Zones and others designated by the High Command. Guaymas, Son.
Higher Commands.
175. It is the location of Fifth Naval Region (RN-5).
161. It is the command level exercised by the heads of Sectors,
Isla Mujeres, Q. Roo.
flotillas, squadrons, surface units, naval air units, Marine Infantry
Battalions, and others designated by the High Command.
176. It is the location of Sixth Naval Region (RN-6).
Subordinate Commands. Manzanillo, Col.

162. It is the advisory body of the High Command that assists in the 177. It is the location of Eighth Naval Region (RN-8).
planning, coordination and supervision of the operations Acapulco, Gro.
required for the fulfillment of the powers assigned to the Navy,
transforming its decisions into directives, orders and 178. It is the location of the First Naval Zone (ZN-1).
instructions, supervising their compliance. CD. Madero, Tamps.
General Staff of the Navy.
179. It is the location of the Second Naval Zone (ZN-2).
163. They are the organized group of women and men, ships, aircraft La Paz, BC
and Marine Infantry Units trained to fulfill the mission and
powers assigned to the Mexican Navy, the Commander will be
180. It is the location of the Third Naval Zone (ZN-3). Coatzacoalcos,
of the Admiral Category, currently there are 2.
Ver.
Naval Forces.
181. It is the location of the Fourth Naval Zone (ZN-4).
164. They are geostrategic areas, determined by the Supreme
Mazatlán, Sin.
Command, which group together Zones, Sectors, flotillas,
squadrons and other units and establishments. The
182. It is the location of the Fifth Naval Zone (ZN-5).
Commanders will be of the Admiral Category subordinate to the
Two Mouths, Tab.
High Command, currently there are 7.
Naval Regions.
183. It is the location of the Sixth Naval Zone (ZN-6).
San Blas, Nay.
165. It is integrated with the operational units and naval
establishments of the Capital of the United Mexican States, the
184. It is the location of the Seventh Naval Zone (ZN-7).
Commander will be of the Admiral Category subordinate to the
CD. del Carmen, Camp.
High Command.
High Command Headquarters.
185. It is the location of the Eighth Naval Zone (ZN-8).
Pt. Vallarta, Jal.
166. They are the geographic-maritime areas determined by the
Supreme Command, which group together naval sectors,
186. It is the location of the Ninth Naval Zone (ZN-9).
flotillas, squadrons and other units and establishments
Yucalpetén, Yuc.
determined by the High Command. The Commander will be of
the Admiral Category subordinate to the Region Commander.
187. It is the location of the Tenth Naval Zone (ZN-10).
Naval Zones.
Lázaro Cárdenas, Mich.
167. They are the geographic-maritime subdivisions determined by
the High Command, which have under their command the

9 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

188. It is the location of the Eleventh Naval Zone (ZN-11). Chetumal,

Marine Amphibious Brigade (BRIGAIM).
Q. Roo.
209. Its mission is to organize, train, prepare and enlist its component
189. It is the location of the Twelfth Naval Zone (ZN-12). Salina Cruz,
units, forming a specialized force capable of executing
Oax.
amphibious operations either in isolation or as part of the
maneuver scheme of a higher unit, as well as developing Naval
190. It is the location of the Fourteenth Naval Zone (ZN-14). Pt.
Operations and immediate reaction wherever the Brigade
Chiapas, Chis.
orders. Marine Corps Amphibious Vehicle, to contribute to the
191. It is the location of NAVMAT. external defense and contribute to the internal security of the
Matamoros, Tamps. country.
Marine Amphibious Battalion (BATAIM).
192. It is the location of NAVPES.
Fishing, Tamps. 210. Its mission is to organize, train, prepare and enlist its component
units, forming a support and transportation force capable of
193. It is the location of NAVTUX. executing operations to support the amphibious assault and
Tuxpan, Ver. reconnaissance with boats, amphibious and mechanized
vehicles for the Maneuver Units, either in isolation or as part of
194. It is the location of NAVFRONT. the maneuver scheme of a higher unit, also develop Naval
Border, Tab. Operations where ordered by the BRIGAIM, to contribute to the
external defense and contribute to the internal security of the
195. It is the location of NAVCHAMP. country.
Champotón, Camp. Amphibious Assault Support Battalion (BATAPAN).

196. It is the location of NAVCOZ. 211. Its mission is to organize, train, prepare and enlist its component
Cozumel, Q. Roo. units, forming a specialized force capable of providing indirect
support fires to maneuver units in amphibious operations and
197. It is the location of NAVCORT. subsequent operations, as well as developing Naval Operations
Puerto Cortes, BCS where ordered by BRIGAIM, to contribute with the external
defense and contribute to the internal security of the country.
198. It is the location of NAVCAB. Marine Infantry Artillery Battalion (BATARTIM).
Cabo San Lucas, BCS
212. Its mission is to organize, train, prepare and enlist its component
199. It is the location of NAVROS. units, forming a specialized force capable of providing the
Santa Rosalia, BCS necessary logistical support before, during and after the
development of amphibious operations and subsequent
200. It is the location of NAVFEL. operations, as well as developing Naval Operations where
San Felipe, BC ordered by the BRIGAIM, to contribute with the external defense
and contribute to the internal security of the country. Marine
201. It is the location of NAVISMAR.
Corps Services Battalion (BATSERIM).
Marías Islands, Nay.
213. Its mission is to organize, train and enlist the IM units assigned
202. It is the location of NAVTOP.
within the Theater of Operations, applying the corresponding
Topolobampo, Sin.
legislation, in order to contribute to the maintenance of the rule
203. It is the location of NAVPEÑ. of law and the internal security of the country.
Puerto Peñasco, Son. Marine Infantry Brigade (BRIGIM).

204. It is the location of NAVCHILA. 214. Its mission is to execute Naval Operations within the jurisdiction
Boca de Chila, Nay. of the Naval Command and in Mexican marine areas, coasts,
ports and strategic installations, in order to contribute to the
205. It is the location of NAVSOC. maintenance of the rule of law and the internal security of the
Socorro Island, Col. country.
Marine Infantry Battalion (BIM).
206. It is the location of NAVHUAT.
Huatulco, Oax.

207. It is the location of NAVIXT.

Ixtapa, Gro.

4.- INDEPENDENT MARINE INFANTRY BRIGADES,

BATTALIONS AND COMPANIES.

208. Its mission is to organize, train, prepare and enlist a specialized

Marine Corps Force capable of projecting naval power, through
the execution of amphibious operations for external defense and
carrying out actions to assist in the internal security of the
country, as well as developing Operations immediate response
wherever the Naval Force orders.

10 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

215. Its mission is to carry out Naval Operations in the Mexican
marine zones, coasts, ports and strategic installations and
others that are ordered within the areas of responsibility of the
Naval Commands where they are assigned, in order to
contribute to the maintenance of the state of law and the
internal security of the country.
Independent Marine Infantry Company (CIIM).
216. It is the location of the Marine Infantry Brigade No.1 (BRIGIM-1).
Veracruz, Ver.
233. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 10 (BIM-10).
Topolobampo, Son.
234. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 11 (BIM-11).
Border, Tab.
235. Location of the Mazatlán Marine Corps No. 12 (BIM-12)
Battalion, Sin.
236. Location of the Battalion Marine Corps No. 13 (BIM-13)
Ciudad del Carmen, Camp.

217. It is the location of the Brigade Marine Corps No. 2 237. Location of the San Blas Marine Corps No. 14 (BIM-14)
(BRIGIM-2). Battalion, Nay.
Ensenada, BC
238. Location of the ChampotónMarine Corps No. 15 (BIM-15)
218. It is the location of the Marine Infantry Brigade No. 3 (BRIGIM- Battalion, Camp.
3).
Lerma, Capm. 239. Location of the Puerto Marine Corps No. 16 (BIM-16)
Vallarta Battalion, Jal.
219. It is the location of the Brigade Marine Corps No. 4
(BRIGIM-4). 240. Location of the Lerma Marine Corps No. 17 (BIM-17)
Guaymas, Son. Battalion, Camp.

220. It is the location of the Brigade Marine Corps No. 5 241. Location of the Manzanillo Marine Corps No. 18 (BIM-18)
(BRIGIM-5). Battalion, Col.
Isla Mujeres, Q Roo.
242. Location of the YucalpeténMarine Corps No. 19 (BIM-19)
221. It is the location of the (BRIGIM-6) Marine Corps No. 6 Battalion, Yuc.
Brigade.
243. Location of the Lázaro Marine Corps No. 20 (BIM-20)
Manzanillo, Col.
Cárdenas Battalion, Mich.
222. It is the location of the Marine Infantry Brigade No. 7 (BRIGIM-
244. Location of the Isla MujeresMarine Corps No. 21 (BIM-21)
7). Battalion, Q. Roo.
Mexico City.
245. Location of the Acapulco Marine Corps No. 22 (BIM-22)
223. It is the location of the Marine Infantry Brigade No. 8 (BRIGIM- Battalion, Gro.
8).
Puerto Chiapas, Chis. 246. Location of the Cozumel Marine Corps No. 23 (BIM-23)
Battalion, Q. Roo.
224. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 1 (BIM-1).
Matamoros, Tam. 247. Location of the Mexico CityMarine Corps No. 24 (BIM-24)
Battalion.
225. Location of Marine Infantry Battalion No. 2 (BIM-2).
Ensenada, BC
232. Location of the Chetumal Marine Corps No. 25 (BIM-25).
226. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 3 (BIM-3). CD. Battalion, Q. Roo.
Madero, Tam.
233. Location of the Huatulco Marine Corps No. 26 (BIM-26).
227. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 4 (BIM-4). La Battalion, Oax.
Paz, BC
234. Location of the Mexico Marine Corps No. 27 (BIM-27).
228. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 5 (BIM-5). City Battalion.
Veracruz, Ver.
235. Location of the Salina Marine Corps No. 28 (BIM-28).
229. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 6 (BIM-6). Cruz Battalion, Oax.
Puerto Peñasco, Son.
236. Location of the Mexico Marine Corps No. 29 (BIM-29).
230. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 7 (BIM-7). City Battalion.
Veracruz, Ver.
231. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 8 (BIM-8). 237. Location of the Puerto Marine Corps No. 30 (BIM-30).
Guaymas, Son. Chiapas Battalion, Chis.

232. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 9 (BIM-9). 254. Location of the Tuxpan Marine Corps No. 31 (BIM-31).
Coatzacoalcos, Ver. Battalion, Ver.

11 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

255. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 32 (BIM-32). Puerto 274. Where UNOPES, BIMFUSPAR and BATCOMAN 1 and 2 are
Chiapas, Chis. located. Donato Guerra, Mex.
256. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 33 (BIM-33).
Two Mouths, Tab.
5.- ADVANCED NAVAL STATIONS.
257. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 34 (BIM-34). Boca de
Chila, Nay.
275. They are fixed facilities to logistically support Marine Infantry units
258. Location of the Marine Infantry Battalion No. 35 (BIM-35). Two that carry out special operations in strategic areas of both
Mouths, Tab. coastlines and along the northern and southern borders of Mexico.
Advanced Naval Stations (ENA).
259. Where is the Independent Marine Corps Company No located? 11
(CIIM-11)?
276. They have their background in the IM Operation Bases, for their
Fishing, Tam.
operation, among other things, they have tactical and radio
260. Where is the Independent Marine Corps Company No. located? 21 communications equipment, in addition to having the capacity to
(CIIM-21)? house more than a hundred IM elements. Advanced Naval Stations
San Felipe, BC (ENA).

261. Where is the Independent Marine Corps Company No. located? 22 277. Since 2000, they have carried out their work in multiple points of
(CIIM-22)? the coastal states and extended even further along the border with
Santa Rosalia, BCS Belize and Guatemala with the aim of combating drug trafficking
and stopping the transfer of illegal and undocumented weapons.
262. Where is the Independent Marine Corps Company No. located? 23 Advanced Naval Stations (ENA).
(CIIM-23)?
Cabo San Lucas, BCS 278. It is the number of Advanced Naval Stations (ENA) that currently
exist, being a rapid reaction force, with adequate material and
263. Where is the Independent Marine Corps Company No. located? 41 highly trained human resources.
(CIIM-41)? 69 ENA's.
Marias Islands. Nay.

264. Where is the Marine Amphibious Brigade (BRIGAIM) located? 6.- AIRNAVAL SQUADRONS AND AIRCRAFT.
Tuxpan, Ver.

265. Where is the Marine Amphibious Battalion No. located? 1 279. They are operational tactical units made up of aircraft, with the
(BATAIM-1). mission of maritime patrol and surveillance, as well as
Tuxpan, Ver. transportation. Aeronaval Stations and Squadrons.

266. Where is the Marine Amphibious Battalion No. located? 2 280. They have the mission of carrying out "Air-Naval Warfare
(BATAIM-2). Operations", as well as "Naval Aeronautics Operations other than
Manzanillo, Col. War", in order to preserve National Sovereignty and Integrity,
contributing to the maintenance of the rule of law and safeguarding
267. Where is the Marine Infantry Artillery Battalion (BATARTIM) human life. Naval Air Squadrons.
located?
Tuxpan, Ver. 281. It is the meaning of the first digit that serves to identify the Naval Air
Squadrons of the Mexican Navy.
268. Where the Marine Corps Services Battalion (BATSERIM) is
Naval region in which the squadron is geographically assigned.
located.
Tuxpan, Ver.
282. It is the meaning of the second digit that serves to identify the
269. Where the Amphibious Assault Support Battalion (BATAPAN) is Naval Air Squadrons of the Mexican Navy.
located. Type of aircraft that comprises it, assigning the numeral “1” for
Tuxpan, Ver. fixed-wing aircraft and the numeral “2” for mobile-wing aircraft.

270. Where the Naval Police Brigade (BRIGPOLNAV) is located. 283. It is the meaning of the third digit that serves to identify the Naval
Veracruz, Ver. Air Squadrons of the Mexican Navy.
Naval Air Squadron number to which it corresponds.
271 Where is the Naval Police Battalion No. 1
. (BATPOLNAV-1). 284. Currently there is ____________ Naval Air Squadrons,
Veracruz, Ver. which _________ They are Fixed Wing, __ of Mobile Wing and __
High Command Air Naval Squadron.
272 21 squadrons: 09 fixed wing, 12 mobile wing and 01 AM squadron.
Where is the Naval Police Battalion No. 2 (BATPOLNAV-2).
.
Veracruz, Ver.

273
. Where is the Naval Police Battalion No. 3 (BATPOLNAV-3).
Veracruz, Ver.

12 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

285. They are a symbol of the naval power of the State, they represent
the Institution, its tradition and history, and due to the complexity of
the defense and safeguarding of the maritime interests of the
Mexican State.
The Aircraft.
286. Refers to the Mexican Naval Aeronautics in the aircraft of the
Mexican Navy.
"ANX" designator.
299. Type of ENSAR that has 02 Defender class rescue vessels.
Bravo.
300. The Mexican Navy provides the Search and Rescue service
through its ___________________ Search Stations,
Maritime Rescue and Surveillance; _ of the “ALFA” type and
of the
“BRAVO” type.
34 ENSAR: 10 "Alfa" type and 24 "Bravo" type.

287. It is the chronological numbering according to the type and class of
aircraft, with 1 corresponding to Fixed Wing aircraft, 2 for mobile
wing and 3 Unmanned aircraft.
Tuition.
288. It is the grouping of aircraft that carry out similar missions and
operational employment, both in naval warfare and in those derived
from the functions of the State.
Guy.
301. It was done with the purpose of covering the 2 coastlines that
Mexico has, covering the Mexican coasts to respond to all
emergency calls, providing extensive and efficient coordination
between each of them and fulfilling their mission of saving lives that
are in danger at sea.
Strategic distribution of the ENSAR.
(THIRD PART)

289. They are aircraft with the same or similar characteristics, designed 8.- SHIPYARDS AND REPAIR CENTERS
with the same tactical purpose and their classification will be THE MEXICO NAVY.
according to the name conferred by the manufacturing company.
Class.
302. They have the necessary infrastructure for the construction, repair
290. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to and maintenance of warships, as well as to provide service to
the 100 series. parastatal vessels.
Maritime Patrol and Surveillance. Shipyards and Repair Centers of the Mexican Navy.
291. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to
303. Its mission is to build and repair ships, to satisfy the requirements
the 200 series.
of the Secretariat of the Navy-Mexican Navy and the public and
Transport.
private sector.
Navy Shipyards (ASTIMAR).
292. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to
the 300 series.
304. It is the number of Shipyards that the Secretary of the Navy has.
Close Air Support.
5 Shipyards.
293. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to
the 400 series. 305. It is the location of Navy Shipyard No. 1 (ASTIMAR-1). Tampico,
Training. Tamps.

294. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to 306. It is the location of Marina Shipyard No. 3 (ASTIMAR-3).
the 500 series. Coatzacoalcos, Veracruz.
Recognition.
307. It is the location of Marina Shipyard No. 6 (ASTIMAR-6). Guaymas
295. Type of mission of the Mexican Navy aircraft that corresponds to sonora.
the 600 series.
Combat. 308. It is the location of Navy Shipyard No. 18 (ASTIMAR-18). Acapulco
Guerrero.

7.- NAVAL SEARCH STATIONS, 309. It is the location of Navy Shipyard No. 20 (ASTIMAR-20). Salina
MARITIME RESCUE AND SURVEILLANCE (ENSAR). Cruz. Oaxaca.

310. Its mission is to meet the repair and maintenance requirements of

the surface units of the Mexican Navy, according to the installed
296. Their mission is to “carry out search, rescue and relief operations
capacity, in order to maintain their operability.
and those assigned by the Command, in order to safeguard human
Marine Repair Centers (CENREP).
life at sea and assist in surveillance activities in fisheries and
311. It is the number of Repair Centers (CENREP) that the Secretary of
protected natural areas of Mexican maritime zones.
the Navy has.
Naval Search, Rescue and Maritime Surveillance Stations
4 Repair Centers (CENREP).
(ENSAR).
312. It is the location of CENREPFRONT - 5.
297. It is defined as the performance of the functions of supervision, Border, Tabasco.
communication, coordination, search and rescue of people in
danger, including the provision of medical advice, initial medical
assistance or medical evacuation.
Search and Rescue Service.

298. Type of ENSAR that has 02 Defender class rescue boats and 01
MLB (Motor Life Boat) type boat. Alpha.

13 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

313. It is the location of CENREPCARM - 7.
Ciudad del Carmen, Camp.
314. It is the location of CENREPCHET - 11.
Chetumal, Quintana Roo.
315. It is the location of CENREPMANZ - 14.
Manzanillo, Colima.
316. Its mission is to provide preventive, corrective maintenance,
technical and logistical support to the surface units that require it, in
order to maintain their machinery and equipment in optimal
operating conditions, which will also support the Naval Commands
and establishments as necessary. . Support Group for Surface
Units (GRAUFLOT).
317. It is the number of Support Groups for Surface Units (GRAUFLOT)
that the Secretary of the Navy has.
6 GRAUFLOT.
318. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 1 (GRAUFLOT-1).
Tampico, Tamps.
319. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 2 (GRAUFLOT-2).
Ensenada, BC
320. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 3 (GRAUFLOT-3).
Coatzacoalcos, Ver.
321. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 4 (GRAUFLOT-4).
Lázaro Cárdenas, Mich.
322. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 5 (GRAUFLOT-5).
Tuxpan, Ver.
323. Location of the Surface Unit Support Group No. 6 (GRAUFLOT-6).
Manzanillo, Col.
324. It is located in Veracruz next to San Juan de Ulúa, it represents a
long tradition in naval repair for the country, its mission is to provide
repair and maintenance requirements, as well as various
manufacturing to the surface units, to strengthen the Naval Power
of the Federation, ensuring quality in the work carried out through
the installed capacity and available resources of the establishment.
National Arsenal.
329. He teaches a Doctorate in Defense and National Security, as well
as one in Maritime and Port Administration; the Master's Degrees in
National Security, Naval Administration, Information Security,
Political Science, Geopolitics; and Specialties in Naval Command,
Weapons Systems, Operations Analysis, Computer Science,
Intelligence, Naval Communications, Naval Electronics, Law of the
Sea and Maritime, and Logistics.
Center for Higher Naval Studies (CESNAV).
330. Trains leading naval officers and future Navy commanders. In this
establishment, Engineering is taught: Naval Systems (General
Corps) and Hydrography (Marine Infantry).
Heroic Naval Military School (HENM).
331. Its mission is to instill nautical knowledge and the seafaring spirit
inherent to the naval career, and as one of its objectives, to bring
the message of peace and goodwill of the people and government
of Mexico to the five continents.
Training Ship “Cuauhtémoc”.
332. It is the length of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
90.50 m.
333. It is the sleeve of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
12.00 m.
334. It is the draft of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
5.20 m.
335. It is the displacement of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
1,800 t.
336. It is the autonomy of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
45 days.
337. It is the maximum sailing speed of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
14 knots.
338. It is the maximum engine speed of the BE Cuauhtémoc.
6 knots.
339. Trains and specializes naval aviator pilots, with the knowledge,
skills and aptitudes for the operation of the Mexican Navy aircraft.
Naval Aviation School.

340. Trains Officers with solid knowledge in the field of prevention and
9.- NAVAL UNIVERSITY. health care for naval personnel and their beneficiaries. Likewise, it
prepares them to provide medical services in the timely diagnosis
and treatment of diseases.
325. It constitutes the most important asset of the Secretary of the Navy Naval Medical School.
and as such, its proper performance is essential in the operations it
carries out daily to fulfill its mission.
Human resource.
326. It is considered the main means for the development and evolution
of naval personnel, which makes it the guiding axis of the
organization.
Naval Education.

327. It is constituted by the set of human, financial, infrastructure and

educational processes, through which the Secretary of the Navy
offers comprehensive naval education, through the development of
skills and values.
Naval Educational System.

328. It is responsible for implementing the System Naval

Educational,
in addition to efficiently integrating, regulating and coordinating in a
single entity all the study centers at the postgraduate, professional,
professional technical, training and training levels of the SEMAR.
Naval University.

14 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
341. It trains competent professionals in the field of Naval Nursing,
with a solid disciplinary preparation, for the health care of the
military and their beneficiaries, from a humanistic and ethical
philosophy.
Naval Nursing School.
342. Trains naval quartermasters with theoretical and practical
knowledge in administration, accounting and logistics, to support
the Naval Command in the administrative areas of naval units
and establishments.
Naval Quartermaster School.
343. Trains personnel in the area of operation and maintenance of
electronic equipment and systems of ships and facilities of the
Secretariat of the Navy-Navy of Mexico.
Naval Electronics School.
344. Trains personnel in the area of operation and maintenance of
equipment and systems of the surface units and dependencies of
the Mexican Navy.
Naval Machinery School.
345. Trains personnel with the technical knowledge and skills to carry
out the maintenance, conservation and operation of aircraft both
on the ground and in flight, in order to guarantee the safety of air
operations.
Naval Aviation Mechanics School.
346. Trains personnel with the technical knowledge, skills and abilities
to manage underwater communications systems.
Search, Rescue and Diving School.
10.- UNIT OF PORT CAPTAINS AND MARITIME AFFAIRS
(UNICAPAM).
347. Date on which the General Directorate of Port Captaincies and
Maritime Affairs is created, organically, operationally and
administratively dependent on the Undersecretariat of the Navy.
March 1, 2017.
348. Date on which the Port Captaincies and Maritime Affairs Unit
(UNICAPAM) came into operation, replacing the General
Directorate of Port Captaincies and Maritime Affairs. December
1, 2017.
349. It is responsible for planning, organizing, directing, controlling
and conducting the exercise of the National Maritime Authority in
the Mexican marine zones, coasts and port areas; as well as
direct, coordinate and supervise the Port Captaincies, among
other duties.
Port Captaincy and Maritime Affairs Unit (UNICAPAM).
350. Number of Port Captaincies belonging to SEMAR, distributed on
both coasts and in the interior of the national territory, which
administratively depend on UNICAPAM.
104 Port Captaincies.
351. It is responsible for exercising the National Maritime Authority
and the Maritime Administration in Mexico, as well as the
protection of the marine environment.
Marine Secretary.
11.- UNIFORM.
352. It was the first navy to use naval uniforms in 1665. French Royal
By: AEGV
Navy.
353. Navy that adopted uniforms only for its Officers in 1748, sailors
continued to wear their usual clothing.
British Royal Navy.
354. Year in which the sailor uniform of black and white hat, blue cloth
jacket and white pants was introduced into the naval forces of
most Western countries as an “orderly” uniform.
1857.
355. He established the dark blue and white colors for Officers and
Seamen and the sailors' pants (Blue Parade Suit). King George
XI.
356. The sailors held their hair with a piece of cloth; Officers with the
rank of knights wore hats, with the passage of time the hat
became the cap of Officers and Sub-Officers, and the piece of
cloth became the sailor's hat.
Sailor Headdress.
357. It was a scarf with which sailors covered their shoulders and
backs to avoid large stains on their clothes as a result of the
whale or turtle oil in their hair. Lapel or Collar.
358. It surrounds the Sailors' tie, it is the inheritance of the one that
formerly held the sailor's whistle.
Rabiza.
359. It was worn in ancient times on the neck to dry sweat, it is also
attributed to when sailors wore a cloth on their heads during
combat, then it was removed from the head and lowered to the
chest.
Bandana or Tie.
360. They are the 3 historical battles of Admiral Nelson. Abukir,
Copenhagen and Trafalgar.
361. English ship, whose sailors paraded for the first time with black
cloth (scarf or bowtie) at the funeral of Admiral Nelson, a color
adopted since then by all the navies of the world.
Warmick.
362. Garment established in 1858, during the Second French Empire
as the official uniform of sailors: wide-legged pants, a white shirt
with blue collars, a short wool coat and a striped sweater that
allowed sailors to be better visualized and located during
maneuvers. in high sea. Striped shirt.
363. It has its possible origin in the life of Admiral Nelson during one
of his battles, when he was wounded in action in the right arm by
unstitching one of the stripes on his cuff and pinning it to the
upper right button of his jacket.
Coca or Return of Gallon.
15 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
364. It was a piece of leather that the corsairs placed on their
shoulders to prevent their clothes from getting dirty by the parrot
or parrot that they used to keep as pets. It also arose from the
need to have something that would prevent the plywood from
falling off. shoulders.
Pallas.
365. They are worn on the left side of all uniforms. This custom comes
from the times of the Crusades, when knights wore the metal
insignia of their order to protect their hearts.
Decorations and Medals.
12.- THE USE OF THE SABER; COMMAND SYMBOL.
366. Its use continues today as a symbol of distinction of the Officers
of the Armed Forces, the delivery of this weapon by an Officer
has always been a sign of submission.
The Saber.
367. At funerals, it is placed along with the cap in the coffins until the
moment of burial, it is worn during the services of arms by those
in command, it can be worn by an Officer during his wedding and
retirement ceremony, inaugurations and change of command .
The Saber.
368. It is a tradition that is believed to come from the crusaders, the
crucifix, symbol of the cross, was represented on the hilt, it was
customary to kiss it before going into battle. Salute with the
saber.
369. If it is released during the greeting, it is the worst violation of the
etiquette of its use, it should never be drawn without reason
(tradition says "take me out with courage, save me with honor"),
neither in churches nor sanctuaries, its use is always with gloves,
a guarantor and a sash. The Saber.
13.- UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON THE LAW OF
THE SEA (UNCLOS).
370. It is the area where the sovereignty of a coastal State extends
beyond its territory and its Inland Waters, including its airspace,
bed and subsoil.
Territorial sea.
371. It is the width of the Territorial Sea.
12 Nautical Miles.
372. It is the line that joins the closest point of the baseline, at a
distance equal to the width of the Territorial Sea.
Outer limit of the Territorial Sea.
373. It is used to measure the width of the Territorial Sea. It is the line
that is formed when there is low tide along the coast.
Normal baseline.
374. They are the waters located inside the baseline of the Territorial
Sea of a coastal State.
Inland Waters.
375. Permanent port constructions will not be considered for the
purposes of the delimitation of the Territorial Sea.
Offshore facilities and artificial islands.
376. Right that ships of all States, whether coastal or landlocked, have
to navigate through a Territorial Sea. Right of innocent passage.
By: AEGV
377. It means navigating through the Territorial Sea of a coastal State
in order to cross said sea without entering internal waters or
stopping at a roadstead or port facility, as well as heading
towards or leaving the Inland Waters, or stopping at a of those
roadsteads or port facilities or leaving them. Passed.
378. It will be quick and uninterrupted, however, it includes detention
due to normal navigation incidents, due to force majeure or to
assist people, ships or aircraft in danger or in serious difficulty.
Innocent step.
379. This shall be done as long as it is not prejudicial to the peace,
good order or security of the coastal State.
Innocent step.
380. Activities considered harmful to the peace and security of a
coastal State, in which the use of innocent passage does not
apply.
Read the 12 prohibited activities, pp. 62 and 63. (1)
381. Activities considered harmful to the peace and security of a
coastal State, in which the use of innocent passage does not
apply.
Read the 12 prohibited activities, pp. 62 and 63. (2)
382. Activities considered harmful to the peace and security of a
coastal State, in which the use of innocent passage does not
apply.
Read the 12 prohibited activities, pp. 62 and 63. (3)
383. While using innocent passage in the territorial sea of a coastal
State, they must navigate on the surface and fly their flag.
Submarines and submersible vehicles.
384. It is any ship belonging to the FF. AA. of a State that bears the
distinctive external signs of the warships of its nationality, that is
under the command of an officer duly appointed by the
government of that State whose name appears in the
corresponding rank of officers or its equivalent, and whose staff
is subject to the discipline of the regular Armed Forces.
Warships.
385. This name is designated to the area contiguous to the Territorial
Sea of a coastal State, in which it may take the necessary control
measures to prevent violations of customs, fiscal, migration and
health laws, as well as punish violations of those laws. laws
committed in the MT. Contiguous Zone.
386. It is the extension of the Contiguous Zone, counted from the
baselines from which the width of the Territorial Sea is
measured.
24 Nautical Miles.
387. It is an area located beyond the Territorial Sea and adjacent to it,
subject to the legal regime, rights and jurisdiction of the coastal
State. The rights and freedoms of other States in that area are
governed by the relevant provisions of this Convention.
Exclusive economic zone.
16 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

388. Area in which the coastal State exercises sovereign rights for the
purposes of exploration and exploitation, conservation and
administration of living and non-living resources, of the waters
overlying the bed and of the bed and subsoil of the sea, and the
production of energy derived from water, currents and winds.
Exclusive economic zone.
389. It is the marine area in which the coastal State has jurisdiction for
the establishment and use of artificial islands, facilities and
structures, marine scientific research and the protection and
preservation of the marine environment.
Exclusive economic zone.
390. It is the extension of the Exclusive Economic Zone.
200 Nautical Miles.
that give said ship or aircraft the character of a pirate.
Piracy.
401. It is that ship or aircraft destined by the people under whose
effective command they are to commit illegal acts of violence,
detention or predation against the crew or passengers of a
private ship or a private aircraft, acts for which they will lose
their nationality.
Pirate ship or aircraft.
402. Any State can arrest or capture as a result of acts of piracy,
detain people and seize their property, the courts of the
arresting state may decide the penalties to be imposed.
Seizure of a pirate ship or aircraft.

391. It is the marine zone in which the coastal State has the exclusive
right to build, authorize and regulate the construction, operation
and use of artificial islands and facilities and structures that may
interfere with the exercise of the rights of the coastal State in the
area.
Exclusive economic zone.
392. It includes the bed and subsoil of the underwater areas that
extend beyond its Territorial Sea and throughout the natural
extension of its territory to the outer edge of the continental
margin, or up to a distance of 200 nautical miles counted from
the baselines from which the width of the Territorial Sea is
measured.
Continental platform.
393. Marine area in which the coastal State exercises sovereign rights
for the exploration and exploitation of its natural resources
(minerals), if it does not exploit or explore them, no one will be
able to undertake these activities without the consent of said
state, these rights are independent of its real or fictitious
occupation.
Continental platform.
394. It will be used by all States exclusively for peaceful purposes.
High seas.
395. Each State will establish the necessary requirements to grant it,
the registration of ships in a registry in its territory will give them
the right to fly its flag.
Nationality of the vessels.
396. Vessels will sail under the flag of a single State and will be
subject, on the high seas, to the exclusive jurisdiction of that
State. A ship may not change its flag during a voyage or during a
stopover, except in the case of an effective transfer of ownership
or a change of registration.
Legal status of ships.
397. Ships that enjoy complete immunity from jurisdiction with respect
to any State other than that of their flag. Warships and non-
commercial Official Service Vessels.
398. They are obliged to cooperate to the fullest extent possible in the
suppression of piracy on the high seas or in any other place not
under the jurisdiction of any State.
All the states.
403. They will cooperate to suppress illicit trafficking in narcotic
drugs and psychotropic substances carried out by ships on the
high seas in violation of international conventions.
All the states.
404. It may be carried out when the competent authorities of the
coastal State have reasonable grounds to believe that the ship
has committed an infringement of the laws and regulations of
that State.
Right to persecute.
405. It will cease at the moment the pursued vessel enters the
territorial sea of its flag State or that of a third State, and may
only be exercised by warships or military aircraft.
Right to persecute.
406. It will not be considered to have begun until the pursuing vessel
has verified that the pursued vessel is within the limits of the
Territorial Sea or, where appropriate, in the contiguous zone, in
the exclusive economic zone or on the continental shelf.
Persecution.
407. Actions to be taken when a ship is detained or seized outside
the Territorial Sea in circumstances that do not justify the
exercise of the right of pursuit.
The damage will be compensated.
14.- INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE
SAFETY OF HUMAN LIFE AT SEA (SOLAS).
408. It is the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea.
ALONE. ( Safety Of L ife At Sea )
409. It is the scope of application of the International Convention for
the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS).
To the ships of the Contracting States of the Convention.
410. It refers to the fact that the Contracting Governments will
provide the Secretary General of the Intergovernmental
Maritime Consultative Organization with a list of NGOs with
authority to act on their behalf and the text of the laws, decrees,
orders and regulations that they have promulgated governed by
the SOLAS Convention.
Obligations of Contracting Governments.

399. It is any illegal act of violence, detention or depredation

committed for personal purpose by the crew or passengers of a
private ship or private aircraft on the high seas or in a place not
subject to the jurisdiction of any State.
Piracy.

400. It is any act of voluntary participation in the use of a ship or

aircraft, when the person carrying it out has knowledge of facts

17 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
411. Ships not subject to the provisions of the SOLAS Convention
when embarking on a specific voyage will not be subject to them
if, due to bad weather, they are forced to deviate from the
planned route.
Cases of force majeure.
412. When it comes to evacuating people to avoid a danger to the
safety of their lives, the transport on their ships of a greater
number of people than would otherwise be permitted by the
SOLAS Convention may be authorized. Transportation of people
in case of emergency.
413. Rule that dictates that they will be carried out by officials of the
country in which the ship is registered, the Government of each
country may assign inspectors and organizations recognized by
it, guaranteeing its integrity and effectiveness.
Inspection and Recognition.
414. SOLAS rule that life-saving appliances shall be subject to initial
and subsequent survey, including plans of the fire-fighting
system on new ships, and pilot ladders, mechanical pilot ladders,
lights, markings and the means of giving acoustic signals.
Recognition of lifesaving devices.
415. Rule of the SOLAS Convention that dictates that the hull,
machinery and equipment of every cargo ship shall be
recognized upon completion of its construction and satisfactory in
all respects for the service for which the ship is intended.
Reconnaissance of the hull, machines and equipment of cargo
ships.
15.- HONORS
416. They are acts that are carried out as a manifestation of respect
that is offered to a person due to their position or hierarchy.
Military Honors.
417. They will perform military honors by firing cannon, by voice or
with a sailor's whistle while the National Flag is raised and until
sunset, as long as there is no superior in position or hierarchy.
Boats.
418. They will perform military honors with cannon shots, marching
band, war band, bugle or sailor's whistle while the National Flag
is raised and until sunset, as long as there is no superior in
position or hierarchy.
Establishments.
419. It consists of 21 cannon shots at intervals of 6 seconds, with the
sailor's whistle the first, second and third stanza of the flag call
will be played, with the bugle the complete honor march will be
played only once.
Honors to the President of the Republic.
420. It will be a National Flag that will have five white stars on the
green stripe.
Insignia flag to honor the Supreme Command in ceremonies.
421. It will be white in color, it will have a National Flag inscribed in its
upper left quarter; In its lower left quarter it will carry five gold
stars, assuming that the personnel is armed it will be with
presented weapons. Insignia flag to honor the Supreme
Command on visits.
422. There must be 19 shots, if they are made with a sailor's whistle
the first and second stanza of the flag call will be played, with a
bugle the complete honor march will be played only once.
Honors to the Secretary of the Navy.
By: AEGV
423. It will be a square flag that will have four white stars on the green
stripe.
Insignia flag to honor the High Command.
424. There must be 17 shots, if they are made with a sailor's whistle
the first stanza of the flag call and 2 long whistles will be played,
with a bugle the first stanza of the honor march and 2 honor calls
will be played.
Honors to the Undersecretary of the Navy.
425. It will be a square flag with two diagonal white stripes that cross it
in the shape of an “X”.
Flag insignia for honors to the Undersecretary of the Navy.
426. There must be 15 shots, if they are made with a sailor's whistle
the first stanza of the flag call and a long whistle will be played,
with a bugle the first stanza of the honor march and a call of
honor will be played.
Honors to the Chief Navy Officer.
427. It will be a square flag with a white admiralty-type trap anchor
centered in the green stripe.
Insignia flag to honor the Chief Officer.
428. There should be 13 shots, with a sailor's whistle the first verse of
the flag call and a short whistle will be played, with a bugle the
first verse of the honor march and a long call will be played.
Honors to the Chief of General Staff of the Navy.
429. It will be a square flag that bears the shield of the General Staff
of the Navy on the green stripe.
Insignia flag to honor the Chief of General Staff of the Navy.
430. They will be carried out according to their hierarchy with
command. Honors to the Inspector and Comptroller General of
the Navy.
431. There will be 11 shots, with a sailor whistle there will be three
long blasts, three honor calls will be played at the bugle.
Honors for Admirals in Command.
432. There will be 9 shots, with a sailor whistle there will be two long
blasts, two honor calls will be played at the bugle.
Honors for Vice Admirals with Command.
433. They will be 7 shots, with a sailor's whistle they will be a long
blast, a call of honor will be played at the bugle.
Honors for Rear Admirals with Command.
434. It is a square flag with 3 diagonal stripes of equal width with the
colors of the National Flag, in the upper left part white, the central
part green and in the lower right part red, in the center of the
green stripe there is a trap-type anchor. silver-colored admiralty,
which is hoisted on the halyard of the torrotito on Sundays,
holidays and ceremonies, and in foreign ports.
Torrotito de Proa Flag.
435. It is the representative flag of a unit or establishment whose staff
is larger than a company and is used to participate in parades or
ceremonies.
Dash flag.
18 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL CULTURE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

436. It is the representative flag used in place of the War Flag 445. Plan Phase Marina which is a process oriented to
during military training and routine activities in units and reconstruction and improvement of the affected system
establishments. (the population and its environment), as well as the
Banner. reduction of the risk of alert and danger, support is
provided to the agencies that must rebuild.
16.- NAVAL CIVIL PROTECTION UNIT Recovery.
(UNAPROCIV).
446. Scope of the Marine Plan that is executed using all
437. Date on which the Naval Civil Protection Unit available means of the Secretary of the Navy, in
(UNAPROCIV) of the Secretary of the Navy was created. coordination with the National Protection System.
November 1, 2021. National.

438. Its mission is to serve as a responsible body and liaison 447. Scope of the Navy Plan where the means available to a
with agencies and authorities of the 3 levels of Naval Region and/or assigned Commands are used, here
Government to develop and direct the institution's actions the command is exercised by the Commander of the
regarding Civil Protection, for prevention, assistance, Region.
recovery and support to the population in emergency Regional.
situations. emergency.
448. Scope of the Navy Plan where it is executed with the
Naval Civil Protection Unit (UNAPROCIV).
means assigned to a Region, Zone or Naval Sector
439. It was created in accordance with the National affected by a destructive agent, the command it
Development Plan 2019-2024 and the Navy Sector exercises the Commander
Program, to “assist the population in cases and areas of correspondent.
disaster and humanitarian aid, through individual or joint Local.
naval operations in support of the affected sectors. ”.
Naval Civil Protection Unit (UNAPROCIV).

440. Its responsibilities are: Prepare, update, operate and

monitor the SEMAR Civil Protection Program, Coordinate
the support that the mobile brigades will provide in
emergency cases. and areas of
disaster and Coordinate with the
corresponding agencies the training and training of
personnel on Civil Protection issues.
Naval Civil Protection Unit (UNAPROCIV).

17.- MARINE PLAN.

441. It assists the civilian population in cases and areas of disaster or emergencies, acting alone or jointly with the Army, Air Force and
federal, state, municipal, social and private sector agencies.
Navy Plan Mission.

442. It is to contribute to the protection of the physical integrity of people, their property, the production plant and its environment, as
well as maintaining the confidence of the population in the response capacity of the Mexican Navy.
Operational Purpose of the Marine Plan.

443. Phase of the Marine Plan that is activated upon knowledge that an incident will affect a jurisdiction, carrying out the set of actions
and mechanisms aimed at reducing risks.
Prevention.

444. Phase of the Marine Plan that is activated at the time that naval personnel and/or ships, vehicles and aircraft are deployed, to
provide any support to the affected population, will end when there is no longer a trapped, isolated or endangered population, or,
after 8 days after the passage of the disturbing phenomenon.
Help.

19 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

TOTAL QUESTIONS: 560.

UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
NAVAL LEGISLATION 2022 only Mexican
political affairs of the country.
(FIRST PART) Right of Association.
1.- POLITICAL CONSTITUTION OF
THE EUM .
1. Rights that all people in the United Mexican States
will enjoy, recognized in the Constitution and in
the international treaties to which the Mexican
State is a party.
Human rights.
2. They have the obligation to promote, respect,
protect and guarantee human rights in accordance
with the principles of universality,
interdependence, indivisibility and progressivity.
Authorities.
3. An act prohibited in the United Mexican States,
those who enter the national territory will achieve,
by this fact alone, their freedom and the protection
of the laws.
Slavery.
4. Prohibited action that is motivated by ethnic or
national origin, gender, age, disabilities, social
condition, health conditions, religion, opinions,
sexual preferences, marital status or any other
action that violates dignity human.
Discrimination.
5. Right that every person in Mexico has, the State
will impart and guarantee it, it will be universal,
inclusive, public, free and secular.
Education.
6. They make up basic education in Mexico.
Initial, preschool, primary and secondary
education.
7. It will not be the subject of any judicial or
administrative inquisition, except in the event that
it attacks the morals, private life or rights of third
parties, causes a crime, or disturbs public order.
Freedom of expression (manifestation of ideas).
8. All information in possession of any Government
agency that uses public resources will be public
and may only be temporarily reserved for these
reasons.
Public interest and National Security.
9. It has jurisdiction to hear matters related to access
to public information and the protection of
personal data of any authority, entity, body or
organization. Guarantor Agency.
10. Right that public officials and employees will
respect, as long as it is formulated in writing, in a
peaceful and respectful manner. In political
matters, only citizens of the Republic may make
use of this right.
Right of petition.
11. Right that cannot be curtailed (restricted) as long
as it is done peacefully for any lawful purpose,
2 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
citizens may do so to take part in the
12. Right that the inhabitants of the United Mexican
States have, for their security and legitimate
defense, with the exception of those prohibited by
Law.
Possess weapons in your home.
13. The right that every person has under the
recognition of refugee status will be carried out in
accordance with international treaties and the law
will regulate its origins and exceptions.
Right to Political Asylum.
14. Right of every person granted by courts that will be
expeditious to impart it within the deadlines and
terms established by law, issuing their resolutions
promptly, complete and impartial.
Right to Justice.
15. Period after the arrest of an accused before
judicial authority, starting from his being made
available for justification with an order linking him
to the process of the crime for which he is
charged.
72 hours.
16. Authority that may request preventive detention
from the judge when other precautionary
measures are not sufficient to guarantee the
appearance of the accused at trial, the
development of the investigation and the
protection of the victim, witnesses or the
community.
Public ministry.
17. Crimes in which the judge will order informal
preventive detention. Read page 8 art. 19.
paragraph 2.
18. Authorities responsible for investigating crimes,
which will act under the direction and command of
the former in the exercise of this function.
Public Ministry and Police.
19. Authority that is responsible for the exercise of
criminal action before the courts, the law will
determine the cases in which individuals may
exercise criminal action before the judicial
authority.
Public ministry.
20. Authority that will execute the action of domain
forfeiture through a jurisdictional procedure of a
civil nature and autonomous from the criminal one.
Public ministry.
21. Number of instances that no criminal trial should
exceed. No one can be tried twice for the same
crime, whether he is acquitted or convicted at trial.
3 instances.
22. It is responsible for the ownership and control of
the lands and waters included within the limits of
the national territory, the natural resources of the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
continental shelf, the underwater bases of the
islands, the waters of the territorial seas, inland
marine waters and any other waters not included
are considered as an integral part.
The nation.

23. It extends to 200 NM, measured from the baseline

from which the territorial sea is measured, where
the Nation exercises sovereignty rights and the
jurisdictions determined by the laws of Congress.
Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ).

3 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
24. Authority empowered to restrict or suspend
individual rights and guarantees in case of
invasion, serious disturbance of public peace, or
any other that puts society in serious danger or
conflict, prior approval of the Congress of the
Union or the Permanent Commission .
Republic President.
25. Number of States that make up the constituent
parts of the Federation.
32 States and Mexico City.
26. It is the federative entity, headquarters of the
Powers of the Union and Capital of the United
Mexican States.
Mexico City.
27. It is the Division of the Supreme Power of the
Federation for the exercise of its functions.
Legislative, Executive and Judicial.
28. Supreme Power of the Federation that is
deposited in a single individual who will be called
"President of the United Mexican States."
Executive power.
29. It directs foreign policy and celebrates international
treaties, as well as terminates, denounces,
suspends, modifies, amends, withdraws
reservations and formulates interpretative
declarations on them, submitting them to the
approval of the Senate.
Federal Executive.
30. They will establish human rights protection
organizations, which will hear complaints against
acts or omissions of an administrative nature
coming from any authority or public servant.
Congress of the Union and the legislatures of the
federal entities.
31. They will make public, non-binding
recommendations, complaints and complaints to
the respective authorities when they fall into
alleged violations of Human Rights.
Congress of the Union and the legislatures of the
federal entities.
32. Organizations that may call the responsible
authorities or public servants to appear to explain
the refusal when the recommendations issued are
not accepted due to alleged violations of Human
Rights. Chamber of Senators or Permanent
Commission and the Legislatures of the Federal
Entities.
2.- ORGANIC LAW OF THE MEXICO
NAVY.
33. It is a national military institution, of a permanent
nature, whose mission is to use the naval power of
the Federation for external defense and protect
the sovereignty of the Nation.
Navy of mexico.
34. They are powers of the Mexican Navy.
4 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
Read the 17 attributions art. 2, pp. 13 and 14. (1)
35. They are powers of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 17 attributions art. 2, pp. 13 and 14. (2)
36. They are powers of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 17 attributions art. 2, pp. 13 and 14. (3)
37. It exercises its powers on its own or jointly with the
Mexican Army and Air Force, or in conjunction
with the agencies of the Federal Executive when
so ordered by the Supreme Command.
Navy of mexico.
38. They are the resources that make up the Mexican
Navy.
Human, material, financial and animals.
39. They are made up of naval personnel who provide
their services in the Mexican Navy, as well as
those assigned or commissioned in the
Secretariat. of Marine
and in others
Dependencies, are subject to the laws and
regulations of naval and military order.
Human Resources.
40. They are made up of surface, air-naval, marine
infantry and other operational units, as well as the
movable and immovable property required by the
Mexican Navy.
Material resources.
41. They are those assigned in the Federation
Expenditure Budget to the Secretary of the Navy.
Financial resources.
42. They are made up of elements of different animal
species, trained to perform specific tasks in
support of the fulfillment of the mission and
powers.
Animal Resources.
43. It is exercised by the President of the United
Mexican States. Supreme Command.
44. It is the command exercised by the Secretary of
the Navy.
High Command.
45. It is the command carried out by the heads of:
Naval Forces; Naval Regions and the High
Command Headquarters.
Senior Commanders in Chief.
46. These are the commands carried out by the heads
of: Naval Zones and others named by the High
Command.
Higher Commands.
47. These are the commands held by the heads of:
Sectors, Bases, Battalions, Squadrons,
Squadrons, Ships, Aircraft, CIIM, UNAPROP,
ENSAR and others designated by the High
Command. Subordinate Commands.
48. The powers of this Command are: To have all the
resources that constitute the AM, to appoint the
High Command, to appoint the Higher Commands
in Chief and to allow the operational organic units
of the Mexican Navy to leave the country.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
Supreme Command.
49. It is responsible to the Supreme Command and its
powers are: Propose, develop and conduct naval
policy and strategy, operate and administer the
naval power of the Federation, participate in
national security policy and plans.
High Command.
50. The powers of this Command are: Creation,
organization and maritime, air and territorial
deployment of the Naval Regions, Forces, Zones
and Sectors, V. create

the
establishments and operational units of the AM,
propose to the MS the Superior Commands in
Chief, designate the JEMGA, Superior Commands
and Subordinate Commands.
High Command.

5 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
9/ -thearrany OF HARIMA PFAM – 2 0 2 2
51. They are the commanders designated with this character by the
Supreme Command or High Command and those who exercise
it will be from the permanent militia.
Main Commands.
52. They are the commands designated with this character by the
corresponding command, while the holder is appointed and
those who exercise it will be from the permanent militia.
Interim Commands.
53. These are the commands that are exercised due to the
temporary absence of the incumbent or interim that prevents
him from carrying out his duties, in case of illness, leave,
vacation, out-of-position commissions or other reasons.
Accidental Controls.
54. It is the command carried out in unforeseen cases due to the
momentary absence of the holder, acting or accidental, as well
as that exercised by the most senior Commander in a meeting
of forces, units or naval personnel, when there is no previously
designated Command.
Incidental Controls.
55. He will be replaced by the Undersecretary and, in his absence,
by the Chief Officer or by the Admiral designated by the High
Command. High Command.
56. He will be supplied by the Chief of Staff.
Naval Forces Commands and High Command Headquarters.
57. He will be replaced by the most senior Zone Commander in his
jurisdiction.
Naval Region Commands.
58. He will be replaced by his Chief of Staff and in his absence by
whomever the Higher Command in Chief designates.
Higher Commands.
59. They will be replaced by the Command Group Leaders, Second
Commanders or their equivalents, in their absence, by whoever
is designated by the corresponding Higher Command.
Subordinate Commands.
60. They are made up of naval personnel, surface units, air forces
and Marine Corps, organized to fulfill the mission and powers
assigned to the Mexican Navy.
Naval Forces.
61. They are formed temporarily, with the necessary means to fulfill
a specific mission; The Command of these will be designated by
the High Command, Superior Command in Chief or Superior
Command.
Task Forces.
62. They are geostrategic areas, determined by the Supreme
Command, which group together Zones and Sectors,
operational units, establishments and naval personnel. The
Commanders will be of the Admiral category subordinated to the
High Command. Naval Regions.
63. It is integrated with the naval personnel, operational units and
naval establishments in the territorial scope determined by the
High Command, the Commander will be of the category of
Admiral subordinate to the High Command.
High Command Headquarters.
6 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
64. They are the geographic-maritime areas determined by the
Supreme Command, which group Naval Sectors, operational
units, and establishments that are determined. The
Commanders will be of the Admiral category subordinated to the
Commander of the corresponding Naval Region.
Naval Zones.
65. They are the geographic-maritime subdivisions determined by
the High Command, which have under their command
operational units and establishments that are determined. The
Commanders will be of the Admiral category subordinated to the
Command of the corresponding Naval Region or Zone.
Naval Sectors.
66. They are those with maritime, air and land capabilities, which will
have the necessary naval personnel from the Corps and
Services, through which the powers of the Mexican Navy are
materialized.
Operational Units.
67. It is an operational organization composed of 2 or more naval
squadrons, which are responsible for supervising the activities
of the attached surface units. Naval Flotilla.
68. They are made up of naval personnel and surface units, the
Commanders will be of the category of Admiral of the CG and
will be subordinate to the corresponding Force, Region, Zone or
Naval Sector Commander.
Naval Flotilla.
69. It is an operational organization made up of 2 to 4 surface units
of the same type or class that fulfill the same mission.
Naval Squadron.
70. They are made up of naval personnel and surface units, the
Commanders will be of the Captain category and will be
subordinate to the corresponding Force, Region, Zone or Naval
Sector Commander.
Naval Squadron.
71. They are ships of different types and classes, intended to carry
out maritime, coastal or lake operations that are required to fulfill
the mission and powers of the Mexican Navy.
Surface Units.
72. They are specialized operational units to carry out operations to
safeguard human life at sea, as well as proximity maritime
surveillance in ports and coasts. subordinated to the
corresponding Force, Region, Zone or Naval Sector
Commander.
Naval Search, Rescue and Maritime Surveillance Stations
(ENSAR).
73. They are responsible for the planning, execution and supervision
of naval operations, as well as the logistical support of the
aircraft assigned to the Forces, Regions, Headquarters and
Naval Zones. The Commanders will be of the Admiral Category
and are subordinate to the Naval Command. correspondent.
Naval Air Bases.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
74. They are operational units responsible for
supervising operations as well as controlling the
maintenance of the attached Naval Air Units and
the training of their crews. The Commanders will
be of the Captain category subordinated to the
Commander of the corresponding Naval Air Base.
Naval Air Squadrons.
75. They are aircraft of different types, intended to
carry out operations aeronavals that are
required for the
compliance with the mission and powers of the
Mexican Navy.
Aeronaval Operational Units.
76. They are independent brigade type units made up
of 5 or more Battalions, reinforced by a Field
Artillery Battalion, an Amphibious Assault
Battalion, a Group of Services and necessary
support, assigned to the Naval Forces and their
Commander will be of the Admiral category. .
Marine Amphibious Brigades.
77. They are regimental type units, they are made up
of 2 or more Marine Infantry Battalions and a
Service Group, attached to the Naval Regions and
the High Command Headquarters and their
Commander will be of the Admiral category.
The Marine Infantry Brigades.
78. They are the basic tactical units that the Region,
Zone or Naval Sector Commands must have, to
fulfill the mission and powers of the Mexican Navy.
The Commanders will be of the Admiral category.
Marine Infantry Battalions.
79. They are the basic maneuver units of a Marine
Infantry Battalion, they may be independent when
they depend on the Naval Command to which they
are attached, their Commander will be of the
Captain category.
Marine Infantry Companies.
80. It is an independent brigade-type unit made up of
a group of special forces, 2 commando battalions,
a parachute battalion, a group of necessary
services and supports, it is responsible for the
development of strategic plans for external
defense and to contribute to security. inside the
country.
Special Operations Unit.
81. It is the specialized operational unit to carry out
support operations for public security institutions.
The Naval Police brigade will be under its charge
and will assume administrative control of the naval
personnel commissioned in the National Guard.
The Chief will be of the rank of Admiral and will
depend on organically from the High Command.
Naval Police Unit.
82. They are the specialized operational units to carry
out port protection operations, on their own or in
support of the competent authorities, in
accordance with current legal systems.
Naval Port Protection Units (UNAPROP).
83. Their purpose is to train, train, educate and
7 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
provide studies to level technical,
technical-professional, superior and
postgraduate courses for personnel of the
Mexican Navy and scholarship recipients under
the terms of the General Naval Education Plan.
Naval Educational Establishments.
84. They are all those real estate, built and built to
house and concentrate the human and material
resources necessary for the fulfillment and
development of their powers and functions, as well
as land, shooting and training ranges intended for
the training of naval personnel.
Installations of the Mexican Navy.
85. They house the headquarters of the Commands,
their staffs, operational units and administrative
areas of Commands of Regions, Zones, Naval
Sectors, Marine Infantry Units and Air-Naval
Bases.
General Headquarters.
86. Fixed facilities established in strategic locations
within the jurisdiction of the Naval Regions to
support operations.
Naval Stations.
87. They are the schools, study centers, institutes,
training centers, training centers and the
administrative headquarters of the Naval
University.
Naval Educational Establishments.
88. They are hospital centers, hospitals, sanatoriums
and clinics. Health Establishments.
89. It is the infrastructure specialized and equipped to
provide maintenance to units, material and
equipment of the Mexican Navy, as well as for the
construction of ships.
Establishments for Maintenance and Repairs.
90. It is that material that is in operational conditions,
determined by the regulatory provisions.
Active.
91. It is that material that can be activated for service.
In reserve.
92. It is that material that is in this process to be
incorporated into active service, and that in
process to recover or update operating standards.
In manufacturing, construction or modernization.
93. It is that material that is not susceptible to
recovery.
In the process of being discharged.
94. They are the advisory bodies of the High
Command, which provide elements of judgment
for decision-making.
EMGA, Admiralty Council, UIN and others that in
the opinion of the High Command are necessary.
95. Titled persons who will assist the High Command
in fulfilling its duties.
Undersecretariat, Chief Officer's Office, Inspection
and Comptroller General of the Navy, the General
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
Coordination of Ports and Merchant Navy, Naval
Attaché Offices and other public servants.

96. It is the operational advisory body of the High

Command responsible for the preparation,
planning, coordination and supervision of the
naval operations that are established, required for
the fulfillment of the mission and powers of the
Mexican Navy.
General Staff of the Navy.

8 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
97. It is the analysis body for consultation, agreement
and decision-making on matters of importance to
the Mexican Navy, chaired by the High Command.
Admiralty Council.
98. It is the advisory body in charge of generating the
intelligence information necessary for the
formulation of National Security Plans in which the
Mexican Navy participates. Naval Intelligence Unit.
99. They will form and integrate the reduced Admiralty
Council, which will hear about non-conformities
with the resolutions issued by the Disciplinary
Bodies and the Naval Board.
Secretary, Undersecretary, Chief Officer,
Inspector, JEMGA and Commands of the Naval
Forces.
100. They will form and integrate the expanded
Admiralty Council, whose powers are: Advise the
High Command on strategic matters, provide
elements of judgment on matters of development
of naval power and propose policies related to the
maritime field.
Secretary, Undersecretary, Chief Officer,
Inspector, JEMGA and Commands of the Naval
Forces and Regions.
101. They are in charge of sanctioning serious offenses
against naval discipline, and they will not be able
to hear matters in which a person who is not a
military officer is involved.
Disciplinary Bodies.
102. They make up the Disciplinary Bodies of the
Mexican Navy. Board of Admirals, Councils of
Superior Honor, Councils of Ordinary Honor and
Councils of Discipline.
103. It is the permanent administrative body, it will be
competent to hear the disagreement expressed by
naval personnel, giving a resolution within a period
of no more than 90 days, regarding: Ladder
situations, Seniority in the rank, exclusion for
promotion, postponements, adaptation rank and
move into the permanent militia.
Naval Board.
104. These are the essential requirements to be
discharged into active service in the Mexican
Navy.
Read the 6 requirements page. 23 art. 44.
105. These are the methods to register for active
service in the Mexican Navy.
By voluntary contract and by admission to naval
educational establishments.
106. It is characterized by its stability in service.
Permanent Militia.
107. They may obtain the different degrees in
accordance with the procedures established in the
Law or by carrying out studies in accordance with
the needs of the authorized organic payrolls and in
accordance with their profession, on their own and
without prejudice to the service.
Permanent Militia Personnel.
9 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
108. They will provide their services for the time
established in their contract and in accordance
with what is stipulated in its clauses. Auxiliary
Militia.
109. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary Militia with professional technical
level studies.
Third Master.
110. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary Militia with professional technical
level studies with a specialty. Second Master.
111. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary Militia with higher technical university
level studies.
First Master.
112. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary and Permanent Militia with bachelor's
degrees.
Lieutenant of Lieutenant.
113. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary and Permanent Militia with a specialty
or master's degree.
Frigate Lieutenant.
114. Degree that can be obtained by naval personnel of
the Auxiliary and Permanent Militia with a related
second specialty or doctorate. Ship lieutenant.
115. You may be promoted by degree adaptation by
having completed studies on your own in
accordance with your profession without prejudice
to the service and that are useful for the Mexican
Navy, provided that your studies have official
recognition of validity by the Ministry of Public
Education.
Auxiliary Militia.
116. They are those people of foreign nationality who
are studying in naval educational establishments,
they will not be considered as personnel of the
Mexican Navy.
Fellows.
117. It is the classification of the Corps in the Mexican
Navy. General Corps, Marine Infantry and Naval
Aeronautics.
118. It is the core personnel of the different Corps and
Services. Professional Staff.
119. It is the scale personnel of the different Corps and
Services. Professional and non-professional
technical personnel.
120. They are made up of personnel who have
completed their studies at the HENM and for the
cadets of this establishment who complete their
studies in higher education institutions abroad.
Nuclei of the Bodies.
121. They are made up of personnel who have
completed studies in naval educational
establishments of upper secondary or professional
technical level, recognized by the Ministry of
Public Education.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
Scales of professional technical bodies.

122. It is made up of personnel who have completed

training studies in naval educational
establishments in accordance with applicable
regulations.
Scales of non-professional technical bodies.

123. They are made up of personnel who have

completed their studies at naval educational
establishments at the bachelor's level or those
who have registered in the Mexican Navy. Cores
of the Services.

124. They are made up of personnel who have

completed upper secondary or professional
technical level studies recognized by the Ministry
of Public Education.
Scales of professional technical services.

10 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
125. They are made up of personnel who have
received training in naval educational
establishments or who, upon entering the SAAM,
have skills in a particular trade. Scales of non-
professional technical services.
126. Situations in which Mexican Navy personnel may
be changed Corps, Service, Core or Scale.
Needs of the service, recommendation of a
Medical Council and request of the interested
party.
127. Situation of change of Corps or Service, in which
the soldier will not lose his rank or seniority.
For service needs or recommendation of a
Medical Council.
128. Situation of change of Corps or Service, in which
the soldier will occupy the last place in the rank he
holds in the Corps or Service of the rank to which
he will belong from the date of the change.
At the request of the interested party or
recommendation of a Medical Council for injuries
in acts not attributable to the service.
129. It is the personnel that is responsible for exercising
the levels and types of Command established by
law, operating and maintaining the air-naval,
surface and marine infantry units, as well as
carrying out the Commands, positions and
commissions that are required for compliance with
the mission and powers of the Mexican Navy.
Corps Personnel.
130. It is the personnel that is responsible for exercising
the positions and commissions inherent to their
service or specialty, carrying out the activities
corresponding to their profession, specialty or
trade, and carrying out the positions and
commissions conferred on them in the Mexican
Navy.
Services Personnel.
131. Agency that manages the Naval
Education, with the
purpose of providing capabilities and skills to naval
personnel, covering the different educational
levels and
naval doctrinal principles, oriented to knowledge,
dissemination, application of science and culture
to fulfill their functions.
Naval University.
132. These are the levels of education provided in
naval educational establishments, operational and
administrative units and in national or foreign
educational centers.
Training, Training, Higher Secondary Education
and Higher Education.
133. It will issue the titles, certificates, certificates or
diplomas corresponding to personnel who
complete studies in naval educational
establishments.
Naval University.
134. Time committed to providing their services by
11
By: AEGV
Naval Personnel who took courses on behalf of
the Mexican Navy in national educational centers
outside of it.
A time equivalent to 2 times the duration of your
studies.
135. Time committed to providing their services by
Naval Personnel who took courses on behalf of
the Mexican Navy in foreign educational centers
outside of it.
A time equivalent to 3 times the duration of your
studies.
136. The personnel selected to take courses in naval
educational establishments must sign a contract
that establishes the obligation to serve:
A time equivalent to the duration of your studies.
137. Within naval personnel, their purpose is the
exercise of authority, granting its holder the rights,
obligations and duties inherent to the situation in
which he or she finds himself, established in the
respective laws and regulations.
Hierarchical grades.
138. Are from its use exclusive of the
Navy of Mexico, so not
would be used by staff civil,
corporations,
dependencies or entities that are outside the
institution. Hierarchical grades.
139. Personnel who are studying Higher Level courses
in the different naval educational establishments
are called.
Cadets.
140. Personnel who are studying Higher Secondary
Level courses in the different naval educational
establishments are called.
Students.
141. Period that must remain who reaches the
maximum grade, in order to receive a monthly
allowance equal to the next higher grade, each
said term the receipts will be increased to the next
higher grade of those received. 5 years.
142. It is the highest grade of the Corps' Core
personnel. Admiral.
143. It is the highest grade of the Professional
Technical Scale personnel of the Corps and
Services.
Lieutenant Commander.
144. It is the highest grade of Non-Professional Scale
personnel of the Corps and Services.
Ship lieutenant.
145. It is the highest grade of the Core Services
personnel. Vice Admiral.
146. It is integrated by grouping personnel by Corps
and Services, nuclei and scales in descending
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
order, based on the category, grade and seniority
in the grade, of each element, indicating the
specialties they hold.
Scale.

147. These are the situations of the personnel of the

Mexican Navy related to the service.
Active, Retirement and Reserve.

148. Situation of personnel who are providing their

services in naval units and establishments of the
Ministry of the Navy.
Asset.

149. Situation of personnel in active service when they

are awaiting orders to be assigned a position or
commission, or by resolution of a disciplinary
body.
Available.

12 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
150. Situation of personnel in active service in the
category of Admirals and Ship Captains, who, at
their own request and authorized by the High
Command, do not temporarily hold a position or
commission.
On deposit.
151. Situation of personnel in active service when they
are linked to a process, serving a sentence and
who have not been dismissed by an enforceable
sentence or suspended by a final resolution of the
competent administrative body.
In special situation.
152. Leave granted to naval personnel to resolve
immediate personal matters.
Minor License.
153. Leave granted to naval personnel to resolve
personal matters that require more time than that
granted for minor leave, but without separating
from active service. Ordinary License.
154. License granted to naval personnel to temporarily
separate from active service for the period
indicated in the respective regulations.
Extraordinary License.
155. Leave granted to naval personnel when they
require medical treatment or time to recover their
health due to an illness that prevents them from
performing their service.
Sick Leave.
156. License granted to naval personnel about to be
retired due to age limits.
Age Limit License.
157. Leave granted to naval personnel to separate from
active service for an indefinite period.
Unlimited License.
158. It has the power to grant, modify or cancel the
licenses established in the Organic Law of the
Mexican Navy, in accordance with the provisions
of the applicable regulations. High Command.
159. It has the power to retain in the active personnel
the personnel who are considered in the cause of
retirement due to age limit and their services are
necessary, as long as the orders for dismissal
from active service and registration in a retirement
situation have not been issued. Secretary of the
Navy.
160. It is the definitive separation from active service of
the Mexican Navy.
Low.
161. They are grounds for dismissal from active service
of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 13 causes art. 87 pages 31 and 32. (1)
162. They are grounds for dismissal from active service
of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 13 causes art. 87 pages 31 and 32. (2)
163. They are grounds for dismissal from active service
of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 13 causes art. 87 pages 31 and 32. (3)
13
By: AEGV
164. He will communicate the dismissal of Admirals
personnel.
Senior Navy Officer.
165. It will communicate the dismissal of the Captains,
Officers, Cadets and Students personnel.
General Director of Human Resources.
166. He will communicate the dismissal of the Classes
and Seamanship personnel. Commanders of
Region, Force, Naval Zone and High Command
Headquarters.
167. Transfer to deposit, extraordinary or unlimited
license, or withdrawal will not be authorized at the
request of the interested party, when the country is
in this situation.
Emergency, invasion, serious disturbance of the
peace or any other that puts society in serious
danger.
168. It is made up of Admirals, captains and officers
who are retired or on leave upon request, Classes
and Sailors on leave upon request until they are
36 years old, Officers, Classes and Sailors of the
SMN until they are 36, 33 and 30 years old
respectively, Captains and Officers of the
Merchant Navy, civilian employees of the SEMAR,
civilian personnel with a profession or trade related
to marinas and ports and by Mexican citizens who
request it up to 30 years of age.
First Reservation.
169. It is made up of Classes and Sailors on leave upon
request until the age of 45, Officers, Classes and
Sailors of the SMN until the age of 50, 45 and 40
respectively, Captains and Officers of the
Merchant Navy up to the age of 50, and by
Mexican citizens who They request it up to 40
years of age.
Territorial Army.
170. You may call the first or second reserve of the
Mexican Navy, in its entirety, in part or jointly to
carry out exercises or verify its existence.
High Command.
3.- CODE OF CONDUCT OF THE
SECRETARY OF
THE NAVY.
171. It is a serious administrative offense incurred by a
public servant when he or she intervenes, due to
his or her duties, in the attention, processing or
resolution of a matter in which he or she has a
conflict of interest or a legal impediment.
Performance under Conflict of Interest.
172. It is the possible impact on the impartial and
objective performance of the functions of public
servants, due to personal, family or business
interests.
Conflict of interests.
173. Principle that encourages compliance with legal
regulations, with a strict sense of service to
society, guaranteeing professionalism, as well as
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
the values of respect for human rights and
leadership.
Legality.

174. Principle that promotes rectitude in the exercise of

employment, position or commission, promoting
an open government that promotes maximum
publicity and public scrutiny of its functions before
society, guaranteeing transparency and
accountability, as well as the value of respect.
Honesty.

14 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
175. Principle that seeks that public servants
correspond to the trust that the State has
conferred on them, in order to satisfy the best
interest of collective needs and generate full
certainty of their conduct before all people,
guaranteeing integrity; the values of public interest
and cultural and ecological environment.
Loyalty.
176. Principle that seeks to promote neutral and non-
discriminatory access of all people to the same
institutional and governmental conditions,
opportunities and benefits, thus guaranteeing
equity, objectivity and competition on merit; the
values of gender equity and equality and non-
discrimination, and the rule of integrity of dignified
behavior.
Impartiality.
177. Principle that seeks to consolidate government
objectives through a culture of austere public
service, oriented to results and based on the
optimization of resources, guaranteeing
effectiveness, economy and discipline, as well as
the value of cooperation.
Efficiency.
178. It refers to the fact that public servants act at all
times seeking maximum attention to the needs
and demands of society above particular interests
and benefits, unrelated to collective satisfaction.
Public interest.
179. It refers to the fact that public servants conduct
themselves with austerity and without ostentation,
and provide dignified and cordial treatment to
people in general, their co-workers, superiors,
equals and subordinates, considering at all times
their rights, in such a way. way that encourages
courteous dialogue and the harmonious
application of instruments that lead to
understanding, through effectiveness and public
interest. I respect.
180. It is understood as the exercise of power, in a
relationship of real subordination of the victim to
the aggressor in the workplace and/or school. It is
expressed in verbal, physical or both behaviors
related to sexuality with a lascivious connotation.
Sexual harassment.
181. It is defined as a form of violence with a lascivious
connotation in which, although there is no
subordination, there is an abusive exercise of
power that leads to a state of helplessness and
risk for the victim, regardless of whether it is
carried out in one or several events.
Sexual harassment.
182. It establishes that human rights correspond to
every person simply by virtue of being one.
Universality.
183. It implies that human rights are closely linked to
each other.
Interdependence.
15
By: AEGV
184. It states that human rights make up a totality in
such a way that they are complementary and
inseparable.
Indivisibility.
185. It foresees that human rights are constantly
evolving and under no circumstances is a setback
in their protection justified.
Progressiveness.
186. It refers to the fact that public servants provide
their services to all people without distinction,
exclusion, restriction or preference based on
ethnic or national origin, skin color, culture, sex,
gender, age, disabilities, social, economic, health
or legal status, religion, and physical appearance.
Equality and non-discrimination.
187. It refers to the fact that public servants, within the
scope of their powers and powers, guarantee that
both women and men have access to public goods
and services with the same conditions, possibilities
and opportunities; to institutional programs and
benefits, and to government jobs, positions and
commissions.
Gender equality.
188. It refers to the fact that public servants in the
development of their activities will at all times
avoid affecting the cultural heritage of any nation
and the ecosystems of the planet; They assume a
strong will to respect, defend and preserve culture
and the environment.
Cultural and ecological environment.
189. It refers to the fact that public servants will act in a
manner consistent with the principles that they
must observe in their performance. of a
employment, position, commission or function,
convinced in the commitment to subject their
conduct so that ethics prevails in their
performance that responds to the public interest
and generates full certainty of their conduct.
Integrity.
190. Public Servants will collaborate with each other
and promote teamwork to achieve the common
objectives provided for in government plans and
programs, thus generating a full vocation for public
service for the benefit of the community and the
common good.
Cooperation.
191. Public Servants are guides, examples and
promoters of the Code of Ethics and the Rules of
Integrity; They promote and apply in the
performance of their functions the principles that
the Constitution and the law impose on them, as
well as those additional values that, due to their
importance, are intrinsic to the public function.
Leadership.
192. Public Servants protect the personal data that is in
their custody; They privilege the principle of
maximum publicity of public information, diligently
responding to requests for access to information
and providing the documentation they generate,
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
obtain, acquire, transform or preserve.
Transparency.

193. Public Servants fully assume before society and

its authorities the responsibility that derives from
the exercise of their employment, position or
commission, for which they inform, explain and
justify their decisions and actions, and are subject
to a system of sanctions, as well as the evaluation
and public scrutiny of their functions by citizens.
Accountability.

16 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
(SECOND PART)
4.- PROTOCOL OF THE ETHICS AND
PREVENTION OF CONFLICTS OF
INTEREST COMMITTEE OF THE
SECRETARY OF THE NAVY, FOR THE
ATTENTION OF COMPLAINTS FOR NON-
COMPLIANCE WITH THE SEMAR CODE
OF CONDUCT.
194. Behavior that occurs systemically at a similar level
in the occupational hierarchy, based on a series of
hostile acts or behaviors towards one of the
members of the employment relationship, with the
objective of intimidating, overshadowing,
flattening, intimidating or emotionally or
intellectually consuming to the victim.
Workplace Harassment.
195. It is a form of violence with a lascivious
connotation in which, although there is no
subordination, there is an abusive exercise of
power that leads to a state of helplessness and
risk for the victim, regardless of whether it is
carried out in one or several events.
Sexual harassment.
196. It is the authority in the Secretariats, the internal
control bodies, the Superior Audit of the
Federation and the superior oversight entities of
the federal entities, as well as the units of
responsibilities of the State's productive
companies, in charge of investigating
administrative offenses. . Investigative authority.
197. It is the authority in the Secretariats, the internal
control bodies, the Superior Audit and its
counterparts in the federal entities, as well as the
responsibilities units of the State productive
companies that direct and conduct the
administrative responsibilities procedure from the
admission of the Report of alleged administrative
responsibility and until the conclusion of the initial
hearing.
Substantiating authority.
198. In the case of non-serious administrative offenses,
this will be done by the administrative
responsibilities unit or the public servant assigned
to the internal control bodies. For serious
administrative offenses, as well as for private
offenses, the competent Court will be.
Resolution authority.
199. It is the process by which public servants are
induced, prepared and updated for the efficient
performance of their functions and their
professional development and, when appropriate,
to contribute to the certification of professional
capabilities or competencies.
Training.
200. It is the process of formal validation of capabilities
or competencies acquired by a person through an
17
By: AEGV
evaluation process.
Certification.
201. It refers to the form of communication that must be
adopted with the alleged victim, without adopting
gender prejudices that could re-victimize or attack
them in a discriminatory manner, particularly if
they are women.
Assertive communication.
202. The possible impairment of the impartial and
objective performance of the functions of public
servants due to personal, family or business
interests.
Conflict of interests.
203. It is the abuse of power or position for personal
gain that can be classified as large-scale, petty
and political corruption, depending on the amount
of funds lost and the sector in which it occurs.
Corruption.
204. It involves respecting the procedural rights of the
parties, such as the presumption of innocence, in
accordance with applicable laws.
Due process.
205. It is the manifestation of allegedly irregular events
that are made known to the authority by the
complainant (alleged victim) or by a third party in
which public servants are involved in the exercise
of their functions. Includes the written statement.
Complaint.
206. It is any distinction, exclusion, restriction or
preference that, by action or omission, with or
without intention, is not objective, rational or
proportional and has the object or result of
hindering, restricting, preventing, impairing or
annulling the recognition, enjoyment or exercise of
human rights and freedoms.
Discrimination.
207. They are those attributes that are related to the
characteristics that have been socially and
culturally assigned to men and women based on
physical, biological, sexual and social differences
based mainly on their sex.
Gender stereotypes.
208. It is workplace harassment that occurs in a
vertically descending manner, when
aggressiveness or workplace harassment is
carried out among those who occupy positions of
superior hierarchy with respect to the victim. It is
comparable to abuse of authority.
Workplace Harassment.
209. It is the exercise of power, in a relationship of real
subordination of the victim to the aggressor in the
workplace and/or school. It is expressed in
verbal, physical, or both behaviors
related to sexuality with a lascivious connotation.
Sexual Harassment.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
210. Single-person body whose mission is to intervene
and manage the necessary measures to
consolidate a work environment free of
mistreatment, inequalities, violence, segregation
or discrimination and promote the exercise of
human rights of the personnel who provide their
services in the Secretariat of the Navy. Mediator of
the Secretary of the Navy.

211. It is the administrative unit in charge of promoting,

evaluating and strengthening the proper
functioning of internal control in public entities, as
well as those other instances of the autonomous
constitutional bodies that, in accordance with their
respective laws, are competent to apply the laws
on matters of responsibilities of public servants.
Internal control organ.

18 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
212. It is the designated person or persons who guide
and accompany the complainant (alleged victim), in
the prevention of conflict of interest, during the
presentation and monitoring of complaints for
alleged acts of discrimination.
Advisory Person.
213. He is the person designated for the Prevention,
Attention and Punishment of Sexual Harassment
and Sexual Harassment who will guide and
accompany the complainant (alleged victim) during
the presentation and follow-up of complaints for
alleged acts of Sexual Harassment and Sexual
Harassment.
Advisory Person.
214. It is the natural or legal person, or the public
servant who goes before the SM in order to report
acts or omissions that could constitute or be linked
to breaches of Naval or Administrative Discipline.
Complainant Person.
215. It is the methodology and mechanisms that allow us
to identify, question and value discrimination,
inequality and exclusion of women, which is
intended to be justified based on the biological
differences between women and men.
Gender Perspective.
216. It is the person who has filed a complaint regarding
DH by being directly or indirectly affected in their
legal sphere by being the subject of alleged Sexual
Harassment or Sexual Harassment, Workplace
Harassment, Workplace Harassment or
Discrimination. Alleged Victim.
217. It is the moment before the Counseling Person, in
which the complainant, when the SEMAR Code of
Conduct is not complied with regarding Sexual
Harassment or Sexual Harassment, receives
precise guidance and free of prejudices, on the
ways or instances in which their complaint will be
attended to. case.
First contact.
218. It is the deepening of damage inflicted on the
alleged victim or complainant derived from
inadequate institutional care.
Revictimization.
219. It is the first stage of Training on the prevention,
attention and punishment of sexual harassment and
sexual harassment, which includes general and
regulatory knowledge and its relationship with the
Gender Perspective.
Sensitization.
220. They are the instruments of permanent or
temporary integration to address complaints against
Sexual Harassment, Sexual Harassment;
Workplace Harassment and Workplace
Harassment; Discrimination, Corruption and
Conflicts of interest by Naval and Civil Personnel.
Subcommittee.
221. They are the Units or Establishments of the SM
with powers to deal with administrative, disciplinary
and human rights matters: Commander of the
Naval Command, Board of Admirals, Naval Board,
19
By: AEGV
Inspection and Comptroller General of the Navy
and the Human Rights Promotion and Protection
Unit, Citizen Attention Unit.
Administrative Units.
222. It is any action or omission, based on their gender,
that causes psychological, physical, property,
economic, sexual harm or suffering, or death, both
in the private and public spheres.
Violence against women.
5.- NATIONAL CODE OF CRIMINAL
PROCEDURES.
223. Its purpose is to establish the rules that must be
observed in the investigation, prosecution and
punishment of crimes, to clarify the facts, protect
the innocent, ensure that the guilty do not go
unpunished and that the damage is repaired.
National Code of Criminal Procedures.
224. It is the jurisdictional body of the federal jurisdiction
or the common jurisdiction that intervenes from the
beginning of the procedure and until the issuance
of the order to open a trial, whether local or
federal. Control judge.
225. It is the control judge, the trial court or the appeal
court, whether of federal or common jurisdiction.
Jurisdictional body.
226. They are the bodies specialized in the investigation
of crimes of the federal or common jurisdiction, as
well as the public security bodies of the federal or
common jurisdiction, which all act under the
command and direction of the Public Ministry for
the purposes of the investigation.
Police.
227. He is the head of the Public Ministry of the
Federation or the Public Ministry of the federal
entities or the Attorney Generals in the federal
entities.
Attorney.
228. It is the jurisdictional body of the federal jurisdiction
or the common jurisdiction made up of one or
three judges, which intervenes after the order to
open an oral trial, until the issuance and
explanation of the sentence.
Trial court.
229. It is the jurisdictional body made up of one or three
judges, which resolves the appeal, federal or
federal entities.
Court of appeal.
230. It will be accusatory and oral, in which the
principles of publicity, contradiction, concentration,
continuity and immediacy and those provided for
in the Constitution, Treaties and other laws will be
observed.
Criminal process.
231. Principle where the hearings will be public, so that
they can be accessed not only by the parties
involved in the procedure but also by the general
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
public, with the exceptions provided for in this
Code.
Advertising principle.

232. Principle that refers to that the parties will be

able to know,
dispute or confront the evidence, as well as
oppose the requests and allegations of the other
party, except as provided in this Code.
Principle of contradiction.

233. Principle that dictates that hearings will be carried

out continuously, successively and sequentially,
except in the exceptional cases provided for in this
Code.
Continuity principle.

20 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
234. Principle where the hearings will preferably take
place on the same day or on consecutive days
until their conclusion, in the terms provided in this
Code, except for the exceptional cases
established in this order.
Principle of concentration.
235. Principle where every hearing will take place in the
presence of the jurisdictional body, as well as the
parties that must intervene in it.
Principle of immediacy.
236. Principle where all people involved in the criminal
procedure will receive the same treatment and will
have the same opportunities to support the
accusation or defense. Principle of equality before
the law.
237. Principle where the parties are guaranteed, under
conditions of equality, the full and unrestricted
exercise of the rights provided for in the
Constitution, the Treaties and the laws that
emanate from them. Principle of equality between
the parties.
238. Principle where no person may be sentenced to a
sentence or subjected to a security measure,
except by virtue of a resolution issued by an
established jurisdictional body, in accordance with
laws issued to the event, in a process carried out
in an impartial manner and with strict adherence to
the human rights.
Principle of prior trial and due process.
239. Principle where every person is presumed
innocent and will be treated as such in all stages
of the procedure, until their responsibility is
declared by a sentence issued by the jurisdictional
body.
Presumption of innocence.
240. Principle where the person convicted, acquitted or
whose trial has been dismissed may not be
subjected to another criminal trial for the same
facts.
Principle of prohibition of double jeopardy.
6.- LAW OF THE NATIONAL COMMISSION OF
THE
HUMAN RIGHTS.
241. It will have jurisdiction throughout the national
territory to hear complaints related to alleged
violations of human rights by federal authorities
and public servants, with the exception of those of
the Judicial Branch of the Federation.
National Human Rights Commission (CNDH).
242. Principles that will be observed for the defense
and promotion of human rights.
Universality, interdependence, indivisibility and
progressivity.
243. The Commission's procedures must be brief and
simple, and will be subject only to essential
formalities required by the documentation of the
respective files; They will also follow these
21
By: AEGV
principles.
Immediacy, concentration and speed.
244. You may report alleged human rights violations
and go to the offices of the National Commission
to present, either directly or through a
representative, complaints against said violations.
Anyone.
245. When the interested parties are in this condition,
the facts may be reported by relatives or
neighbors of those affected, even by minors.
Deprived of their freedom or unaware of their
whereabouts.
246. They may go before the National Human Rights
Commission to report human rights violations
regarding people who, due to their physical,
mental, economic and cultural conditions, do not
have the effective capacity to present complaints
directly.
The NGOs.
247. Deadline for submitting the complaint to the CNDH
from the moment the execution of the acts that are
considered violative had begun, or the
complainant had knowledge of them; in
exceptional cases, the Commission may extend
the deadline.
1 year.
248. Deadline to file a complaint with the CNDH when
dealing with events that, due to their severity, may
be considered violations against humanity.
No deadline will count.
249. They are those involved in matters within the
jurisdiction of the CNDH, or who by reason of their
functions or activities can provide pertinent
information, must comply in their terms with the
Commission's requests in this regard.
The authorities and public servants.
250. They must provide the National Human Rights
Commission with the information and data it
requests, in accordance with the law.
Local and Municipal Authorities.
251. They will be criminally and administratively
responsible for the acts or omissions they incur
during and as a result of the processing of
complaints and disagreements before the CNDH,
in accordance with the applicable constitutional
and legal provisions.
The authorities and public servants.
7.- MARITIME NAVIGATION AND TRADE
LAW.
252. Activity carried out by a boat, to move through
navigable waterways from one point to another,
with specific direction and purposes.
Navigation.
253. Activities carried out through the commercial and
maritime exploitation of vessels and naval devices
in order to transport people, goods or things by
water, or to carry out an activity of exploration,
exploitation or capture of natural resources,
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
construction or recreation in the aquatic
environment.
Maritime trade.

254. It is the group formed by natural or legal persons,

vessels and naval devices that, in accordance with
the applicable Legislation, exercise or intervene in
maritime commerce.
Merchant navy.

255. It is the introduction by man, directly or indirectly,

of substances or energy into the marine
environment that produce or may produce harmful
effects on marine life and resources, human
health, or the legitimate use of general water
communication routes. .
Marine contamination.

22 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
9/ -thearrany OF HARIMA PFAM – 2 0 2 2
256. It is the set of measures and actions designed to safeguard
against any threat that may affect the port, port area, terminals,
marinas and port facilities, as well as vessels, naval devices,
people and cargo.
Maritime and Port Protection
257. It is the Unified Center for Maritime and Port Protection.
CUMAR.
258. They are the General Communication Routes by Water or
Navigable Routes.
MT, EEZ and internal marine waters.
259. It exercises the National Maritime Authority through the
Secretary of the Navy, for the exercise of maritime and port
sovereignty, protection and security, as well as the maintenance
of the rule of law in Mexican marine zones and port areas.
Federal Executive (President of the Republic).
260. They will be Authorities in matters of Merchant Marine in
accordance with the Law of Navigation and Maritime
Commerce.
SEMAR, by itself or through the Port Captaincies.
261. They are powers of the Secretary of the Navy, without prejudice
to those that correspond to other agencies of the Federal Public
Administration.
Read the 30 attributions on page. 46. (1)
262. They are powers of the Secretary of the Navy, without prejudice
to those that correspond to other agencies of the Federal Public
Administration.
Read the 30 attributions on page. 46. (2)
263. They are powers of the Secretary of the Navy, without prejudice
to those that correspond to other agencies of the Federal Public
Administration.
Read the 30 attributions on page. 46. (3)
264. Each port or space adjacent to national waters where activities
are carried out will be subject to the jurisdiction of the National
Maritime Authority, which will depend on the SM, with a
delimited territorial and maritime jurisdiction.
Port Captaincy.
265. They are the powers of the Port Captaincies dependent on the
Secretary of the Navy.
Authorize arrivals and dispatches, flag and register vessels,
certify voyages and act as an assistant to the Public Ministry.
266. They will assist the port captains when required, within their
respective areas of competence.
Federal, state and municipal public security institutions.
267. Activity carried out by the Port Captaincy on Mexican vessels
and naval artifacts, at the request of their owner or shipowner,
after verification of their safety conditions and presentation of
the resignation of the flag of the country of origin.
Flagging and Registration.
268. Classification of vessels and naval artifacts by their use for
registration.
Passenger transportation, Cargo, Fishing, Recreation and
sports, Mixed Cargo and Passenger and Dredging.
269. Classification of vessels and naval artifacts by their dimensions
for registration.
23
By: AEGV
Large and small ship or vessel.
270. It is any vessel or vessel equal to or greater than 500 gross
tonnage units, which meets the necessary conditions for
navigation.
Ship or larger vessel.
271. It is any vessel or vessel less than 500 gross tonnage units, or
less than 15 m. of length, when the tonnage measurement is not
applicable.
Ship or smaller vessel.
272. At the request of the owner or shipowner, he will flag vessels as
Mexican, after compliance with the corresponding inspection
and certification standards, and will also issue a navigation pass
while the Mexican registration is being processed.
Marine Secretary.
273. Vessels of Mexican nationality will be considered.
Flagged and registered in Mexico, abandoned in national
waters, confiscated, captured from enemies and those owned by
the Mexican State.
274. He will be in charge of the National Maritime Public Registry.
Marine Secretary.
275. It is the natural or legal person who is authorized to, on behalf of
the shipowner or operator, under the capacity of agent or
commercial commission agent, act on its behalf or on its behalf.
Shipping agent.
276. He will have the power to represent his principal or client in
contracts for the transportation of goods, leasing and chartering;
appoint a shipping agent as consignee of ships and carry out
other commercial acts entrusted to him by his principal or client.
General shipping agent.
277. It will have the power to carry out administrative acts and
procedures in relation to the vessel at the port of consignment in
accordance with the Maritime Navigation and Commerce Law.
Shipping agent and consignee of ships.
278. They are the people who provide a service on board Mexican
vessels and naval artifacts.
Crew members.
279. It is the technical personnel that performs the functions of
instruction, training, supervision and administration of naval
vessels and artifacts.
Non-crew.
280. Fundamental requirement to be: captains, naval pilots, skippers,
machinists, mechanics and in general all personnel who man a
vessel or work on a Mexican naval device.
Being Mexican by birth.
281. They must have a captain and corresponding officers, according
to the International Treaties, of this Maritime Navigation and
Commerce Law and its respective regulations.
Boat crews.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
282. He must remain in his position until he is relieved
and for security reasons he must remain in his
position.
Captain or skipper.
283. He will be the first authority on board. Every
person on board will be under his command, and
in foreign waters and on the high seas he will be
considered a representative of the Mexican
authorities and the owner or shipowner, and must
have the legal and technical capacity to exercise
command.
Captain or skipper.
284. Navigation in Mexican marine zones and arrival at
Mexican ports will be open, in times of peace, to
the vessels of all States, in accordance with the
principle of international reciprocity, however, this
Authority may deny navigation in Mexican marine
zones for reasons of National security.
Marine Secretary.
285. They must observe the obligation to obey the
signs to stop or provide the information requested
by any unit of the Mexican Navy. Any vessel that
navigates in Mexican marine areas.
286. It may declare, at any time, provisionally or
permanently, partially or totally closed to
navigation certain ports, in order to preserve the
integrity of people and the safety of vessels, as
well as property in general.
Marine Secretary.
287. The types of navigation carried out by boats are
classified as:
Interior, Cabotage and Altitude.
288. Type of navigation that is carried out within the
limits of ports or Mexican inland waters: lakes,
lagoons, dams, rivers and other bodies of the
Territorial Sea.
Inside.
289. Type of navigation carried out by sea between
ports or points located in Mexican marine areas
and Mexican coastlines.
Cabotage.
290. Type of navigation carried out by sea between
ports or points located in Mexican territory or in
Mexican marine zones and ports or points located
abroad, as well as between foreign ports or points.
Height.
291. It is the authorization for a vessel to go to sea for
the purpose of carrying out fishing activities.
Shipping via fishing.
292. It will be obliged to issue a fishing dispatch for
each vessel; its validity period will be the same as
that established for the validity of the concessions
or permits issued by SAGARPA for the fishing
activity requested in said dispatch.
Port captaincy.
293. It is any activity carried out with the purpose of
assisting a vessel, or to safeguard other assets
that are in danger in navigable waterways or in
24
By: AEGV
other marine areas.
Rescue.
294. It will be understood as any activity carried out with
the purpose of tracking and releasing people who
are in any dangerous situation at sea or in other
waters.
Search and rescue.
8.- PORT LAW.
295. It is the place on the coast or riverbank authorized
as such by the Federal Executive for the reception,
shelter and care of vessels, composed of the port
area and development area, as well as accesses
and areas of common use for internal navigation
and affects to its operation.
Port.
296. It is the federal zone delimited and determined by
SEMAR and by the Ministry of Welfare in ports,
terminals and marinas, which includes water areas
and public domain lands intended for the
establishment of facilities and the provision of port
services.
Port area.
297. It is the unit established in a port or outside it,
made up of works, facilities and surfaces, including
its water area, that allows the complete
implementation of the port operation for which it is
intended.
Terminal.
298. It is the set of port facilities and their water or land
areas, intended for the organization specialized in
providing services to recreational or sports
vessels. Marine.
299. These are infrastructure works and buildings or
superstructures, built in a port or outside of it,
intended for the care of vessels, the provision of
port services or the construction or repair of
vessels.
Port facilities.
300. They are those provided in ports, terminals,
marinas and port facilities, to serve vessels, as
well as for the transfer of cargo and transshipment
of people between vessels, land or other modes of
transportation.
Docking services.
301. It is the area constituted with lands of private
property or private domain of the Federation, the
federal entities or the municipalities, for the
establishment of industrial facilities and port
services.
Port development zone.
302. It is the holder of a concession for comprehensive
port administration.
Port administrator.
303. It is the Unified Center for Maritime and Port
Protection. CUMAR.
304. It is the set of measures and actions designed to
safeguard against any threat that may affect the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
port, port area, terminals, marinas and port
facilities, as well as vessels, naval devices,
people, cargo, transport units and supplies.
Maritime and Port Protection.

305. It is the classification of ports by their navigation.

High altitude and Cabotage.

25 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
306. Type of navigation in ports and terminals when
they serve vessels, people and goods in
navigation between national and international
ports or points.
Tall.
307. Type of navigation in ports and terminals when
they only serve vessels, people and goods in
navigation between ports or national points.
Coasting.
308. It is the classification of ports and terminals by
their facilities and services.
Commercial, Industrial, Fishing and Tourist.
309. Types of ports and terminals when they are
predominantly dedicated to the handling of goods
or passengers in maritime traffic.
Commercial.
310. Types of ports and terminals when they are
predominantly dedicated to the management of
goods related to industries established in the port
or terminal area. Industrial.
311. Types of ports and terminals when they are
predominantly dedicated to the handling of
vessels and specific products of the capture and
process of the fishing industry. Fishing boats.
312. Types of ports and terminals when they are
predominantly dedicated to the activity of tourist
cruises and marinas.
Tourist.
313. It is the classification of terminals, marinas and
port facilities by their use.
Public and Private.
314. Type of terminals, marinas and port facilities when
they are container and general cargo terminals or
there is an obligation to make them available to
any applicant. Public.
315. Type of terminals, marinas and port facilities when
the owner uses them for his own purposes, or for
those of third parties by contract.
Private.
316. It may declare the partial or total closure of certain
ports to navigation in unforeseen circumstances,
force majeure or for national security or public
interest.
Marine Secretary.
317. In ports, terminals and marinas, the land and
waters that are part of the port areas and the
works and facilities acquired or built by the federal
government will be of this nature.
Public Domain Assets.
318. It is the authority in matters of ports, which is
exercised through SEMAR, without prejudice to
the powers of other agencies of the Federal Public
Administration.
Federal Executive.
319. These are the powers of the Federal Executive
26
By: AEGV
exercised through SEMAR in matters of ports:
Read the 14 powers (pages 54 and 55). (1)
320. These are the powers of the Federal Executive
exercised through SEMAR in matters of ports:
Read the 14 powers (pages 54 and 55). (2)
321. They will assist in the maintenance of order and
security in the port area, at the request of the port
captain.
The Mexican Navy and the Federal, State and
Municipal Police Corporations.
322. It is the authority on maritime and port security and
will serve as the designated authority for the
purposes of the International Code for the Security
of Ships and Port Facilities.
Marine Secretary.
9.- FEDERAL LAW OF THE SEA.
323. It is of federal jurisdiction, it governs the marine
areas that are part of the national territory and, as
applicable, beyond this in the marine areas where
the Nation exercises sovereignty rights,
jurisdictions and other rights.
Federal Law of the Sea.
324. They are the Mexican Marine Zones.
Territorial Sea, Inland Waters, Contiguous Zone,
Exclusive Economic Zone, Continental and Insular
Shelf and any other area permitted by International
Law.
325. In the Mexican marine zones, it will exercise the
powers, rights, jurisdictions and competencies that
this same Law establishes, in accordance with the
Political Constitution of the United Mexican States
and with international law. The Mexican Nation.
326. It exercises the economic use of the sea, the use
of minerals dissolved in its waters, the production
of electrical or thermal energy derived from them,
currents and winds, the capture of solar energy in
the sea, the development of the area. coastal
areas, mariculture, the establishment of national
marine parks, the promotion of recreation and
tourism.
The Mexican Nation.
327. They do not have their own Territorial Sea and
their presence does not affect the delimitation of
the Territorial Sea, the Exclusive Economic Zone
or the Continental Shelf.
Artificial islands, facilities and structures.
328. It has exclusive jurisdiction over artificial islands,
facilities and structures in the Exclusive Economic
Zone and on the Continental Shelf and Island
Shelves, including jurisdiction over customs, tax,
health, security and immigration regulations.
The Mexican Nation.
329. It has the exclusive right in Mexican marine zones
to build, as well as to authorize and regulate the
construction, operation and use of artificial islands,
facilities and structures.
The Mexican Nation.
330. The Nation exercises sovereignty in a strip of the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
sea, called __, adjacent to both the national
coasts, whether continental or insular, as well as
the Inland Marine Waters. Territorial sea.

331. The width of the Mexican Territorial Sea, in

accordance with the provisions of the Federal Sea
Law and its Regulations.
12 NM (22,224 m).

27 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
332. They are measured from baselines, whether
normal or straight, or a combination thereof,
determined in accordance with the provisions of
the Regulations of the Federal Law of the Sea.
Limits of the Territorial Sea.
333. They enjoy the right of innocent passage through
the Mexican Territorial Sea.
The vessels of all States.
334. When a foreign warship does not comply with the
rules of this Law, its Regulations and other
national legal provisions relating to passage
through the Territorial Sea, and does not comply
with the invitation made to it to comply, it may:
Invite it to to comply with them or leave Mexican
territory.
335. They are those included between the coast and
the baselines, normal or straight, from which the
Territorial Sea is measured.
Inland Marine Waters.
336. It is an example of Inland Marine waters.
The northern part of the Gulf of California, those of
internal bays, those of the Ports, those inside the
reefs and the mouths or deltas of rivers, lagoons
and estuaries.
337. It is an area adjacent to the MT, to take the
necessary control measures in order to prevent
infractions, control, immigration and health
measures.
Contiguous Zone.
338. The Contiguous Zone of Mexico extends to
, counterparts in the federal entities, as well as the
counted from the baselines from which the width
of the Mexican Territorial Sea is measured.
24 NM (44,448 m).
339. In this area, the Mexican Nation exercises
sovereign rights for the purposes of exploration
and exploitation, conservation and administration
of natural resources, both living and non-living,
whether renewable or non-renewable.
Exclusive economic zone.
340. In this area, the Mexican Nation exercises rights
over the establishment and use of artificial islands,
facilities and structures, marine scientific research
and the protection and preservation of the marine
environment.
Exclusive economic zone.
341. It is the extension of the Mexican Exclusive
Economic Zone, counted from the baselines from
which the width of the Territorial Sea is measured.
200 NM (370,400 m).
342. These enjoy an Exclusive Economic Zone but not
the rocks that are not suitable for maintaining
human habitation or economic life of their own.
The islands.
343. In this area, the Nation exercises rights to explore
and exploit its natural resources.
Continental Shelf and Island Shelves.
344. Exclusive rights of the Mexican Nation, if they are
28
By: AEGV
not carried out, no one can undertake these
activities without express consent of the
competent national authorities. Exploration and
exploitation.
345. These enjoy an Island Platform, but not the rocks
that are not suitable for maintaining human
habitation or economic life of their own.
The islands.
10.- GENERAL LAW OF RESPONSIBILITIES
ADMINISTRATIVE.
346. This Law is of public order and of general
observance throughout the Republic, its purpose is
to distribute powers between the levels of
government to establish the administrative
responsibilities of Public Servants.
General Law of Administrative Responsibilities.
347. They are subject to the General Law of
Administrative Responsibilities.
Read the 5 circumstances (page 60).
348. It is the authority in the Secretariats, the internal
control bodies, the Superior Audit of the
Federation and the superior inspection entities of
the federal entities, as well as the units of
responsibilities of the State's productive
companies, in charge of investigating
administrative offenses. . Investigative authority.
349. It is the authority in the Secretariats, the internal
control bodies, the Superior Audit and its
responsibilities units of the State productive
companies that direct and conduct the
administrative responsibilities procedure from the
admission of the Report of alleged administrative
responsibility and until the conclusion of the initial
hearing.
Substantiating authority.
350. In the case of non-serious administrative offenses,
this will be done by the administrative
responsibilities unit or the public servant assigned
to the internal control bodies. For serious
administrative offenses, as well as for private
offenses, the competent Court will be responsible.
Resolution authority.
351. It is the body in charge of the coordination and
effectiveness of the National Anti-Corruption
System.
Coordinating Committee.
352. It is the possible impairment of the impartial and
objective performance of the functions of Public
Servants due to personal, family or business
interests.
Interest conflict.
353. The Public Servant is obliged to present a
declaration of financial, interest and fiscal
situation, in the terms of the General Law of
Administrative Responsibilities.
Declarant.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
354. It is the natural or legal person, or the Public
Servant who goes before the investigating
Authorities, in order to report acts or omissions
that could constitute or be linked to administrative
offenses.
Complainant.

355. They are the Legislative and Judicial Branches,

the autonomous constitutional bodies, the
agencies and entities of the Federal Public
Administration, and their counterparts in the
federal entities, the municipalities and mayors of
Mexico City, the Prosecutor's Office, the Attorney
General's Offices and state companies.
Public body.

29 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
356. They are decentralized public organizations,
companies with majority state participation and
public trusts that have the character of parastatal
entity.
Entities.
357. It is the file derivative of the research
that
Investigative Authorities carry out at the
administrative headquarters, upon having
knowledge of a act u omission
possibly
constituting administrative offenses.
File of alleged administrative responsibility.
358. They are serious administrative offenses, non-
serious administrative offenses; as well as the
Misdemeanors of individuals, in accordance with
the provisions of the General Law of
Administrative Responsibilities.
Administrative faults.
359. They are the administrative offenses of Public
Servants in the terms of the General Law of
Administrative Responsibilities, whose sanction
corresponds to the Secretariats and the internal
control bodies.
Non-serious administrative offense.
360. These are the administrative offenses of Public
Servants classified as serious, the sanction of
which corresponds to the Federal Court of
Administrative Justice and its counterparts in the
federal entities.
Serious administrative misconduct.
361. These are the acts of private individuals or legal
entities that are linked to serious administrative
offenses, the sanction of which corresponds to the
Court in its terms.
Individual faults.
362. It is the instrument in which the investigating
authorities describe the facts related to any of the
offenses indicated in the General Law of
Administrative Responsibilities, exposing in
documented form the evidence and foundations,
the reasons and alleged responsibility of the
Public Servant or an individual in the commission
of administrative offenses.
Report of Alleged Administrative Responsibility.
363. He is the head or member of the section
responsible for administrative responsibilities, of
the Superior Chamber of the Federal Court of
Administrative Justice or of the specialized
chambers, as well as his counterparts in the
federal entities.
Magistrate.
364. Organizations to which the Constitution expressly
grants technical and management autonomy, legal
personality and own assets, including those
created with such character in the constitutions of
the federal entities.
Autonomous constitutional bodies.
365. They are the administrative units in charge of
promoting, evaluating and strengthening the
30
By: AEGV
proper functioning of internal control in public
entities, as well as those other instances of the
autonomous constitutional bodies, in charge of
applying the laws regarding the responsibilities of
Public Servants. Internal control bodies.
366. It is the platform referred to in the General Law of
the National Anti-Corruption System, which will
have the systems established by the
aforementioned law, as well as the contents
provided for in the General Law of Administrative
Responsibilities.
National digital platform.
367. They are people who hold a job, position or
commission in public entities, at the federal and
local levels.
Public servers.
368. It is the coordination body between the authorities
of all levels of government competent in the
prevention, detection and punishment of
administrative responsibilities and acts of
corruption.
National Anticorruption System.
369. It is the Section competent in matters of
administrative responsibilities, of the Superior
Chamber of the Federal Court of Administrative
Justice or the specialized chambers, as well as its
counterparts in the federal entities.
Court.
370. They are obliged to create and maintain structural
and regulatory conditions that allow the proper
functioning of the State as a whole, and the ethical
and responsible actions of each public servant.
Public Entities.
371. In the performance of their job, position or
commission, they will observe the principles of
discipline, legality, objectivity, professionalism,
honesty, loyalty, impartiality, integrity,
accountability, effectiveness and efficiency that
govern public service.
Public servers.
372. These are the guidelines that Public Servants will
observe for the effective application of principles
that govern them in the performance of their
functions.
Read the 13 guidelines on p. 62 and 63. (1)
373. These are the guidelines that Public Servants will
observe for the effective application of principles
that govern them in the performance of their
functions.
Read the 13 guidelines on p. 62 and 63. (2)
374. These are the guidelines that Public Servants will
observe for the effective application of principles
that govern them in the performance of their
functions.
Read the 13 guidelines on p. 62 and 63. (3)
375. Validity of the separation of a Public Servant from
the assets and economic interests that directly
affect the exercise of his responsibilities in the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
public service.
During the term of office and 1 year after
retirement.

376. They are the Authorities empowered to apply the

General Law of Administrative Responsibilities.
Read the 6 authorities on p. 64.

11.- ORGANIC LAW OF ADMINISTRATION

FEDERAL PUBLIC.

377. It is responsible for exercising sovereignty over

the MT, its airspace and coasts, as well as
surveillance, visits, inspections or other actions
provided for in the legal provisions applicable in
the ZMM and the measures and powers in the ZC
and the EEZ. Marine Secretary.

31 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
378. It is responsible for exercising the National
Maritime Authority in the Mexican marine zones,
coasts, ports, port areas, terminals, marinas and
national port facilities; as well as in national waters
where activities within its jurisdiction are carried
out.
Marine Secretary.
379. The Secretary of the Navy is responsible for
exercising National Maritime Authority in the
Mexican Marine Zones, in the following matters:
Read the 04 interferences (page 65).
380. It is responsible for maintaining the rule of law in
Mexican marine areas, coasts and port areas,
exercising coast guard functions through the
Navy.
Marine Secretary.
381. It is responsible for establishing and directing the
Search and Rescue Service for the safeguarding
of human life at sea. Marine Secretary.
382. It is responsible for regulating and monitoring the
safety of navigation and human life at sea and
supervising the merchant navy. Marine Secretary.
383. It is responsible for managing and operating
maritime signaling, as well as providing
information and security services for maritime
navigation.
Marine Secretary.
384. It is responsible for intervening, within the scope of
its responsibility, in the protection and
conservation of the marine environment without
prejudice to the powers that correspond to other
agencies.
Marine Secretary.
(THIRD PART)
12.- LAW OF PROMOTIONS OF THE NAVY OF
MEXICO.
385. Their objective is to cover vacancies in the
Mexican Navy with qualified and suitable
personnel to perform the tasks of the next higher
rank.
Promotions.
386. Command that confers promotions to the ranks of
Captain, Rear Admiral, Vice Admiral and Admiral,
preferably taking into account merit, aptitude,
professional competence and military and civil
conduct, as well as seniority in the rank.
Supreme Command.
387. Circumstance in which a member of the Navy is
excluded because he is unable to participate in
the selection contest, and is summoned again to
determine his right to promotion, once the causes
that motivated him disappear. Due to illness or
other proven causes of force majeure.
388. Case in which a member of the Mexican Navy will
be considered the highest rank
Having been summoned three times to the
selection competition for promotion and resigning
32
By: AEGV
from them.
389. It will be communicated in writing by the EMGA to
the core personnel of the Corps and by the
Administrative Unit corresponding to the core
personnel of the services and scales of the Corps
and Services.
Top grade.
390. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
to have been in the grade for at least 1 year, to
have performed at least one year in the Navy, the
functions inherent to your body or service, and to
obtain a passing grade.
Cape.
391. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
have at least 2 years of seniority in the grade, 3
years of continuous service in the Navy, have
performed for at least 1 year the functions inherent
to your body or service and obtain a passing
grade.
Third Master.
392. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
to have at least 1 year of seniority in the grade, 4
years of continuous service in the Navy, to have
performed for at least 1 year the functions inherent
to your body or service and obtain a passing
grade.
Second Master.
393. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
have at least 1 year of seniority in the grade, 5
years of continuous service in the Navy, have
performed for at least 1 year the functions inherent
to your body or service and obtain a passing
grade.
First Master.
394. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
to have held the grade for at least 3 years, to have
performed the functions inherent to your body or
service for at least 2 years and to obtain a passing
grade that places you among the number of
existing vacancies.
Lieutenant of Lieutenant, Lieutenant of Frigate,
Lieutenant of Ship and Captain of Frigate.
395. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
to have been in the grade for at least 3 years, to
have performed the functions inherent to your
body or service for at least 2 years, to present a
thesis-type research work and obtain a passing
grade.
Lieutenant Commander.
396. To advance to this grade, your requirements are:
There must be vacancies in the grade, not falling
within the assumptions of art. 51 (License,
withdrawal procedure, age limit, subject to
process, in deposit, etc.) whose list will be
integrated in accordance with the criteria of art. 18
(Merit, aptitude, professional competence, civil
and military conduct) prepared by
EDOMAYGRAL.
Captain.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
397. Its purpose is to determine the order of priority of
those summoned.
Selection competition for promotion.

398. It will be determined according to the results of the

selection exams (art. 35) and in accordance with
the Rules and Procedures Manual of the
corresponding Coordinating Commission.
Promotion for Classes and Seamanship.

399. HE will be carried in accordance with the Manual

of standards and
Procedures of the corresponding Coordinating
Commission. In establishing the order of priority in
each grade, nucleus and scale, the concepts of
merit, aptitude, professional competence, military
and civil conduct, as well as the results of the
exams, will be taken into account.
Promotion of Officers up to Frigate Captain.

33 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
9/ -thearrany OF HARIMA PFAM – 2 0 2 2
400. These are the types of exams in the selection contest for
promotion.
Medical, physical ability, theoretical and practical knowledge,
foreign language and thesis-type research work.
401. These are the situations in which promotions will not be granted
to personnel of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 10 causes (Page. 71). (1)
402. These are the situations in which promotions will not be granted
to personnel of the Mexican Navy.
Read the 10 causes (Page. 71). (2)
403. It is the action that the soldier exercises before the Naval Board
for feeling affected in his rights by exclusion from the selection
contest for promotion or by postponement.
Disagreement.
404. It is the period that the staff has from the date of receipt of the
document by which they are informed of the exclusion or
postponement, to express their disagreement.
30 calendar days.
405. It is the action carried out by the High Command in case of
disagreement of a soldier due to EXCLUSION in his right to
promotion.
It will order the evaluation of the interested party, placing it in
the order of priority that corresponds to it. If the promotion has
already been carried out and you have obtained a place with the
right to any of the existing vacancies, it will be considered a
postponement.
406. It is the action carried out by the High Command in the event of
a military member's disagreement due to POSTPONEMENT of
his or her right to promotion.
He will order the promotion while preserving his rights of
seniority and place in the ranking, and he must be compensated
for the differences in salaries and other benefits that he has
stopped receiving.
407. Entity in charge of issuing the opinion of NO PRECEDENCE of
a non-conformity, duly founded and motivated communication
will be made to the non-conformist.
Naval Board.
408. Entity in charge of analyzing the disagreement if it persists, after
the resolution issued by the Naval Board, without subsequent
appeal being appropriate in this case.
Admiralty Council.
13.- LAW OF DISCIPLINE FOR STAFF
THE MEXICO NAVY.
409. This ordinance establishes the guidelines of conduct that, based
on the principles of obedience, justice, ethics and a high sense
of honor, must guide the personnel of the Mexican Navy in the
fulfillment of their duties; as well as incentives and sanctions.
Discipline Law for the Personnel of the Mexican Navy.
410. Vital principle that Navy personnel will observe as a duty of
obedience that qualifies them for command.
Discipline.
411. It is the set of obligations that the service imposes on Navy
personnel by virtue of the hierarchy they hold or the position or
commission they perform, and its compliance is the means by
which discipline is obtained.
Duty.
34
By: AEGV
412. He will fulfill his duty with dignity and will avoid acting carelessly
and lukewarmly or in conflict with the true spirit of the profession
which involves loyalty, obedience, courage, audacity,
selflessness and selflessness.
Naval Personnel.
413. Those carried out by naval personnel, isolated or collectively, in
compliance with orders they receive or in the performance of the
functions that correspond to them according to their hierarchy,
position or commission.
Acts of service.
414. Demands that naval personnel fulfill their duty in defense of the
sovereignty of the State, the institutions and the prestige and
public image of the Mexican Navy.
The service.
415. Their duty is to encourage those who excel in the fulfillment of
their obligations, as well as to prevent subordinates from
violating this regulation and, only as a last resort, to sanction
them. The Superior
416. He will be responsible for maintaining discipline in proportion to
his hierarchy, position or commission.
Naval Personnel.
417. It defines the duties corresponding to the performance of the
different services and commissions assigned to them in the
naval units and establishments.
Hierarchy.
418. It requires and imposes compliance with the duties and
functions established by the regulations of the Discipline Law for
AM Personnel, the organization manuals, systematic operating
procedures and other applicable provisions.
Position or Commission.
419. It will be firm and reasoned, and all unnecessary rigor, demands
that exceed needs and any excess on the part of the superior
towards his subordinates will be sanctioned. The maintenance
of discipline.
420. It is based on mutual respect. Shows of respect will be observed
even when wearing civilian clothes.
The relationship between superiors and subordinates.
421. It will be rigorously respected between rank and file of the naval
hierarchy, in order to keep each person within the limit of their
duties and rights.
The subordination.
422. You are obliged to comply with the orders you receive in writing
or verbally. If you receive others that contradict those received
previously, you must respectfully explain this to the person who
gives you the new order.
Navy personnel.
423. They must be completed within the time indicated by the
superior, except in cases where force majeure circumstances
occur that modify the time scheduled for their execution. In this
situation, part of the decision made will be given, as soon as
possible, to the superior who gave it.
Orders.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
424. Whoever receives an order and notices that its
execution may clearly result in the commission of
a punishable act or a disciplinary infraction, must
explain this to the superior who gave it and if the
order persists:
You will request it in writing to safeguard your
responsibility.
425. It must inspire satisfaction with compliance with
laws and regulations, as well as the orders of
superiority; being obliged to prevent the spread of
ideas and rumors that prevent compliance with
obligations.
Whoever commands a Unit.
426. In case of aggression, it will repel the attacks with
all available means; He will instill in his
subordinates the necessary encouragement and
enthusiasm, and will avoid or repress acts that
may cause demoralization.
Who exercises command.
427. Navy personnel will not intervene in matters within
the jurisdiction of civil authorities, nor will they
hinder their functions without the authorization of
this Command.
High Command.
428. Circumstance in which Navy personnel must arrest
the lawbreaker, immediately placing him or her at
the disposal of the competent authorities.
Flagrancy.
429. Circumstance in which Navy personnel must
observe dignified behavior and respect for
people's rights.
In dealing with the civilian population.
430. It is the last instance to which Navy personnel may
submit their requests through regular channels in
case they have a complaint for not having received
a response to their request or for having been the
subject of a grievance.
Supreme Command.
431. Commands that may provide any information,
unless it is classified, on personnel, material,
facilities, operations and other matters related to
the Navy.
Chief Senior Officers and Senior Managers.
432. These are the rights of Naval Personnel.
Read page 75. Art. 36
433. These are the prohibitions for personnel of the
Mexican Navy.
Read the 13 prohibitions page. 76 art. 37. (1)
434. These are the prohibitions for personnel of the
Mexican Navy.
Read the 13 prohibitions page. 76 art. 37. (2)
435. These are the prohibitions for personnel of the
Mexican Navy. Read the 13 prohibitions page. 76
art. 37. (3)
35
By: AEGV
436. Navy personnel who distinguish themselves for
their timely and efficient performance in fulfilling
their obligations will be awarded , which will be
stated by
written, seeking with this, that the rest of the staff
imitate this behavior for their own benefit and that
of the Institution. Stimulus.
437. They may be granted to all naval personnel who
merit it in the opinion of their commanders, who
will be the ones empowered to evaluate the
actions carried out by their subordinates, and a
copy must be consigned to the military's file. In the
case of Admirals, Captains and Officers, it will be
sent also to EMGA. Stimulus.
438. They are the means to channel discipline, they are
used to preserve, maintain and invigorate it, and
restore it when it has been broken.
Preventive and Corrective Disciplinary Measures.
439. It is the sanction imposed on Navy personnel as a
result of having violated a legal or regulatory
precept, and the violation does not constitute a
crime. Its purpose is to correct conduct contrary to
naval discipline and prevent recidivism.
Disciplinary corrective.
440. Approval of an infraction committed by Navy
personnel, when it constitutes a crime, in
accordance with military criminal legislation or the
Federal or Common Jurisdiction.
Criminal Process.
441. They are violations of the Disciplinary Law for
Mexican Navy Personnel, and will be disciplinary
sanctions depending on the severity of the
offense.
Read the 08 violations of the Law, page. 77, art.
45. (1).
442. They are violations of the Disciplinary Law for
Mexican Navy Personnel, and will be disciplinary
sanctions depending on the severity of the
offense.
Read the 08 violations of the Law, page. 77, art.
45. (2).
443. It is the classification of violations of naval
discipline in the Discipline Law for the Personnel of
the Mexican Navy.
Mild and Serious.
444. They are those offenses that are committed by
action or omission against the provisions of this
Law, its regulations and other naval and military
regulations, which affect the discipline of the Navy.
Slight faults.
445. The sanction for these offenses will be the
responsibility of the heads of the units and
establishments of the Navy, as well as personnel
designated by the command.
Slight faults.
446. They are those offenses that are committed by
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
action or omission against this Law, its regulations
and other regulations, which affect, in addition to
discipline, the prestige and public image of the
Navy.
Serious misconduct.

447. The sanction for these offenses will be the

responsibility of the disciplinary bodies.
Serious misconduct.

448. Faculty of the Naval Personnel (from Corporals to

Admirals), the Commands and the Disciplinary
Bodies. Imposition of Disciplinary Correctives.

449. They are the types of Disciplinary Corrective in the

Mexican Navy. Read the 6 types page. 78 art. 50.

36 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
450. It is the act by which the superior warns the
subordinate of the omission or defect in the
fulfillment of his duties, urging him to correct
himself so that he does not incur the fault again
and becomes eligible for greater punishment, it
can be verbal or written. . Admonition.
451. It is the retention suffered by a member of the
Navy for a period of 24 hours or up to 15 days with
or without prejudice to the service in their official
accommodation, preventive guard compound or
prison, as the case may be, they will be
communicated in writing. or verbally, in the latter
case, they must be ratified in writing within the
following 24 hours.
Warrant.
452. It is the power of the MS, AM, Undersecretary,
Senior Officer, Inspector and JEMGA, Higher
Commands in Chief, Superiors and Subordinates,
Heads of Units, Directors, Presidents of
Disciplinary Organizations and Admirals, Captains
and Officers designated by the Command.
Graduation of Disciplinary Correctives.
453. It has the power to impose and grade arrests for
up to 08 days.
High Command.
454. It has the power to impose and grade arrests for
up to 15 days.
Disciplinary Bodies.
455. It is the highest ranking of arrests for Admirals.
24 hours.
456. It is the highest level of arrests for Captains.
48 hours.
457. It is the highest ranking of arrests for Officers.
96 hours.
458. It is the highest level of arrests for Classes and
Sailors.
08 days.
459. It will be in proportion to the offense committed,
the hierarchy and background of the offenders, as
well as the existence of mitigating or aggravating
circumstances.
Graduation of Disciplinary Correctives.
460. It consists of assigning the sanctioned person a
minor position in another unit or establishment, for
up to six months. Once the sanction has
concluded, the corresponding command must
inform the EMGA about the conduct and actions of
the sanctioned person.
Change of assignment in observation of their
behavior.
461. It consists of the offender cannot be considered for
promotion to the next higher grade during the
period determined by the respective disciplinary
body, which may be up to one year.
37
By: AEGV
Suspension of ladder rights.
462. It consists of the definitive separation of the
offender with the total loss of the rights that
correspond to the offender's hierarchy and his or
her time of service.
Discharge from Active Service.
463. It has the power to issue the discharge from active
service to Auxiliary Militia personnel.
Disciplinary bodies and Jurisdictional Bodies.
464. It has the power to dictate the discharge of active
service to the personnel of the Permanent Militia.
Jurisdictional Bodies.
465. It may not be a matter of disagreement on the part
of military sailors regarding the various disciplinary
corrective measures. Graduation of Disciplinary
Correctives.
466. They are mitigating circumstances for the
graduation of arrests. Read the 07 mitigating
circumstances page. 81 art. 72.
467. They are aggravating circumstances for the
graduation of arrests.
Read the 12 aggravating circumstances page. 81
art. 73. (1)
468. They are aggravating circumstances for the
graduation of arrests.
Read the 12 aggravating circumstances page. 81
art. 73. (2)
469. They are aggravating circumstances for the
graduation of arrests. Read the 12 aggravating
circumstances page. 81 art. 73. (3)
470. He will be aware of serious offenses committed by
officers without command, classes and sailors;
This Council will function in units and
establishments with subordinate command,
superior command and superior command in
chief.
Ordinary Honor Council.
471. It will be aware of serious offenses committed by
captains without command in any situation they
find themselves in, as well as those incurred by
officers with command and members of the
Ordinary Council of Honor. It will function in units
with superior command in chief.
Superior Honor Council.
472. He will hear about serious misconduct committed
by admirals in any situation in which they find
themselves, captains with command and members
of the Councils of Superior Honor, he will do so at
the headquarters of the High Command.
Board of Admirals.
473. Resolution of the competent Body, where the
accused will be restored to his position and should
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
not be prejudiced in obtaining future positions and
promotions for said cause.
Innocent.

474. Resolution of the competent Body, where the

accused will be sanctioned as determined and
once the sanction has been fulfilled, he will be
restored to effective service, subject to what is
established by the corresponding legal precepts.
Guilty.

475. When a member of the Navy is not satisfied with

the resolutions of the disciplinary body that tried
him, he may appeal to:
Disciplinary body higher than the one that issued
the ruling.

476. Council that will analyze the resolutions issued by

the Board of Admirals, when the military member
does not agree with said resolution.
Reduced Admiralty Council.

38 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
14.- ISSFAM LAW.
477. Its functions are: Grant loans, manage your
assets, manage the resources of the housing fund
for the Armed Forces. that allows them to obtain
credit for the acquisition of a home, construction,
repair, expansion or improvement, as well as
coordinate and finance with resources from the
Housing Fund and construction programs for
rooms intended to be acquired in.
ISSFAM.
478. They are members of the Army, Air Force and
Navy of Mexico; and, when hierarchies are
indicated, the provisions are applicable to the
equivalent ranks in the Armed Forces.
Military.
479. They are the direct line relatives (wife, husband,
common-law wife, common-law partner, children,
mother, father and, in some cases, siblings) who
are entitled to the benefits stipulated in the Law.
Rightful.
480. It is the person in whose favor an economic
benefit has been designated by the express will of
the soldier.
Beneficiary.
481. They are the relatives or family members of the
deceased soldier. Bereaved.
482. It is the document issued to the soldier by the
Secretariat of origin, for the withdrawal process,
so that the Board of Directors determines the
origin, nature and amount of the benefit.
Declaration of Origin of Withdrawal.
483. It is the base perception established in the
tabulator issued by the Ministry of Finance and
Public Credit.
Assets or assets.
484. It is the perception referred to in articles 51 of the
Law on Promotions and Rewards of the National
Army and Air Force and 55 of the Law on
Rewards of the Mexican Navy.
Perseverance bonus.
485. It is the perception that active military personnel
are covered for having a bachelor's degree and
performing specific functions of their profession.
Technician assignment.
486. It is the perception that military personnel are
covered by the active ranks of Colonel to Division
General and their equivalents in the Navy.
Special technician assignment.
487. These are the remunerations that are paid to
members of the Army, Air Force and Navy, who
usually carry out this type of activities.
Flight and jump assignment.
488. It is the additional remuneration that is covered to
active military personnel in response to the
increase in the cost of living or unhealthiness of
39
By: AEGV
the place where they provide their services.
Surplus
489. These are the benefits provided by ISSFAM.
Read the 27 benefits art. 84 pages 84 and 85.
490. They will process before the Institute,
the affiliation of your respective
personnel in situation of active and
retirement, and their
beneficiaries.
SEMAR and SEDENA.
491. They have the power to affiliate their heirs and
designate their beneficiaries, and it is their
obligation to keep said affiliation and designation
updated.
Military.
492. It will enroll the minor children of the soldier, with
the sole presentation of a certified copy of the birth
certificate of the child in question, or by court
order.
ISSFAM.
15.- GENERAL REGULATION OF DUTIES
NAVALS.
493. 493.- It is the Unit or establishment where naval
personnel perform their functions.
Membership.
494. It is the area of responsibility within a unit or
Navy establishment that is assigned to an
individual to manage, operate
and maintain resources
humans,
material and financial.
Post.
495. It is the destination given to naval personnel
according to their hierarchy, to deal with specific
matters of interest to the service.
Commission.
496. Standard to which naval personnel subject their
conduct, is based on obedience and a high
concept of honor, justice and morality and as its
object, the faithful and exact fulfillment of the
duties dictated by naval laws and regulations.
Discipline.
497. It is the set of principles, standards and
procedures that guide the actions of naval
personnel to fulfill their assigned functions.
Naval Doctrine.
498. They are the elements that provide service in the
Navy. Naval Personnel.
499. Act in which every citizen who enters the service
of the Navy is made aware of the commitment he
makes to the country, as well as his obligations
and acquired rights according to naval legislation.
Flag Pledge.
500. It has all the obligations, prerogatives and rights
that the laws establish for citizens, without any
limitations other than those indicated by them and
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
without prejudice to what is established in naval
laws and regulations.
Naval Personnel.

501. They will vote freely in all electoral processes

without allowing or exerting moral or material
pressure on their subordinates for the benefit of
any political party or candidate.
Naval Personnel.

502. Moment in which every citizen, upon joining the

Navy, will be assigned to a unit or establishment
and will have the right to receive clothing and
equipment, as well as the full amount assigned to
him by the current expenditure budget.
Since his entry.

40 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
503. You must have loyalty, security and confidence in
the leadership of your Command. With this and
with the fulfillment of its obligations, it will
contribute to the success of the entrusted mission.
Every man of the sea.
504. He is responsible for his unit or establishment and
will ensure that orders and provisions are fully
complied with, using the means available to fulfill
his mission.
Whoever exercises Command or Direction.
505. He will be responsible for the preparation of his
unit or establishment for the maritime defense of
the territory and the exercise of State functions at
sea, through permanent training and individual
and collective instruction of his subordinates.
All Superior.
506. Modality in which the Superior will exercise his
authority, promoting an environment of
responsibility and harmony to achieve among his
personnel a feeling of satisfaction and pride of
belonging to the Navy.
Firmness, circumspection, justice and
righteousness.
507. Personnel who are appointed, in the national
territory or abroad, have the obligation to obtain
extensive and detailed information on all aspects
related to it, mainly those matters of interest to the
country and the Navy, informing superiors thereof.
Commission.
508. It will manage with honesty and integrity the
means and resources placed at its disposal,
avoiding waste, misuse, waste and unnecessary
expense in the consumption of Navy assets.
Naval Personnel.
509. He must respect and not perform police functions;
It will assist the civil authority at its request and
with the express authorization of the High
Command and will only intervene in cases of
flagrante delicto, placing the offender at the
disposal of the competent authority without delay.
Naval Personnel.
510. Authority empowered to authorize Naval
Personnel to assist civil authorities at their
request.
High Command.
511. It constitutes the expression of mutual respect,
discipline and union between all members of the
Armed Forces.
Military greeting.
512. It must be firm, but at the same time reasoned; It
will be practiced and required as a standard of
action, having as its expression compliance with
the laws, regulations and the exact and punctual
observance of orders, as a fundamental basis of
the service.
Discipline.
513. He will wear his hair short, his mustache trimmed
to the corner of his mouth; If you wear a beard, it
41
By: AEGV
will be complete, presentable, well cut and clean.
Male Staff.
514. You can wear rings, earrings and bangles in
moderation and long hair without being excessive,
allowing you to wear the headdress in an aesthetic
way. In ceremonies and formal events you must
wear your hair up and discreet makeup: Female
Personnel.
515. These are the personnel who may request a
change of assignment, as long as the service is
not harmed, there is a vacancy and reasons
justifying it.
From Sailor to Lieutenant of Ship.
516. He must know his subordinates, particularly their
capacity, mentality, aptitudes, qualities and
limitations; in order to obtain maximum use of the
service.
The Superior
517. He will respect the exercise of the right to petition
by his subordinates, as long as they exercise it
individually, in writing, in a respectful manner and
through regular channels.
The Superior
518. He must instill in his subordinates a discipline
based on conviction, to reason orders to facilitate
their understanding and acceptance.
The Superior
519. The responsibility will fall upon him when an order
is received in any unit or establishment of the
Navy and the Commander or Director is not
present, who will take the necessary measures to
comply with it.
Second Commander or equivalent.
520. In units and establishments or in a group of
elements from different units, the person who
must assume accidental or incidental Command in
the absence of the Commander or Director will be:
Military officer of higher rank or seniority.
16.- HUMAN RIGHTS BOOKLET FOR THE
STAFF OF THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY.
521. They are the fundamental prerogatives and
freedoms that all people have, related to their
dignity as human beings.
Human rights.
522. They are protected by the Constitution,
international treaties and national laws.
Human rights.
523. It is an autonomous body that investigates alleged
human rights violations. If it determines that there
was a violation, it may issue a recommendation to
the Institution so that the damage to those
affected is repaired and those responsible are
punished.
CDNH.
524. They are any act or omission carried out by state
agents, which violates the dignity of people, they
can be committed at the time of the arrest of a
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
person, in the execution of some action to support
public security or during interaction with the
population.
Violations of Human Rights.

525. It is the act intentionally carried out by any

authority or public servant to cause physical,
psychological or sexual pain or suffering to a
person for the purposes of criminal investigation,
as a means of intimidating the victim.
Torture and Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading
Treatment.

526. It occurs when, by any authority, a legal or illegal

detention of one or more people is carried out,
from which their concealment is encouraged or
maintained.
Forced Disappearance.

42 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
527. It is intentionally causing the death of a person.
Arbitrary deprivation of life.
528. It is any act that degrades or damages the body
and/or sexuality of people and that, therefore,
threatens their freedom, dignity and physical
integrity through coercion, it also occurs when the
person is not in a position to give your consent:
drunk, drugged, asleep or disabled.
Sexual Violence.
529. It consists of forced nudity, verbal threats, sexual
insults and ridicule, touching of a sexual nature,
taking photographs or videos of a sexual nature
and inserting the aggressor's penis into the
vagina, mouth or anus.
Sexual Violence.
530. It is the introduction of authorities into a home,
apartment, home or any other private property,
without the corresponding order issued by a
Judge.
Illegal searches.
531. It is the detention of a person without there being:
an order from a judge, an order from an Agent of
the Public Ministry or flagrancy.
Arbitrary detention .
532. It is when the detained person is transferred to
places other than the headquarters of the
ministerial or judicial authority.
Illegal Retention.
533. It refers to preventing a detainee from contact or
communication with any person.
Incommunication.
534. It is letting a person know that harm will be caused
to their physical or psychological integrity, their
property, their honor, their rights or those of
someone with whom they are related.
Threats.
535. Type of physical or psychological violence
committed by an authority with the aim of causing
fear to any person who has suffered a crime or
violation of Human Rights, or who knows about
them, to prevent them from informing the authority
about them.
Intimidation.
536. These are the acts that affect people who present
a complaint or information, are witnesses or have
some connection with the person who has
suffered a violation of their human rights.
Intimidation.
537. It is the seizure of a foreign object, without right
and without consent of its possessor or owner.
Heist.
538. They are acts or omissions that violate human
dignity and that have the objective of nullifying or
reducing the rights and freedoms of people due to
their ethnic or national origin, gender, age,
43
By: AEGV
disabilities, social condition, living conditions.
health, religion, opinions, sexual preferences,
marital status or any other.
Discrimination.
539. It is to intervene without judicial authorization in
private communications, by telephone, radio,
written or digital correspondence, reviewing cell
phones, mobile technological devices and
computer equipment:
Communications Intervention.
540. Is carried out When First the presence
of people
sick, injured or injured, No are taken
the Actions
necessary to provide your medical care and your
right to health protection.
Violations of the Right to Health Protection.
541. They are the consequences of a Human Rights
Violation.
Criminal, administrative and/or disciplinary liability.
542. When does the arrest proceed?
When there is a written order from a judge, a
written order issued by a MP in an urgent case
and in flagrante delicto.
543. How to act when arresting a person?
Identify yourself as naval personnel, show the
arrest warrant to the person, communicate your
rights, protect your physical integrity, make
yourself available without delay to the authority, do
not commit unjustified violence with the detained
person, inform the MP and follow instructions,
report immediately to your superiors.
544. These are the rights that you must make known at
the time of a person's arrest.
Be informed of the reason for the arrest, remain
silent, testify, be assisted by a defense attorney,
inform the person you wish of your arrest, be
innocent until it is determined otherwise, notify the
consulate of your country if foreigner, translator or
interpreter, be presented before the MP.
545. These are your duties in an arrest.
Inform the detainee of his rights, video record
and/or photograph the moment in which you read
the rights to the detainee to leave a proper record.
546. How to protect girls, boys and adolescents, sick
people, older adults, people with disabilities and
pregnant women, during detention?
Safeguard the minor and protect them, gather
them in a safe place away from violent scenarios,
disarm adolescents and protect them with respect,
seek medical attention, protect them and protect
them from any risk.
547. How to preserve the place of the events?
Inform the superior, coordinate perimeter security,
preserve the place intact, do not touch or move
objects, take photographs and/or video, treat the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
media respectfully.

548. What are the principles of the use of force?

Opportunity, proportionality, rationality and
legality.

549. Principle of the Use of Force when it is used when

it is required, in situations that endanger or risk the
lives of civilians, the physical integrity of the
people involved and their property must be
protected.
Chance.

44 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ NAVAL LEGISLATION
OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

550. Principle of the Use of Force when it is used in the magnitude, intensity and duration necessary to achieve control of the situation, taking into
account the level of resistance or aggression faced.
Proportionality.

551. Principle of the Use of Force when its use is the product of a decision that assesses the objective being pursued, the circumstances of the attack,
the personal characteristics and capabilities of both the subject to be controlled and you. Rationality.

552. Principle of the Use of Force when its use is developed in

accordance with current regulations and with respect for Human
Rights.
Legality.

553. It is the gradualness of the use of force that, after evaluating the
situation, you must adopt in a manner proportional to the person's
behavior and/or the resistance they offer.
Levels of use of Force.

554. Level of use of force that refers to the act of presence. Deterrence.

555. Level of use of force when visual contact and verbal instructions are
established, so that the alleged transgressor of the law desists.
Persuasion.

556. Level of use of force when controlling a person in cases of non-

aggressive and aggressive resistance.
Non-lethal force.

557. Level of use of force when lethal means (firearms, blunt and
improvised weapons) are used to protect one's own life or that of
third parties.
Lethal force.

558. It involves repelling an attack in protection of life, one's own or

another's legal property, whenever there is a need for defense,
where there is: aggression by the real, current or imminent attacker,
rational need for defense and that there is no provocation on your
part.
Legitimate defense.

559. He is responsible for the transgressions of his staff, if he knew about

them and did not take action, he should have known about them, or if he should have foreseen them, he did not foresee them and avoided them.
Commander.

560. It is the specialized unit of the Secretary of the Navy in charge of proposing strategies and directing actions to strengthen the culture of promotion,
respect, protection and guarantee of Human Rights.
The Unit for the Promotion and Protection of Human Rights (UPRODEHU).

45 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

STUDY GUIDE

TOTAL QUESTIONS: 497

AREA No. TOPICS:
1. CHAP. 1.- STRUCTURE OF THE VESSEL

2. CHAP. 2.- MEASUREMENTS OF THE VESSEL.

CHAP. 3.- TYPES OF SHIPS AND MATERIALS FOR THEIR
3.
CONSTRUCTION.
4. CHAP. 4.- CABLES AND OPERATIONS WITH CABLES.
SAILORING
KNOWLEDGE 5. CHAP. 6.- DISTRIBUTION OF CABLES AND CABLES ON BOARD.

6. CHAP. 9.- ANCHORS AND CHAINS.

7. CHAP. 12.- RUDDERS AND STEERING APPARATUS.

8. CHAP. 24.- ORAL RULES. FOR NAVIGATION .

9. CHAP. 25.- SEA ACCIDENTS AND RESCUE.

1 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

CHAPTER 1.- STRUCTURE OF THE VESSEL. formation?

Bulb bow and Maier bow.
1. How is any floating vessel, symmetrical with respect to the plane
directed in the direction of its length, generally designated? 18. Type of bow that produces two positive effects: increased ship
Ship or ship. speed and improved ship behavior at sea?
Bulbous bow.
2. What are the essential qualities that a ship must have as a
floating vehicle for navigation? 19. Type of bow that is a type of launched bow, also called spoon
Solidity, buoyancy, stability, speed and ease of steering. bow with very open "V" shapes that has good seaworthy
characteristics?
3. Is it the essential quality of a ship, which requires a robust hull Bow Maier.
structure to resist the stresses to which the ship is subjected
during its life by the action of the different states of the sea and 20. This name is designated to the rear termination of the ship's
the weights it carries? structure, it is the rear part of a ship.
The solidity. Stern.

4. Is it the essential quality of a ship that allows it to stay afloat 21. It is the line that marks the surface of the sea water in the case
even though some of its parts are flooded? of the ship and varies according to its state of load.
Buoyancy. Waterline.

5. Essential quality that allows the ship to return to its equilibrium 22. The part of the hull of a ship submerged in water, that is, below
position by itself when it has been displaced from it by an the waterline, is called the livework or also.
external agent? Carena.
Stability.
23. Part of the hull of a ship, from the waterline to the gunwale.
6. Essential quality of a ship that is required because of the need Dead work.
for movement of the ship in all directions?
The ease of government. 24. Set of hull elements that, in a uniform and continuous manner,
contribute to obtaining, to an acceptable degree, the essential
7. It is a function of the shape of the ship and the power of the qualities for sailing.
propeller it has. Ship structure.
Speed.
25. What are the three basic types of structures considered in
8. Do they essentially contribute to the good economic operation of current shipbuilding?
the ship? Transverse, longitudinal and mixed.
The means for handling and good stowage of the cargo.
26. Type of structure that was classic in wooden ships and is still
9. Part of the ship's body in a thread, that is, without counting its used.
mast? Cross.
Helmet.
27. Type of structure that has emerged with the development of
10. Is this the name given to the front part of the ship that cuts shipbuilding?
through the waters of the sea, the front third of the ship? Longitudinal.
Bow.
28. Where the mixed structure is used more frequently, which
11. Type of bow that was almost universal in the past and frequently provides greater continuity of the structure.
used today on large ships, combining it with the launched bow? On warships.
Straight bow.
29. Piece of the ship's structure, located in the lower part of the hull
12. Type of bow widely used today? in a longitudinal direction, built from horizontal steel plates, on
Launched Bow . which the beams and frames rest.
Keel.
13. Type of bow frequently used by deep-sea fishing vessels? Bow
trawler. 30. What is the name of the vertical reinforcement plate that is fixed
or welded to the keel by two steel angles.
14. Type of bow also called “yacht” or “clipper”? Keelson.
Violin bow.
31. What was the name of the keel that in wooden construction
15. Type of bow ready to mount and break the ice layer with its ships was made up of long planks joined together at one end.
weight? Solid keel.
Icebreaker Bow.

16. Type of bow that has the characteristic of facilitating the task of
laying submarine cables?
Cablero Bow.

17. What are the two types of bow that have become more widely
used due to their hydrodynamic characteristics that result in a
notable reduction in resistance to the movement of wave

2 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

32. Cavity, groove or longitudinal channel of the solid keel where the 50. The opening made in the vault above the sternpost for the
edges or heads of the lining planks fit. Alefriz. passage of the rudder head and play of its tiller is called:
Limera.
33. Piece of wood that supplemented the solid keel to protect its
underside. 51. Element of the transverse structure of the ship that gives shape,
Zapata. support and gives strength to the outer lining, they are lateral
pieces that join the curvature of the bilge to the varengas.
34. The construction of this type of keel is the most widespread Notebooks.
today.
Flat keel. 52. Frame corresponding to the cross section with the largest
surface area, located in the center of the vessel.
35. Type of keel that is made up of a flat keel, two symmetrical Master notebook.
beams with respect to the bay and the central strake of the inner
lining of the double bottom. 53. Reinforced frames with a greater depth than ordinary ones
Box keel. which reinforce the structure and give it greater solidity.
Bulárcamas.
36. Piece of steel or wood that extends the keel in a vertical or
inclined direction along its bow side. 54. Elements of the transverse structure of the ship's bottom,
Stem. consisting of vertical plates that extend from one side of the
bilge to the other, are placed along the entire length of the ship
37. Roda is synonymous with what term in current shipbuilding was in each cross section that is framed.
used on wooden ships. Varengas.
Branque.
55. They have been used in naval construction, now in disuse and
38. To consolidate and reinforce the stem at the bottom, some were made up of the frame, a transverse profile, consoles and
horizontal pieces are placed. counters.
Buzardas. False Varengas.

39. It was applied on sailing ships, currently out of use, protruding 56. Transverse pieces with a certain curvature called sharp or
from the upper part of the stem and well adapted to it, they turned, which are fixed to the frames, contributing to the support
supported the figurehead. of the hull and which rest on the struts. They serve to support
Cutwater. the deck plates.
Baos.
40. It is the vertical piece with little drop, where the ship ends on its
stern side and which joins this end of the keel. Codaste. 57. It is the longest beam, that is, the one corresponding to the main
frame on the upper deck.
41. Rotating blade around a vertical axis that allows the ship to vary Master bath.
its direction at will, moving forward or backward.
Rudder. 58. Bao that is placed in the hold to give more support to the sides,
forming a cover over it.
42. Its main function is to support the weight of the rudder, propeller Air bath
and axles, as well as the forces transmitted by them.
Codaste. 59. Beams located in the hatches and other deck openings, which
do not go from side to side, rest one end on the frame console
43. The stern frame has a vacuum for housing the propeller, called: and the other on the length of the hatch.
Vain. Half baths.
44. Type of sternpost that has a hole for the placement of the
60. It is one that is higher than the common ones and generally
propeller horn.
corresponds to a bularcama.
Proel elbow.
Reinforced bathroom.
45. Stern that serves as support and rudder axis.
61. Longitudinal pieces of the ship's bottom structure, of the same
Rear sternpost.
height as the beams, serve to increase the resistance of the hull
to bending effects.
46. Upper piece that joins the two sternposts.
You wander.
Arch or bridge.
62. Vertical pieces or steel columns, on which the baths rest.
47. Part of the sternpost that closes the frame on the inside is
Props.
extended to join the keel.
Foot of sternpost. 63. Longitudinal pieces of reinforcement of the sides that run along
48. Type of sternpost widely used in ships with a single propeller the interior, spaced from the bilge curvature to the upper deck
and lacking an external sternpost or sternpost, replaced by the gunnel.
rudder shaft. Palmejares.
Open elbow.

49. Type of sternpost that is reinforced with beams and beams to

support both dynamic and static loads transmitted to the hull by
the rudder.
False Codaste.

3 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

64. Steel plates placed in parallel courses that, starting from the 81. Curvature that some decks have towards the sides and whose
keel and fixing to the frames and beams, reach the top of the purpose is the rapid evacuation of rainwater shipped in bad
sides. weather.
Cover. Brusque

65. The flat part of the bottom of the ship is called, currently it is 82. Cover that, together with the outer lining, forms the envelope
applied to the curve or curvature joining the flat bottom with the that ensures the perfect watertightness of the boat, is also
sides of the ship. known as the main or first cover.
Bilgewater. Top deck.

66. The parts of the hull, at the ends of the vessel, where the flat 83. They are the covers below the main one. Second, third or low .
bottom ceases to be flat and adopts more or less closed "V"
84. Decks that, below the main deck, are not continuous and cover
shapes, are called: Bow or stern fins or Rasales.
only part of the ship, such as engine rooms, holds to make
better use of space.
67. The rows of plates on a ship are called:
Platforms.
Tracas.
85. It is the plank strake of the decks adjacent to the sides.
68. Course of plates that is placed immediately to the keel, that is,
Trancanil.
the first strake of plates.
Apparel strake. 86. Constructions above the main strong deck, having the same
width as the beam of the ship and its port and starboard
69. Course of plates that goes over the curvature of the bilge, that
bulkheads of the outer skin.
is, over the part with the greatest curvature of the frame.
Superstructure.
Bilge strake.
87. It is the space that is included between two consecutive covers.
70. It is the course of plates that are thicker than the others, placed Steering.
at the height of the main or upper deck.
Tape strake. 88. Name given to the superstructure located at the bow of the ship.
Castle.
71. Fenders fitted to ships performing port maneuvers to protect the
ship's skin along the side. Belts. 89. Name given to the superstructure located in the center of the
ship.
72. Appendages perpendicular to the lining, whose purpose is to Citadel.
reduce the amplitude of the balances caused by the surge.
Side hulls or balance keels. 90. Name given to the superstructure located at the stern of the
ship. Toldilla or Alcázar.
73. It is the last row of plates whose finishing is the gunwale cover, it
has reinforcements that are attached to the deck. 91. The intermediate spaces between the superstructures of the
Barraganetes. ship are called:
Wells.
74. Elements of the structure of ships built of steel and placed in a
vertical or inclined position, divide the interior of the ship, 92. Superstructure that provides the ship with greater props in the
forming compartments. bow to reinforce it and make it difficult for water to board due to
Bulkheads. the effect of the slats.
Castle.
75. They prevent the loss of buoyancy in cases of flooding due to
93. Superstructure that provides general space for the
damage.
accommodation of the crew, is synonymous with the
Watertight bulkheads.
quarterdeck.
76. Bulkhead located at the bow and that allows limiting a leak of Poop deck.
water produced in the bow, due to a collision.
94. Construction that is located above the upper deck and in the
Collision bulkhead. direction of the beam, from which all the structures are
dominated.
77. Located close to the stern, they enclose the engine and boiler
Command booth.
rooms.
Aft peak bulkhead. 95. Rectangular openings made in the covers to establish
communication between them.
78. Space in the bottom of the ship, between the outer shell and the Hatches.
interior, emerged as a development of ballast tanks. False
bottom. 96. The hatches are fitted with vertical frames called:
Armbands.
79. It is considerably more effective than the transverse structure in
the double bottom in resisting the buckling effect of the plates
caused by compression loads.
Longitudinal.

80. Horizontal surfaces or floors that join the sides and rest on the
beams.
Covers.

4 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
97. The hatch closing procedure for many years has been based on
transverse beams called: Galeotas.
98. What are the names of the planks that the galleys and coaming
served as support and closed the hatch?
Quarters.
99. They are openings in the ship that connect two decks and are
generally small in size, sufficient for the passage of people and
non-bulky objects.
Hatches.
100. They are rectangular openings that are made in the ship's
underside or in any of its interior divisions. Portas.
101. Ports whose purpose is to facilitate the rapid drainage of the
deck flooded by sea waves.
Falucheras.
102. Circular opening made in the side or deck of the ship to provide
light and ventilation.
Portillo.
103. What is the name of the metal security cover on the gate? Blind.
104. They are circular cutouts made in different parts of the ship for
the passage of mooring lines, spies, etc.
Cat flaps.
105. Clear passages established on the sides of a ship for the
embarkation and disembarkation of people and portable effects.
Gate.
106. Openings in the gunnels and sides of a ship, which are intended
to provide an outlet for the waters of the respective deck, are
also holes left in the lower part of the beams.
Scuppers.
107. What else are the various holes that run through the bottom of
the varengas called?
Groeras, regola, regatta or drain.
108. They are tubes that, starting from the highest roofs, collect the
water that is in them for any reason.
Scuppers.
109. They are circular openings through which the decks of a ship,
the masts and the winch pass through, until they reach their
respective seats.
Partners.
110. Frame formed by one or several pieces on which the end of a
stick, called a wick, rests.
Cockpit.
111. Steel tube of different diameters, welded to the deck, used to
make turns with chains, cables or moorings.
Bitt.
112. Name given to the bitt when it is larger. Biton.
113. It is a piece of wood or metal with an arched shape that,
attached at its center to the deck or side, is used to tie ropes.
Bagpipe.
114. Pieces of iron, generally circular in section, which are fixed
vertically at one end on the deck, ending in a fork shape, serve
to support the awnings.
Candlesticks.
115. Thin metal bars or wooden railings, which run on both sides of
the ladders, the poop, the castle, a bridge, to serve as support.
Railing.
By: AEGV
116. Ladder that is assembled on the starboard side, provided with
stanchions and their corresponding handrails and that go from
the gate to the surface of the water.
Real scale.
117. Which is the scale with less presentation than the real scale,
because it is not intended for higher category people to climb it.
Port scale.
118. Scale that goes on the side of the ship from the gunwale to the
waterline.
Tojino scale .
119. A type of grille or lattice formed of bars and slats crossed at
squares.
grated.
120. Mobile elements that are placed outside the side of the ship
when it is going to dock at the dock or another ship, to cushion
the shock.
Defenses.
121. It is a simple wooden or steel frame cover, which serves to
protect from the elements and more particularly from rain.
Tambuchos.
122. Hatches with glass covers to provide light and ventilation to the
chambers, machines and, in general, the lower deck. Louvres.
123. Open round hole in the covers, which is covered with a strong
glass called "porthole".
Patent louver.
124. These are the hatches and ventilation ducts that do not extend
completely longitudinally between the main transverse
bulkheads.
Logs.
125. Light construction that rises in the median of the ship and in
general, is any difference in height that forms a step on a deck.
Saltillo.
126. It is the place on the ship where the frame of the same name is
located, it is the most curved area of the hull near the bow.
Amura .
127. Piece that forms the last stern frame, it is the most curved part
of the side near the stern.
Fin.
128. It is the highest part of the stern gunwale, where the boom
rested on ancient sailing ships.
Crowning.
5 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

129. They are the compartments intended for carrying cargo, they are 16. It is the measurement counted from the skin board, adjacent to
numbered starting from the bow. the keel, to the center of the upper edge of the main deck beam.
Store. Bowing strut.

130. What Spanishized word is used on small ships to designate the 17. It is the vertical distance measured in the longitudinal plane of
hold. symmetry of the vessel and in the middle of the registration
Creek. length.
Registration Prop.
CHAPTER 2.- VESSEL MEASUREMENTS.
18. It is the vertical distance, from the bottom of the keel to the
1. The parallel planes that at small intervals cut the hull up to the waterline.
waterline, form at their intersection with the outer shell the so- Draft.
called:
Water Lines. 19. They are the portions of the extreme perpendiculars between
the flotation and the keel.
2. It corresponds to a certain state of charge. Bow and stern draft.
Waterline.
20. What draft should be the half-sum of the bow and stern drafts,
3. It is the longitudinal plane that divides the ship into two and should be the draft at half the length.
symmetrical parts. Medium draft.
Bay plan.
21. It is the one that exists between the bow and stern drafts.
4. They are the plans or layout forms of the ship. Longitudinal, Difference in drafts.
Transverse and Horizontal.
22. It is the graduation in decimeters and indicates the draft relative
5. It is the length of the ship.
to the flotation.
Length.
Draft Scale.
6. It is the length of the ship measured in the longitudinal plane,
23. It is the longitudinal floating state in which a ship is and is
between the perpendiculars that pass through the intersection of
determined by its drafts at any given time.
the floatation in normal load, it is the length that appears as the
Seat.
Official in most nations.
Length between perpendiculars.
24. They indicate the draft of the ship, counting from the lower edge
of the most protruding appendage.
7. It is the measurement of floatation under normal load, which in
Navigation marks.
warships usually coincides with the length between
perpendiculars. Length in the Waterline. 25. They facilitate the draft of the vessel from the lower edge of the
keel and serve to determine the displacement and trim of the
8. It is the distance between the perpendiculars drawn tangentially
vessel. The displacement marks.
to the external contour of the ship's projection on the longitudinal
plane, important for dock entrances. Maximum or total length 26. It is the curvature that occurs in a longitudinal direction to the
from outside to outside. straps, chevrons, gunnels and decks of a ship, raising its
extremities, produced by the effect of the various loads it
9. It is the length measured from the bow face of the upper end of
supports.
the stem to the aft face of the upper end of the sternpost.
Arrufo.
Registration Length.
27. Curvature of the longitudinal structure of the ship produced by
10. It is the greatest width of a ship outside of members, a
loads that operate opposite to the sheer, the bow and stern are
dimension found in the master frame at the height of the fort
in the trough of the wave and the center in the crest.
line.
Brokenness
Sleeve.
28. It is the weight of the ship equal to the weight of the water
11. It is the sleeve that includes the distance between two tangents
displaced. Displacement.
to the flotation, parallel to its symmetry axis.
Maximum flotation sleeve. 29. This is the name given to the weight of the ship completely
unloaded, without fuel, water, oil, equipment or any
12. It is the distance between two parallels to the longitudinal axis
consumption effects; it is known as construction displacement.
that comprise the submerged part of the hull in normal flotation.
Thread displacement.
Maximum beam of the live work.
30. It is only used in merchant ships, it is the thread displacement
13. It is the maximum beam of the vessel, measured outside of the
that increases in all fluids circulating through pipes, machines
skins, but not including the belts or fenders.
and boilers.
Registration sleeve.
Displacement in ballast.
14. It is the height of a ship or vertical distance counted from the
plan to the main deck.
Strut.

15. It is the vertical height measured at half the length from the top
of the upper deck beam on the side to the horizontal plane that
passes above the keel.
Construction Prop.
6 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

31. It is a tonnage that is not defined, it corresponds to a particular Nuclear powered ship.
state of load that the shipowner and the builder agree on in the
specifications of their contract, to carry out the ship reception 6. It is that ship that is moved by the action of a gas turbine. Gas
tests. turbine propulsion vessel.
Displacement of evidence.
7. This type of vessel is one whose propulsion force is produced by
32. It is the displacement that corresponds to the situation of expelling water at high speed through a nozzle. Water jet
complete displacement, with the maximum load and the filling of propulsion vessel.
fuel, oil, water, provisions, supplies and ammunition, if
applicable, it is known as total displacement. 8. Ship has fins under the hull so that when sailing at speed they
Maximum Displacement. raise it above the sea surface.
Hydrofoil vessel.
33. Type of displacement that is only used by warships and is also
called Washington displacement, it is when the ship is 9. It is that ship that has the ability to remain above the sea surface
completely ready to sail. due to the effect of an air cushion created under the hull, that is,
Standard displacement. it floats in the air close to the sea surface.
Air Cushion Vessel.
34. Type of displacement that is only used in submarines, they
always remain at the same value. 10. It is that ship that belongs to the Navy of a Nation, is registered
Surface displacement. in its official list of ships, flies the flag and insignia of the Navy
and is commanded and crewed by an officer and a Navy crew.
35. Its value is the surface displacement increased by the weight of of war.
the water that the main ballast tanks may contain, the flooding Warship.
of which serves to allow the submarine to gain depth.
Dive displacement. 11. It is the most important ship in a fleet, it has a clear and wide
deck for takeoff and landing of planes.
36. It is used only on merchant ships and gives a perfect idea of the Aircraft carrier ship.
ship's capacity as it represents the maximum weight of payload
that it can carry. 12. It is the ship that transports, supports and operates helicopters.
Dead weight. Helicopter carrier.

37. Also called deadweight or maximum load, it includes cargo, fuel,
food reserve water, oil reserve, weight of provisions, crew,
passage and luggage.
Dead weight.
38. It is the difference that exists between the maximum
displacement and the ballast displacement.
Dead weight.
13. It is the warship whose displacement ranges between 5,000 and
15,000 TON, with high speed, great autonomy and strong anti-
aircraft, surface, and anti-submarine weapons. Cruise.
14. This type of ship has a displacement of around 3,000 TONS with
high-speed anti-submarine, anti-surface and anti-aircraft
weapons.
Destroyer.

39. It is the maximum weight of commercial cargo that the ship can 15. It is the warship that has a displacement between 1,100 and
transport, fully loaded with fuel, oil and reserve water tanks, 3,000 TONS, slower than the destroyer and has anti-submarine,
food stores and other items of normal consumption. anti-surface and anti-aircraft weapons.
Bearing. Frigate.

40. It is the distance measured on the side of the ship, at half the 16. Warship smaller in size and speed than the frigate, between 500
loaded waterline length, from the top of the deck line to the top and 1000 TONS, has anti-submarine, anti-surface and anti-
of the corresponding load line. Free board. aircraft weapons.
Corvette.
CHAPTER 3.- TYPE OF VESSELS AND MATERIALS
17. Ship with a displacement between 100 and 500 TONS, has a
USED FOR THEIR CONSTRUCTION. sustained speed of more than 25 knots, and has powerful
weapons.
1. This name is designated to those vessels that use the action of Fast boats.
the wind on the sails for propulsion.
Sailing ship.

2. This vessel moves by means of a propeller powered by the

expansive driving force of water vapor acting on a reciprocating
machine or a turbine.
Steamboat.

3. It is a ship that uses combustion engines for propulsion.

Motor ship.

4. It is a ship whose propeller is moved by an electric motor.

Electric propulsion vessel.

5. It uses a nuclear reactor as a source of energy and is mainly

used in submarines.

7 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
18. It is the warship that, thanks to the flooding of the ballast tanks,
can navigate below the surface of the sea.
Submarine.
19. The range of this type of special ships used for this type of
warfare is wide, it can basically be grouped into attack transport,
landing ship and landing craft.
Ship for amphibious warfare.
20. This type of ship has led to the development of a series of
special ships for this type of war, basically the minelayer, the
minesweeper and the minesweeper.
Mine warfare vessel.
21. It is the ship prepared for anchoring a minefield. Minelayer.
22. It is the ship that has a series of devices that enable it to track
and destroy mines.
Minesweeper.
23. It is that ship that has a series of underwater detection
equipment for the location of mines and subsequent destruction.
Mine hunter.
24. They are those Navy ships that have logistical support functions
for the Naval Force or are used in traditional scientific missions.
Auxiliary Vessels.
25. They are those vessels whose specific mission is the coast
guard service.
Coastguard.
26. Privately owned vessel used in maritime transportation.
Merchat vessel.
27. It is one that has been built to transport liquid fuel in tanks, it is
also called a tanker or tanker. Petroleum ship.
28. What are oil tankers from 350,000 TONS deadweight known as?
Supertankers or supertanks.
29. They require less free board than the rest of the cargo, it is
intended for the transport of refined petroleum products.
Petroleum ship.
30. Type of ship that resembles an oil tanker, it is used for liquid
cargo and in merchant fleets it appears in a very varied range,
including ships transporting liquefied gases.
Ship for the transportation of liquid cargo.
31. It is a ship that transports solid bulk and has emerged as a
derivative of the traditional mineral ship.
Vessel for bulk cargo or bulkcarrier.
32. It is a ship that makes the most of its transportation possibilities
and has been designed so that it always undertakes trips with
some type of cargo.
Combined cargo ship.
33. They are large vessels specialized for the transport of
containers, which are provided in their holds with vertical guides
that form cells, into which containers of universal measurements
fit.
Container ship.
34. It is a large transport or mother ship, made of barges like
containers, but larger than these, it can transport 300 to 400
tons of cargo.
By: AEGV
Barge Carrier Ship.
35. It does not usually dock at the docks, but in the roadstead, it is
called SEA-BEE, which has a large lifting platform at the stern,
with a lifting force of 2000 tons.
LASH ship.
36. They can also be called rolling cargo, they correspond to the
term roll-on roll-of, they manipulate the cargo in the horizontal
direction, shipping the merchandise directly from the dock on
wheels.
Vessel for roll-on cargo.
37. It is a type of vessel currently very widespread that covers a
regular service between ports, designed for general cargo, liquid
and solid bulk and containers.
Multipurpose general cargo ship.
38. Type of ship that is equipped for the transportation of
passengers.
Passenger ship.
39. Vessel that does not cover a regular service and only sails on an
adventure in search of cargo wherever there is it.
Trap ship
40. Vessel built to tow other vessels or devices characterized by its
high machine power and excessive draft in relation to its small
size.
Tugboat.
41. Vessel that has facilities for laying, tracking and repairing
submarine telegraph cables.
Cable ship.
42. A ship used to open channels in frozen seas to make navigation
possible.
Icebreaker Ship.
43. This type of vessel is used in the extraction of fish, the variety of
existing classes being wide, as many as the fishing procedures
or gear used.
Fishing vessels.
44. Type of fishing vessel used to capture bonito, conger eel, cod,
pomfret and usually has tanks for live bait.
Fishing with rods and lines.
45. Type of small fishing vessel dedicated to the coastal capture of
sardines and herring.
Fishing boat equipped with steering wheel.
46. Fishing vessel dedicated to catching tuna, bonito, sardine,
herring, anchovy and others.
Fishing vessel with purse seine art.
8 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

47. This vessel is towing a net called a codend, at a depth close to Dredge.
the bottom, this type being the most widespread. 66. Vessel that transports the product extracted from dredgers out
Fishing trawler. of ports.
Gánguil.
48. This fishing vessel is used for deep-sea fishing that picks up,
picks up and drags the gear over the side. 67. Boat that handles weights on a pontoon.
Fishing bou or trawler. Floating crane.

49. This type of fishing vessel carries and drags the gear from the 68. This boat has a davit at the bow and a windlass on deck for
stern and collects it from the side. anchor, chain and deadlift work.
The cow. Seagull.

50. Fishing vessel prepared to drag the gear between two.
The couple.
51. Type of fishing vessel that has a stern ramp that performs all the
work with the stern maneuver and through the ramp.
The modern one.
69. Type of float with a flat bottom and deck, characterized by its
parallelepiped structure and no marine shapes.
Drum.
70. Tugboat that has a displacement of more than 400 tons.
High altitude tugboat.

52. It is used for fishing crustaceans, among this type are lobsters. 71. Tugboat that has a displacement between 200 and 400 Ton.
Fishing with creel. Roadstead tugboat.

53. This type of vessel carries out fishing by harpooning the 72. Tugboat that has a displacement of more than 50 tons and less
cetacean using a harpoon launcher cannon located on the bow than 200 tons.
of the vessel. Port Tugboat.
Whaling.
73. Tug with a displacement equal to or less than 50 Ton. Towing
54. This vessel contributes greatly to the industrialization of fishing, Boat.
receiving the catches from a series of smaller fishing vessels
and preparing them for marketing. 74. Water tank vessel, with its own propulsion and a displacement
Mother ship. of more than 400 Ton.
Cistern.
55. This vessel is prepared for trawling and purse seining, and is
equipped with a facility for freezing the catch and using the by- 75. Vessel analogous to the Aljibe, but with machine power equal to
products. or less than 400 hp.
Fishing-Factory. Port cistern.

56. It is the set of ships, boats and devices intended for traffic and 76. When having its own propulsion its displacement is less than
work in ports and arsenals. 400 Ton.
Naval train. Cistern barge.

57. Depending on its power of machines and elements available, it 77. Water tank boat, without its own propulsion.
is called a roadstead or a port. Cistern barge.
Tug.
78. Oil tank vessel, with its own propulsion, with power greater than
58. Vessel of more than 50 tons intended for the transshipment of 400 HP and displacement greater than 400 TON.
cargo that has its own propulsion and generally with a cover. Oil tanker.
Barge.
79. When its machine power is equal to or less than 400 HP and its
59. This ship lacks its own propulsion and is almost always a large displacement exceeds 400 TON.
boat without a deck. Port oil tanker.
Barge.
80. When having its own propulsion its displacement is less than
60. Boat that has different uses. 400 TON.
Barge. Oil barge.

61. Self-propelled vessel of less than 50 TONS. Boat.

62. This flat-bottomed vessel is used in shallow ports for cargo

transportation.
Flat.

63. This vessel is used for drinking water and boiler service.
Cistern.

64. Vessel intended for the transportation of liquid fuels.

Oil tanker.

65. Vessel intended for the extraction of mud and sand.

9 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

CHAPTER 4.- CABLES AND OPERATION WITH

CABLES.
81. Boat with oil tank without its own propulsion. Oil barge. cabullería.

82. The one that has its own propulsion is intended for the transport 3. It is joining a handful of vegetable or synthetic fibers and twisting
of torpedoes. them on themselves.
Torpedo barge. Quilted.
4. Group of quilted fibers on the right.
83. It is the gang with its own propulsion. Philastic.
Gánguil barge.
84. It is a gangster without propulsion. 5. It is twisting or quilting several threads together on the left. Cord.
Barge gang.
6. Formation of 3 or 4 quilted cords on the right. Hawser.
85. They are the devices intended for handling anchors.
Seagull barge. 7. It is an internal cord quilted backwards, its objective is to occupy
the interior space left by the four cords, preventing it from
86. They make up the so-called sports marina that has experienced
flattening and deforming.
a notable increase in recent years.
Soul.
Pleasure vessels.

87. Type of steel that comes in plates of a wide variety of 8. It is made up of 3 and 4 quilted hawsers on the left. Hawser.
dimensions ranging from thicknesses of 5 to 150 mm, being one
of the thicknesses used in the superstructure and the maximum 9. Quilted ropes are easy to get tangled up, caught in twists or
turns, to avoid this, ropes made by means of ropes are used.
in the hull areas.
Woven or braided.
Laminated steel.

88. Material with greater resistance and toughness than mild steel
and used to manufacture some types of solid keels, stems and
sternposts.
Forged steel.
89. It is a material that offers greater resistance than forged steel
and a special sand mold is required to make the piece.
Cast steel.
90. It is used in warships and merchant shipbuilding, its use is as
booms for lifting large weights, oil tankers, bulk carriers and
container ships.
High resistance steel.
91. They are nickel steel and stainless steel for the transport of
abrasive materials, with high wear resistance: carbon, silicon
and manganese.
Special steels.
92. They are pieces of laminated steel that are used for the
construction of the different elements of the ship's structure
(beams, frames, lengths, etc.).
Steel profiles.
93. The construction of ships made of this material has practically
disappeared, it is only used for smaller vessels and some
specific types of ships such as minesweepers and small fishing
boats.
Wood.
94. They are aluminum alloys, used in superstructures, chimneys,
galleys, hatch quarters, boats, ventilation trunks, frames and
ladders, the most used alloy is manganese.
Light alloys.
10. Currently, what are most of the ropes used on board made of
due to the greater superiority in performance and price.
Synthetic fibers.
11. The Cabullería with vegetable fibers that is still manufactured is
based on what materials?
Sisal, abaca and cotton.
12. When wet they can double their weight, due to the adsorption of
water.
Vegetal fibers.
13. It is the most resistant synthetic fiber, light in weight and very
resistant to the elements and acids, it is known as polyamides,
but it does not serve as a lowering strip for a boat, it is very
slippery.
Nylon.
14. It is a synthetic fiber, lighter than water and floats, it is special for
ropes and trailers, as it floats it reduces tangling in the
propellers.
Polypropylene.
15. It is the synthetic fiber with intermediate qualities between
polypropylene and nylon, it adheres better than other fibers to
the bitts and cleats, it is known as dacron, terylene or tevira.
Polyester.
16. The ropes used on board for force maneuvers (rigging, mooring)
of ore greater than 12 mm are called:
The body rigging.

95. Material that in recent decades has shown great development,

being the substitute for wood in the construction of small ships
and minor recreational boats. Plastics.

1. Generic name of the ropes used on board. Capes.

2. The set of ropes and cables specific to a ship. Rigging or

10 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

17. It is a rough hemp rigging made up of 3 or 4 threads quilted on 35. It is a widely used knot. To do it, the ends of both ropes are
the right, very useful for temporary work. Spun yarn. crossed twice consecutively.
Plain knot.
18. It is a rope made up of three threads of excellent fiber (cotton,
linen, nylon, etc.) quilted on the left in which its core is usually 8 36. Knot that is used when the ropes to be spliced have a lot of ore.
and 15 mm. Ordinary knot.
Piola.
37. This type of sewing is used to join two quilted ends. Round
19. Cape formed by 3 cords quilted on the left, each cord composed seam.
of 6, 9 or 12 filaments depending on the thickness desired,
varying its core between 25 and 45 mm. 38. What is used instead of a round seam because this has the
Sway. disadvantage of being very thick and not useful in case the rope
20. It is a kind of thinner swing and good quality fiber, it is made up must work for a rig.
of 3 cords, its ore is usually about 10 mm. Spanish long seam.
Marline.
39. It is the action of joining two ropes in any of their parts to each
21. It is always manufactured with top quality fibers, made up of 2 or other by means of a connection with another rope of lesser ore.
3 of these fibers, its ore is very small, 3.5 to 4.5 mm, it is used Torture
for sewing and ligatures.
Candle thread. 40. It is the simplest knot used to attach a rope to a hanger or ring.
Cote.
22. It is the end of the cape that is free.
Chicote. 41. This knot is used to tie the rope quickly when the rope is very
long.
23. This is the name given to any piece of intermediate rope existing Elusive quote.
between the two ends.
42. It is used to attach a rope to a hanger, it is attached to it with a
Breast.
tie mounted on the rope itself.
24. It is the end of the rope that is attached to the firm structure of Crossbow turns.
the ship.
43. Knot that consists of a leaf lashing that has also been given a
Firm.
tie, it is very simple and strong.
25. Action of collecting a rope or cable neatly, forming circles so that Gunner's knot.
it takes up little space and does not become tangled.
44. It is a variation of the leaf lash used in the case in which the
adujar
surface of the rope works in an oblique direction to the spar.
Bitten back.
26. If the adujas are taken counterclockwise, it is said to have been
adujad: 45. This knot is used to tie objects that need to be raised or lowered.
Argued against. Breaststroke return.

27. When the adujas are all the same size and are clear, it is said to 46. This is the name given to the turns that are made in the rods,
be adujado: cleats and thwarts of the boats with the halyards or sheets.
Affected alike. Maneuver turns.

28. If the tail that remains of a rig is of short length, it is said that it
can be adducted.
Adducted to the Dutch.
29. With thick ore ropes and where it is desired to dispose of them
quickly, such as mooring ropes, the doweling is usually used.
Adducted to the Guacaresca.
30. They are operations with the splicing of two ropes or the joining
of a rope to the ship's surface.
Knot.
31. It is achieved by making the cords of each guy pass between
the cords of one of the ropes, it will be done when the union has
to be permanent. Sewing.
47. It is taking turns on the bitt, it is a method widely used in
mooring maneuvers of the ship, a single man can hold the whip
to let the rope go little by little.
Back to a bitt.
48. It is tying a bollard to a noray, they are used when the bitt is
complete with another rope and you want to tie a new one.
Returns to a bollard.
49. It is used to ensure that a taut working rope is moved by bitt or
cleat without loosening.
Boza or piece.

32. It consists of wrapping the rope with sail thread a few times,
which serves to improve the strength and appearance of the
knot or seam. Linked

33. It is the action of tightening a knot or lashing tightly.

Sugar

34. It is joining two ropes together at their ends using knots or

sewing.
Splice or splice.

11 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

50. It is a loop in which a rope often ends, its application is as a Mostache.

support for the shackle, shackle ropes to bollards. Loop.
13. It is a type of temporary shroud that is given when the wind is
51. The loops made using knots are called. Rafts. strong to reinforce the shrouds.
Quinal .
52. Which is the most widespread knot among seafarers. Ace of
guide. 14. Cable that supports the topmasts or topmasts to the deck in a
transverse direction.
53. This knot is taken 2 or 3 ropes on the left hand, it is usually used Burda.
to suspend a man.
Balso for chicote or caulk. 15. It is a rope or tackle that works vertically and is used to hoist a
54. The gauze sewn by quilting is also called: yard, pickaxe or sail.
Screw Halyard.

55. When the rope must work around something hard (eyebolt, 16. It is the rope, cable or rigging that works in an oblique direction
shackles, etc.) it is convenient to insert a metal piece called: to keep a yard, boom or peak in position in the vertical plane.
Thimble. Amantillo.

56. It is a simple gauze that consists of unraveling the neck and 17. It is a rope, cable or tackle that keeps both the beak of a crab
and the tip of a feather in position in the horizontal plane.
making a seam on it and the surface of the rope.
Osta.
Strip in beta woven.
18. It is the rope, cable or rigging that positions the boom of a gaff or
57. Operation that consists of tying with sail thread to the neck of a
other sail in the horizontal plane.
rope.
Sheet.
falcacear
58. This is the name given to the braiding that is made with the 19. They move the yards in the horizontal plane in order to direct the
cords of a rope in its neck. sails to the wind.
Pineapples. Fathom.

20. When a ship had to be moored for a long time, coconut fiber
CHAPTER 6.- DISTRIBUTION OF CABLES AND CABLES hawsers were used, which are called when they are made of
ON BOARD. vegetable or synthetic fiber. Stachas.
1. What is the name of the set of ropes and cables used on board? 21. It is a thin and resistant rope used to lay mooring lines in the
Rigging. different maneuvers of docking, towing, mooring to a buoy, etc.
Guide.
2. It is the set of ropes and cables that supported the mast. Firm
rigging. 22. It is the thickest guide rope that serves as a link between the fine
guide and the mooring.
3. It is the set of moving or working cables and cables. Work Delivery courier.
rigging.
23. These mechanisms serve to make efforts with the ropes, help to
4. It is the set of ropes and cables used in mooring the ship. enter (strips) the moorings and collaborate in docking the ship.
Mooring rigging. Winch and winch.
5. It is a cable that supports the main mast or the topmast so that it 24. The action of entering a mooring by rotating the winch is called.
does not fall towards the stern. Tack.
Backstay.
25. It emerged as a new technique after the increase in the size of
6. What cable is similar to the forestay, but of lesser value, its ships, it maintains the tension of the cable constant, deviating
mission being to support a sail? when it tends to increase and turning when the tension
Nerve. subsides, representing a significant saving in personnel during
7. Short cable that supports the bowsprit mucus longitudinally. the maneuver. Windlass.
Wind.

8. It is a cable that acts as a forestay for the bowsprit.

Bridle.

9. It is any of the cables that hold the mast to the deck or the
topmast to its topmast in a transverse direction.
Shroud.
10. They are short ropes that are tied horizontally to the shrouds.
You arrowed.

11. It is used to climb the masts to carry out the maneuvers of

holding on or launching the rig, it is made up of the arrows
together with the shrouds.
Rigging table.
12. This is the name given to each of the shrouds that support the
bowsprit.

12 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

CHAPTER 9.- ANCHORS AND CHAINS. Pitch over the anchor.

1. What is the name of the action of keeping a ship subject to the 19. It is charging the chain to get closer to the anchor.
seabed. Tack about the anchor.
Anchored.
20. Give the ship direction towards the anchor when turning on it
2. Formerly it was the third anchor to appear in the order of using the rudder.
counting it. Rule over the anchor.
Sheet anchor.
3. Common nicknames given to anchors that are always ready to 21. Action of continuing to turn the chain when the anchor has left
anchor. the bottom.
Anchor of pendura and servitude. Raise anchor.

4. It is the action of lowering the anchor from its place by lowering 22. It is the action of the anchor at the moment of taking off from the
the chain. Lower the anchor. bottom. Set anchor.

5. It is unscrewing or removing the tensioner and loosening the 23. Action of removing the anchor from the bottom, bone, detaching
brake, dismounting and leaving an anchor ready to anchor. the nail or nails from it depending on the anchor in question.
Put the anchor to the pendura. Tear off the anchor.

6. It is the action of taking the anchor to the place where it is to be 24. It is securing the anchor so that it cannot come loose with the
located and giving it a bottom there. most violent movements of the ship.
Set an anchor. Set the anchor for a safe voyage.

7. It is when a ship goes backwards when anchoring or being 25. Action of being anchored.
already anchored, dragging the anchor due to any Stay at anchor.
circumstance.
Garrear. 26. It is the anchor that for centuries has been used to hold the ship
to the bottom and consists of two arms and their corresponding
8. It is when the anchor comes off the bottom and is grabbed nails, joined to the shaft, the joining point is called "cross".
again. Jump anchor. Traditional anchor or with stocks.

9. Bury it entirely at the bottom because it is very soft, like loose 27. In this type of anchor, the cross forms a body with the arms, it
mud. has an opening R where the rod enters, the cross and the rod
Swallow an anchor to the bottom. are joined together.
Anchor Hall.
10. It is raising the anchor to anchor it again, thus ensuring that it is
not swallowed by too much depth. 28. It is widely used on American Navy ships.
Refresh the anchor. Dunn or Norfolk Anchor.

11. It is placing the anchor further to windward in relation to the 29. It has, equal weight, greater ease of grip than other types
prevailing wind or the one most frequently experienced in the without stocks, although more voluminous, it is used only in
place. small vessels.
Tree the anchor. Danforth Anchor.

12. It is placing the anchor in a direction further away than it was 30. It is in the traditional anchor, the sharpest part of the anchor nail.
from the wind, tide or current. Parrot or parrot beak.
Lower the anchor.
31. Flat surface that limits the nail on its inside.
13. It is when the anchor breaks due to some of its parts or the Map, tab or ear.
chain.
Missing anchor. 32. Shackle of proportionate size by which the anchor is attached to
the chain.
14. Bring the ship closer to the anchor. Arganeo.
Go on the anchor.
33. Hole in the end of the cane where the arganeo plays. Eye.
15. It is turning the vessel while anchored until it is positioned with
the chain working in the desired direction, it is the same as 34. Anchor currently in disuse that had a metal but removable clamp
approaching. in order to be able to stow it better.
Do for the anchor. Admiralty anchor.

16. It is resisting a storm at anchor. 35. In this type of anchor, while the clamp has been eliminated, it is
Hold the anchor. manufactured in such a way that the arms can swing to both
sides. Anchor without stocks.
17. It is when the anchors or their moorings are missing and remain
on the bottom without being marked.
Lose anchors.

18. Halt the ship when it is sinking from the anchor or with very little
chain outside the hawse.
13 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
36. It is a small steel anchor, provided with four arms ending in nails
similar to those of anchors, it is used to anchor small boats.
Grapnel.
37. What is the name of the iron device similar to the grapnel, which
has hooks instead of nails, it is used to track, that is, to drag it 54. To join the chain to the anchor or to the surface of the boat, a
along the bottom in order to recover an object that has been
lost.
Grappling.
38. It is a lightweight anchor used for light work and is normally
stowed on deck.
Kedge.
39. It is a cast iron or concrete block, in the shape of a spherical
culotte, provided at its base with a strong eyebolt where the
chain is shackled.
Mushroom anchor or submerger.
40. What anchor is used to hold the dead, they have only one arm
so that it does not protrude from the bottom.
Firm mooring anchor.
41. They are the anchors that are used in normal times for
anchoring, generally taking one on each tack housed directly in
the hawse.
Bower.
42. What is the name of the additional anchor that is used in case of
need and even in case the cam anchor is lost.
Anchor of respect.
43. It is an anchor that goes to the stern, with a chain or cable, it is
usually carried by some special vessels, such as landing
vessels, which anchor it before beaching and then help them
when they get out of the beach. Anchor or elbow anchor.
44. They are called the relationship between the maximum
horizontal grip force and the weight of an anchor.
Anchor performance or efficiency.
45. They are composed of links with concrete, cast steel. Chains.
46. They are used to link the chain strands to each other, to the
anchor and to the surface of the boat.
Joint shackle.
47. It is inserted between the chain and the anchor to prevent the
chain from twisting when anchoring the vessel.
Rotating branch.
48. Shackle that is hardly used today that consists of a four-leg
swivel and is intended to prevent the chains from twisting
around each other at the terminals when the two anchors are
anchored.
Swivel shackle.
49. When it comes to anchor grip strength, it is the best bottom for
anchoring.
Sand.
50. When it comes to anchor grip strength, it is the bottom that
follows sand as the second best.
Mud.
51. It is the worst type of bottom because the anchor slides on it
without grabbing it and when it finally does, there is a risk of it
becoming castled.
Rocky.
52. It is the number of fathoms in which a chain branch comes from
the factory, which is commonly called a shackle.
By: AEGV
15 fathoms.
53. How many meters are equivalent to 15 fathoms, a shackle.
27 meters.
typical shackle is used to tie the anchor (Join the chain with the
anchor).
Entanglement grille.
55. It is the place on board where the chain is stowed below deck.
Chain box.
56. The final end of the chain, which is attached to the deck of the
boat in the chain box by means of a shackle called: Mesh.
57. This is the name given to the hole in the cover that connects the
chain box with the outside so that the chain can pass through it.
Cat flap.
58. It is the steel tube that connects the deck with the bow, so that
the chain passes through it and in turn serves as
accommodation for the anchor during navigation.
Escoben.
59. It is one of the ways to mark the chain.
Turning the ends of some links with wire.
60. It is one of the ways to mark the chain.
Painting the connecting shackles with colors.
61. Chain marking procedure consisting of: the 1st. shackle (15
fathoms) is painted red, the 2nd. white, the 3rd. blue, the 4th.
red again and the cycle is repeated.
Painting the connecting shackles with colors.
62. It is the lifting machine in the maneuvering of vertical axis
anchors. Winches.
63. It is the lifting machine for maneuvering horizontal axis anchors
in the Navy.
Windlasses.
64. It is the lifting machine for maneuvering horizontal axis anchors
in the merchant navy.
Clippers or windlass.
65. Piece that winches usually have instead of the steering wheel,
which is a removable lever to engage and disengage the
bobbin.
Saber.
66. It is a large bitt, which is solidly attached to the deck and is
located tangentially to the line of travel of the chains between
the broom and the cat flap.
Biton.
67. It is an element that serves to hang the chain in order to secure
it and thus prevent it from working on the crown of the swing.
Jaw.
14 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

68. They are used in anchor work, they are chain branches, introduced into the interior of the ship through an opening in the
shackled on one side to the ship's surface and on the other side vault called:
are attached to the anchor chain to lash it. Lime.
Bozas.
6. It prevents water from entering while allowing the rudder to
69. It was an element that was inserted between the winch and the rotate freely.
broom, it had a simple mechanism based on a finger that Cable gland.
allowed the movement of the chain, only in the lifting direction. 7. They are ropes carried by the rudder that connect the blade to
This for. the mirror so that it is not lost in the event of a storm.
Men.
70. It is a small ore rope that connects the boyar to the anchor.
Orinque.
8. It is the horizontal lever to exert force and turn the rudder, it is
71. It serves to mark the anchor, it is an element that has a rope in the steering wheel.
its upper part that links it to the ship, each anchor has its own Cane.
rope.
Boyarin. 9. It is the individual who handles the rod.
Helmsman.
72. It is a bar or iron rod with a handle or crutch to grip them at one
end, its purpose is to transfer the chain from one side to the 10. It is the force that is formed by two vectors and which causes a
other: Hand hook. rotation of the ship in the indicated direction.
Evolution pair.
73. It is a rope that has a hook at one end, it is used for the same
purpose as the hand hook. 11. It is the force that moves the ship towards the side opposite to
Hook rope. that into which the blade entered.
Transverse component.
74. It is an iron lever with hammer ears, it is used to lever the chain
and ensure that it engages well in the windlasses and jaws. 12. It is the Force in the opposite direction to the direction of travel,
Goat foot. resulting in a decrease in the speed of the ship.
Longitudinal force.
75. It is used to release trigger hooks at anchorages.
Sledgehammer.
13. It is the rudder position with the least resistance to travel, in the
76. It is used to insert and remove the bolts from the connecting longitudinal direction.
shackles. Rudder to the track .
Awl.
14. To get the rudder to acquire a certain angle, it is necessary to
77. When lifting, it is advisable to have several of these spare parts overcome a resistance and therefore generate a torque in the
in case they have to be replaced. Respect bolts and lead. opposite direction to the fall of the ship, called: Righting torque.

78. It is a cable of length proportional to the size of
the
installation of anchors, about 20 meters, with a hook at one end
and a loop at the other.
Cable rod.
79. It is used when the anchor is hauled, to introduce it through the
hawse from the inside out and hook the hawse that is presented
on the outside.
Boathook.
80. In the past, winches had lateral slits to be able to insert hangers
or bars for lifting by arm, called: Bocabarras.
15. It is when the axis of rotation is made to coincide with the center
of thrust, the effort necessary to move the rudder will be zero.
Offset rudder.
16. It is the relationship between the righting moment of a
compensated rudder and the same rudder without
compensation.
Compensation relationship.
17. It is the relationship between the two surfaces into which the
blade is divided by the rudder axis.
Degree of compensation.

CHAPTER 12.-RUDDERS AND STEERING APPARATUS. 18. Reducing this effect is achieved by designing the rudder with a
hydrodynamic profile and minimizing the space between the
1. It is the set of actions aimed at driving a ship in a certain blade and the axis of rotation.
direction. Turbulence.
Steering a ship.
19. It occurs due to poor design of the system or because the vessel
2. It is the set of elements used to alter or maintain the course of a is in ballast, a harmful effect is produced when the tiller is
ship. inserted into a band due to the depression produced by the rear
Government apparatus. face, air is absorbed from the atmosphere, reducing the force of
evolution.
3. It is a wooden or metal paddle installed in the stern and rotating
Cavitation.
around a vertical axis, which alters the direction of the boat.
Rudder.

4. Flat surface submerged in water, rounded on the back in order

to reduce friction.
Shovel or saffron.

5. The blade at its upper end ends in a shaft or shaft that is

15 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2
20. Effect that is due to the decrease in pressure on the rear face of
the blade and is a source of rudder erosion.
Rudder operation near the surface.
4. Preparation of the ship to go to sea where the winch or winch,
21. It is made up of the tiller, transmission, the machinery that
moves the rudder and the latter.
Government apparatus.
22. It is the handling of the rudder by manual effort, it is used only in
very small vessels.
Government at hand.
23. In ships of a certain size or speed, it is necessary to insert a new
element (engine) that helps move the rudder, it is called:
Servo system.
24. It is a set of mechanisms that, with the help of a machine, allow
large powers to be moved and controlled by applying a small
amount of energy.
Servomotor.
25. They are the tiller and rudder angle indicators. Axiometers.
26. It is the governance mode where the oil distribution valve can be
controlled directly from the servo, this is done in the event that
the electric transmission from the bridge fails.
Auxiliary or local government.
27. Government mode used when other mechanisms have failed, it
acts by means of a wheel through a multiplier mechanism on
the toothed sector of the rudder. Government at hand.
28. It is necessary to achieve a standard tactical diameter. Standard
shank angle.
29. Expression that indicates the maximum angle that can be
entered without danger of damage to the steering, it is usually
35°, this should never be reached, as a general rule it is
understood that it is 30°.
The whole cane.
30. It is the expression that indicates gradually returning the rudder
to its central position.
Raising the rod.
31. It is putting the rudder in the central position (0°).
To the road.
32. It is to put the rudder to the opposite side and the same angle
that it had.
Change the rod.
33. When the ship falls continuously towards one side due to the
effect of the rudder engaged, the helmsman must do this action
every 10°.
Sing the directions.
CHAPTER 24.- GENERAL RULES FOR NAVIGATION.
1. These are the three groups of preparations that must be made
on board before the ship goes to sea.
Sailor preparations, tests of devices and supplies and
bureaucratic procedures.
2. Type of preparation in which it is necessary to put the ship under
sea conditions, in a position to withstand any kind of weather
without experiencing breakdowns that endanger its safety or
cause significant material damage.
Sailor preparation.
3. In preparation for the ship to go out to sea, it will walk around the
By: AEGV
ship, securing objects that may move and take a reading of the
drafts.
The Boatswain.
machine telegraphs, telephones, the whistle or siren and the
bilge and fire pumps will be tested.
Device testing.
5. Preparation of the ship to go to sea, which refers to the refilling
of fuel, lubricants, drinking and boiler water, replacement of all
kinds of equipment and provisions, as well as all ship and cargo
documents.
Supply and bureaucratic procedure.
6. It is established as soon as the tasks inherent to the port
departure maneuver are finished when the ship is outside the
buoys:
Sea service.
7. Its missions are: to steer, relieve the helmsman if necessary and
monitor the horizon, air and sea surface, notifying the officer on
duty when ships, planes, floating objects or land are sighted.
Helmsman, assistant helmsman and serviola.
8. It is located in the crow's nest, at night it has the obligation to
"sing the lights" when the hours and half hours are indicated, so
that if a situation light goes out it can be known shortly and
turned on again.
Cathead.
9. Before entering the guard, you will find out the direction you are
sailing, which must be written on a blackboard. Helmsman.
10. Among his many obligations, he must ensure compliance with
the Collision Regulations, as he will be responsible for any
accident or damage that occurs if he has not applied said
regulations well.
Guard Officer.
11. In this condition, as a first safety measure, close watertight
doors, in anticipation of an accident, the pace will be moderated
and the regulatory sound signals will be made, increasing the
number of serviolas, the radar must be used. Navigation in Fog.
12. Navigation in low visibility should always be done at: Low speed.
13. During this condition there is greater risk for the ship,
precautions must be increased, greater security, close the
watertight doors, prepare the bilge and firefighting services and
check all the lashings.
Night navigation.
14. It represents a powerful assistant to the navigator, it neutralizes
fog, darkness and unfavorable visibility conditions, with it the
presence of a ship or the coast can be known with great
anticipation.
Utility of Radar.
16 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SAILORING KNOWLEDGE
| MARINE OFFICERS AND CAPTAINS (CORE AND SCALE)
PFAM – 2 0 2 2 By: AEGV

15. It requires skill from the operators, it can be handled by the
officer on duty on the bridge, one of its applications is the
location of icebergs in the presence of fog.
Use of Radar.
16. It produces a good view of the coast and the positions occupied
by ships and buoys. It is capable of spotting the proximity of bad
weather in the form of showers. It is mandatory to carry it on
ships larger than 1600 tons.
Radar.
17. You have the obligation to use the radar and its indications to
know at all times the speed and course of the vessels in sight,
and the minimum distance at which they will pass our vessel.
Guard Officer.
18. In port it must be raised at 8:00 a.m. on the stern of warships
and merchant ships, and lowered at sunset. If there is a ship in
motion between sunrise and 8:00 a.m., all others must raise it.
to the peak as long as the movement lasts.
Use and salute of the national flag.
19. At sea, these ships keep the national flag raised permanently.
Warships.
20. They have the obligation to raise the national flag when entering
and leaving port, meeting one of the same nationality,
encountering a warship in foreign waters and at the request of a
warship.
Merchant Ships.
to the nearest port.
8. Speed at which it must be navigated with water on board, since
the resistance of the water to movement acts on the watertight
bulkheads that are not calculated to withstand such an
enormous effort.
Low speed.
9. Part of the ship that must be exposed after the imminent
collision with another ship when maneuvering inside a port,
since it is where the ship has greater structural solidity.
Bow.
10. Its causes are: trying to anchor on a rough coast, dragging the
anchors, missing the chain, existence of a shoal not located on
the chart and the certainty of the loss of a vessel.
Grounding.
11. It is used to avoid sinking and save the crew, the maneuver
must be studied to facilitate subsequent rescue, the most
convenient place will be chosen to escape from the rock bottom.
Voluntarily beaching on the coast.
12. It will be useless to go back with the machines, because if it was
in stone and there was a tear, the holds and compartments will
be flooded. The first measure is to close the watertight doors,
locate the fault and put the bilge system into service, lower a
boat and probe. the surroundings.
Measures to take after an involuntary stranding.

CHAPTER 25.- ACCIDENTS AT SEA AND
SALVAGES.
1. It is one of the most unfortunate accidents at sea that can occur
to a ship, with serious consequences, it increases if there is bad
weather, it can be caused by fog or closure or having the lights
off or by false maneuver due to breakdown.
The boarding.
13. It is required to be carried on board by the International
Regulations for the Safety of Life at Sea and consists of
pyrotechnic material.
Help Signs.
14. They are carried out frequently due to the many accidents and
accidents at sea, every seaman is obliged to do so even at risk .
Rescues.

2. You must act calmly and calmly, take charge immediately, 15. It is one of the most dangerous maneuvers on board, it is easy
investigate the severity of the damage and make a decision to for confusion, panic and desperation to take over the personnel.
rescue the ship and the crew. Abandonment of Vessel.
Measures after boarding .
16. It establishes a series of precepts intended to ensure rescue
3. In no case should the vessels be separated by going and passengers in the event of an accident, requires that ships
backwards, it is advisable that they continue linked, the first have rescue material and carry out an abandonment exercise
measure is to close watertight doors and once the water leak is once a week.
known, start the bilge service. International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea.
Damage to the hull.

4. It is the first measure to be taken when a collision occurs. If it is TOTAL QUESTIONS: 497
carried out quickly, it can mean the rescue of the ship, a
measure that must be taken in advance when the risk
conditions for the ship increase.
Closing of watertight doors.

5. Action that will be carried out once the water leak is known and
located in the affected compartments, monitoring the water level
and shoring up the bulkheads.
Put the bilge service into operation.

6. Action to be taken in the event that there is little hope of saving

the ship in the event of a collision.
Put on life jackets and get the boats ready.

7. Action that will be carried out when the damage is controlled,

and if there is no possibility of reaching it, it will be necessary to
approach the nearest coast to try to beach it before it sinks. Go

17 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

STUDY GUIDE

TOTAL QUESTIONS: 1,553.

1 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

1.- DAM 1.1.1.- HUMAN RESOURCES .
1. It constitutes the most valuable asset that the Secretariat of the
Navy – Mexican Navy has and the most important to face current
and future challenges.
Human resource.
2. It is responsible for determining and authorizing the organic
payrolls of the Naval Units and Establishments, as well as for
communicating the number of vacancies that must be filled
annually in the Institution.
Administrative Office.
3. System used to control naval personnel, where the general data of
the military personnel are recorded during their stay in the Active
Service of the Mexican Navy.
Mexican Navy Personnel Information System (SIPAM).
4. It is the application of a set of techniques and procedures to recruit
qualified personnel capable of filling a vacancy within the Units
and Establishments.
Obtaining Human Resources.
5. It is the set of activities aimed at obtaining personnel from the
Institution itself to cover the needs of a specific position in a Naval
Unit or Establishment.
Internal Recruitment.
6. It is a technical administrative process that consists of making
individuals from the civil environment candidates to fill a vacancy
within the Institution.
External Recruitment.
7. Process where personnel is selected to enter the SAAM, they will
sign a service provision contract in accordance with the
requirements established in the Recruitment Manual and will
voluntarily register for the duration of their contract. Hiring of
Personnel.
8. He will be the one who carries out the process of recruitment,
selection, recruitment and subsequent hiring of men and women
as cadets and students.
UNINAV Rectorate.
9. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with secondary or high school education, either as a
Marine or from the different services with a maximum age of 30
years at the date of hiring.
Sailor.
10. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with studies at a Professional Technical level with a
degree and professional license. (Maximum age 30 years at the
date of hiring).
Third Master.
11. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with studies at the Technical Professional level with a
Specialty with a degree and professional license. (Maximum age
35 years at the date of hiring).
Second Master.
12. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with studies at the Higher Technical Professional
University level with a degree and professional license. (Maximum
age 35 years at the date of hiring).
First Master.
female) with studies at the Bachelor's level with a degree and
professional license. (Maximum age 35 years at the date of
hiring). Lieutenant of Lieutenant .
14. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with studies at the Specialty or Master's level in order to
obtain professional training with a degree and professional
license. (Maximum age 40 years at the date of hiring).
Frigate Lieutenant.
15. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or
female) with studies at the bachelor's level with a Subspecialty
and/or Doctorate in order to complete their professional training
with a degree and professional license. (Maximum age 40 years
at the date of hiring).
Ship lieutenant.
16. It is the duration of the service provision contracts for the
personnel of the auxiliary militia for officers of the Naval Justice
service.
06 months.
17. It is the duration of service provision contracts for auxiliary militia
personnel for officers who do not (negative) belong to the Naval
Justice service.
01 year.
18. It is the duration of the service provision contracts for the Classes
and Sailors personnel of the auxiliary militia.
06 months.
19. It is the duration of the service provision contracts for Marine
personnel assigned as Security and Support personnel.
03 months.
20. It is the orientation and training process through which new
elements of civil extraction are integrated as military sailors in the
established Training Centers.
Induction to the Environment.
21. It is the legal act celebrated between the Secretary of the Navy
and the personnel of the auxiliary militia, through which the
commitment to continuity in active service and the provision of
services on a voluntary basis is established.
Reengagement.
22. The requirements that personnel in this category must meet are:
Be fit, accredited by a medical certificate, have good military and
civil conduct, have sufficient military and professional aptitude,
and register particular details in the Naval Health System.
Auxiliary Militia.
23. It is characterized by its stability in service and those who belong
to it cannot be removed from their hierarchy, except by an
enforceable sentence of the competent judicial body (Art. 36
LOAM).
Permanent Militia.
24. Process that may be carried out by naval personnel who have
carried out studies on their own, in accordance with their
profession and without prejudice to the service, that are useful for
the Institution, obtaining a degree or diploma and professional
license.
Degree Adequacy.

13. The requirements for this hierarchy are: Personnel (male or

2 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
25. It will be determined according to the existence of vacancies in the
organic payrolls of the Units and Establishments, by Service,
Nucleus, Scale and Hierarchy; as well as, that said studies are
useful to the Institution.
Degree Adequacy.
26. Unit to which the Legal Unit will request an opinion when a career
is not considered in the Catalog of Bodies and Services, due to
the names that each educational institution assigns to the careers
it teaches.
Naval University.
27. Situation of change of Corps, Scale or Service where seniority in
the grade will not be lost.
For service needs.
28. Situation of change of Corps, Scale or Service where you will lose
seniority in your grade, occupying the last place in the
corresponding rank, the new seniority will count from the date of
the change.
By request of the interested party.
29. Situation of change of Body, Scale or Service in accordance with
the first section of article 67 of the LOAM and will be conditional
on the existence of vacancies in the requesting membership.
By proposal of the Naval Command.
30. Situation of change of Corps, Scale or Service that contemplates
application of the academic exam, if the condition was contracted
in acts of service, you will not lose seniority in your grade, if it was
outside, you will lose it, the Naval Health echelon will propose
which service you can change according to your condition.
By medical prescription.
31. It has the power to communicate the appointments of commands
and authorize the movements of operational and service
personnel of the Mexican Navy (Art. 8 Fracc. III. RISM).
Administrative Office.
32. Personnel who may request a change of assignment, as long as
the service is not harmed, there is a vacancy and reasons
justifying it (Art. 42.RGDN).
From Sailor to Navy Lieutenant.
33. Exchange requests may be submitted only by these personnel,
even when there is a difference of one grade between them.
Sea Scale Officers, Classes and Seamanship.
34. It is the act through which the Command promotes the military on
active duty to the next higher rank in the hierarchical order within
the body or service established by the LOAM. by Faculty of the
Supreme Command and by Faculty of the High Command.
Promotion of Personnel.
35. It has the power to promote Vice Admirals, Rear Admirals, Ship
Captains and Frigate Captains, as well as other officers of the
Mexican Navy.
Supreme Command.
36. It has the power to promote officers and lieutenant captains
following agreement with the Supreme Command, as established
in the Promotion Law and other applicable regulatory provisions,
as well as Classes and Seamanship.
High Command.
37. Has the power to promote Classes and Seamanship by agreement
of the High Command, as established in the Promotion Law of the
Mexican Navy and the regulations derived from it. Senior
Command in Chief.
3 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
38. It is the document with legal validity, in which the actions of
Admirals, Captains and Officers are conceptualized, during a
certain period, evaluating the performanceprofessional
and
military-civil conduct, having how to support documents
officers themselves who must appear in the military personnel's
personal file.
Action Sheet.
39. It is the document with legal validity, in which the performance of
the Classes and Seamanship personnel is conceptualized, during
a certain period, its objective is to record biographical data,
service data and notes of their activities.
Service Memorial.
40. It is the act by which the official delivery of the Command of
Weapons or Position in a Naval Unit or Establishment is carried
out, becoming official with the designation of a representative of
the Superiority for the taking of protest (protocol act) and of an
auditor (administrative act). ).
Delivery-Reception of Command of Weapons or Charges.
41. Through the EMGA, a representative will be designated at the
delivery-reception of the Chief Superior Commands for the taking
of protest (protocol act).
High Command.
42. In the delivery-reception of the Chief Superior Commands, he will
act as intervener for the purposes of the administrative act.
Inspector of the corresponding Command.
43. It will function for the taking of protest (protocol act) or will
designate someone for this purpose, upon receiving
communication from the High Command regarding the movement
of the head of a subordinate Unit Command or Establishment.
Senior Command in Chief.
44. It will serve for the purposes of the administrative act in the case of
Superior and Subordinate Commands regarding the movement of
the head of a Unit Command or subordinate Establishment.
Immediate Superior Command Inspector.
45. He will be responsible for ensuring that the administrative act is
carried out in accordance with the official standards established
for this purpose and will inform the Naval Command that
designated him of the developments that have arisen during the
aforementioned act.
Controller.
46. Once the delivery-reception of the Naval Weapons Command or
Position has been carried out, it will inform the High Command,
via radiogram, of the date and time in which said act was carried
out, rank, name of the person who intervened and news.
Command that appointed the Comptroller.
47. He is designated by the corresponding Naval Command as
intervener for the delivery-reception as an administrative act of the
Naval Flotilla Commands.
Command Inspector.
48. It is the document that shows all the personnel assigned to a Unit
or Establishment and is used to know both the state of force with
the rank and name, with the heads of the Naval Units and
Dependencies being responsible for its timely formulation.
Nominal Relationship.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
49. It is the separation from the Active Service of the AM, in
accordance with the provisions of articles 85 of the LOAM. and 24
of the ISSFAM Law, and can be given by: withdrawal or
withdrawal.
Low.
50. By death, sentence enforceable by the Justice Body, being
fugitives from the justice of the Permanent Militia, missing 3 days
consecutively and by resolution of a Disciplinary Body in the case
of personnel of the Auxiliary Militia.
Circumstances that motivate the Discharge.
51. For absence of more than 2 months verified by official parties, at
the request of the interested party that is considered appropriate,
personnel of the Auxiliary Militia due to inability to fulfill their
obligations such as: being in criminal proceedings and suffering
from an illness contracted in acts unrelated to the service.
Dismissed by agreement of the High Command.
52. At the request of the interested party, misconduct determined by
the CH, not being able to fulfill their military obligations,
termination of contract and their services not being necessary,
detecting facts of falsehood in their statements or personal
documentation and beneficiaries.
Dismissal by agreement of the Chief Superior Commands and
Higher Commands.
53. It will not be granted at the request of the interested party when
the country is in a state of emergency or due to service needs.
Circumstances to deny the Discharge.
2.- DAM 1.3.1.3.5.- FIRE FIGHTING FOR
NAVAL ESTABLISHMENTS .
1. This is the name given to any substance that has the ability to set
another on fire, facilitating combustion and preventing fire fighting:
Oxygen, Potassium Nitrate, Hydrogen Peroxide, etc., normally it is
air that contains approximately 21% oxygen.
Oxidant.
2. It is any material that is susceptible to burning when mixed with an
oxidizer when subjected to a heat source.
Fuel.
3. It is the rapid oxidation of combustible materials with a strong
release of energy in the form of light and heat.
Fire.
4. It is the fire that develops without control in time and space. Fire.
5. Process in which one or more substances (reagents) are
transformed into other different substances (reaction products).
Chemical reaction.
6. Process of rapid oxidation of a substance accompanied by an
increase in heat and often light.
Combustion.
7. They are those liquids that have a flash point below 38°C (100°F)
and a vapor pressure that does not exceed 40 psi at 38°C.
Flammable liquids.
8. They are those liquids with a flash point equal to or greater than 38
°C.
Combustible Liquids.
9. Avoiding the accumulation of garbage and waste, avoiding oil or
liquid spills, not storing flammable materials, and keeping
machinery and tools tidy and clean are some examples of:
Recommendations for fire prevention.
4 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
10. The lack of strict adherence to the procedures to carry out the
maintenance of the different systems of the propulsion machinery,
and the lack of order and cleanliness in the compartments
intended for thestorage of substances flammable and
fuels.
Causes of fires on board.
11. Knowing the combustible materials, locating them in their initial
phase, suppressing the fire, confining the necessary prevention
and personnel inspections, are some examples of:
Safety measures to prevent fires.
12. It represents the essential elements for combustion to occur; all
three sides of the triangle must be present for and fight fire, carry
a fuel to start burning. Fire triangle. out familiarization
of the
13. It is any substance or matter that can burn
within a gas, said substance can be in a liquid, solid or gaseous
state, an example of this is gasoline, paper and acetylene. Fuel.
14. It is the gaseous agent capable of allowing the development of
combustion, the main one is the oxygen that is present in the
atmosphere, the environment has 21% oxygen, with at least 16%
of this being necessary to start a fire.
Oxidant or oxidizing agent.
15. It is the temperature or degree of heat that a substance or material
must acquire for its ignition and consequently combustion to take
place.
Heat.
16. It replaced the theory of the fire triangle, since it only told us the
elements necessary for the combustion reaction to begin.
However, it was discovered that for said combustion to be
maintained and the flame to be produced, a fourth element is
necessary, the chain reaction.
Fire Tetrahedron.
17. From this theory arises the tetrahedron of fire, the reason for using
a tetrahedron and not a square is that each of its four elements is
directly adjacent and in connection with each of the other
elements.
Chain reaction.
18. Combustible materials are found in nature in solid, liquid and
gaseous states; Solid and liquid combustible materials are
converted to vapors or gases before combustion.
Physicochemical properties of fuels.
19. It is the minimum temperature at which a combustible or
flammable material begins to give off vapors without these being
sufficient to sustain combustion; it allows the fuel vapors to reach
their upper and lower explosive limits.
Flash point or temperature.
20. It is the relationship between the weight of a solid or liquid
substance with respect to water.
Specific weight.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
21. It is the relationship between the weight of fuel vapor and the
weight of air.
Specific Vapor Density.
22. Indicates the tendency of one gas or vapor to disperse into
another or mix with another gas or vapor.
Degree of Diffusion.
23. It is the tendency of a liquid to evaporate; liquids such as alcohol
and gasoline, due to their known tendency to evaporate quickly,
are called volatile liquids.
Volatility.
24. They are the maximum and minimum limits of the concentration of
a fuel within an oxidizing medium, so that the flame, once started,
continues to spread at the specified pressure and temperature.
Flammability Limits.
25. It is defined as the maximum concentration of gas or vapor (% by
volume in air) that ignites if an ignition source is present at room
temperature.
Upper Flammability Limit.
26. It is defined as the minimum concentration of flammable gas or
vapor (% by volume in air) that ignites if an ignition source is
present at room temperature.
Lower Flammability Limit.
27. It refers to those mixture proportions of air with some combustible
substance between which inflammation can occur; For
combustion to occur, there must be a mixture of fuel vapor and air
in adequate proportions.
Flammability Range.
28. It is the minimum temperature at which a combustible material
releases enough vapor to initiate and sustain combustion; it is the
minimum temperature required for the vapor of a fuel to catch fire.
Ignition Temperature.
29. It is the critical temperature at which solid bodies become liquids.
Melting point.
30. It is the temperature at which the continuous flow of vapor bubbles
of a liquid that is being heated in an open container occurs; That
is, the temperature at which the vapor tension of a liquid is equal
to the external pressure exerted on it.
Boiling point.
31. It is the transfer of energy from one part of a body to another, or
between different bodies in virtue of a difference of
temperature, it is energy in transit and always flows from an area
of higher temperature to an area of lower temperature.
Heat.
32. It is the property of a body that determines whether or not it is in
thermal equilibrium.
Temperature.
33. It occurs in burners, boiler hearths and in torches of oxyfuel cutting
equipment.
Open Flame.
34. They are generated in electrical panels, contacts, switches,
electric welding arcs and in loose wiring terminals.
Electric Sparks.
35. It is the chemical reaction, fast or slow, that materials undergo
independently of any external heat source. Spontaneous
combustion.
5 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
36. These can generate sparks with enough energy to start
combustion. These types of sparks are produced when hitting or
rubbing metals when striking tools are used. Friction or Impact.
37. Electrical circuits are exposed to the flow of current according to
the gauge of the cable, which when overloaded tends to heat up
and its protective sheath can catch fire.
Electric current.
38. It is generated by the flow of liquids and gases through pipes and
equipment, it is accumulates and when
are landed produce
electrical discharges that generate sparks of up to 350 °C, which
is why all equipment must be grounded. Static electricity.
39. Colorless and odorless non-flammable gas that promotes and
accelerates combustion; important element of the fire triangle
without which there is no combustion.
The Oxigen.
40. At atmospheric pressure the atmosphere contains ___% nitrogen,
___% oxygen and ___% other gases.
78%, 21% and 1%.
41. Fire that is produced with common solid combustible materials
such as wood, paper, textiles, rubbers and thermostable plastics,
its main extinguishing agent is water.
A class".
42. Fire produced by the mixture of a gas such as butane or propane
with air, as well as the vapors of flammable and/or combustible
liquids, greases and thermoplastic plastics. Its extinguishing agent
is: foams, water clouds, halogenated agents, carbon dioxide and
dry chemicals.
Class B".
43. Fire that occurs in electrical installations, engines, etc.; require an
extinguishing substance that is not electrically conductive; Its main
extinguishing agent is dry chemical powder, carbon dioxide and
vaporizing liquids.
Class “C”.
44. Fire that occurs in relative metals, that is, those that have a
relatively low melting temperature, such as Magnesium, Sodium,
Potassium, Zirconium, Titanium. The most recommended
extinguishing agents are MET LX (sodium chloride) and LITH-X.
Class “D”.
45. Fire that is produced with vegetable oils, fats, filth, etc. commonly
found in industrial kitchens; Its main extinguishing agent is wet
potassium, carbon dioxide and chemical powders.
Class “K”.
46. Fuels that burn from the outside in, leaving carbonaceous residues
in the form of embers that only require 4% oxygen to continue
burning. In these fuels, pyrolysis in a vertical position will be faster
than in a horizontal position.
Solid Fuels.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
47. Fuels where the gas existing on the surface is what burns, do not
have a specific shape and only require 16% of oxygen contained
in the air to burn.
Liquid fuels.
48. The gases contained in sealed containers go from liquid to
gaseous when escaping into the environment, they burn in a
similar way to the gases found on the surface of liquid fuels,
however, they are much more dangerous since they expand
quickly and widely.
Gaseous fuels.
49. It occurs when a fuel undergoes changes from a solid or liquid
state to a gaseous state due to heating or due to its specific
properties. In solid fuels this change of state occurs through
pyrolysis.
Combustion Process.
50. These are that the fuel is in the form of a gas and that a mixture of
the fuel gases with an oxidant (air - oxygen) is produced.
Conditions for Combustion to exist.
51. They are smoke, flame, heat and gases.
Products of Combustion.
52. It is composed of solid and liquid particles suspended in the
environment, whose size ranges between 0.005 and 0.01
millimeters; It has irritating effects on the mucous membranes that
cause tearing of the eyes and difficulty in vision.
Smoke.
53. It is defined as the incandescent gas whose temperature varies
depending on factors such as the type of fuel and the
concentration of the oxidizer.
Calls.
54. It is a form of energy whose intensity is very difficult to measure
directly.
Heat.
55. They are part of all combustion, their quantity depends on the
materials, they can be toxic and cause physical disability, loss of
coordination, disorientation, poisoning and death, they constitute
80% of the victims of a fire, they are divided into asphyxiating,
irritating and toxic .
Gases.
56. Body temperature resulting from the heat of a fire where there is a
danger of fainting, fainting or thermal shock.
38º C.
57. Body temperature resulting from the heat of a fire where there is
loss of balance and thermal equilibrium.
43º C.
58. Body temperature resulting from the heat of a fire where there is 3
to 5 hours of life tolerance.
49º C.
59. Body temperature resulting from the heat of a fire where there is a
life tolerance time of less than 4 hours, hyperthermia and
peripheral vascular collapse.
54º C.
60. Oxygen concentration in the atmosphere considered a normal
level, there is an absence of effects on the human organism. 21%.
61. Oxygen concentration in the atmosphere with low respiratory
volume causes decreased muscle coordination and considerable
6 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
effort to think.
17%.
62. Concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere that causes
interruption of breathing, fainting, dizziness, increased heart rate
and loss of muscle coordination. 12%.
63. Concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere that causes nausea,
vomiting and paralysis.
10 - 12%.
64. Oxygen concentration in the atmosphere where the Collapse
occurs.
6 - 8%.
65. Oxygen concentration in the atmosphere where death occurs in 6
to 8 minutes.
Less than 6%.
66. The gas responsible for most deaths in fires, producing poisoning,
is more toxic than any other product of combustion, is colorless,
odorless and tasteless and is present in all types of fire.
Carbon Monoxide (CO).
67. Gas that is released from organic fuels in ventilated environments
is asphyxiating; fireproof, odorless and colorless, fire that occurs
outdoors in general has higher concentrations of this gas.
Carbon Dioxide (CO 2 ).
68. It is the result of the combustion of substances that contain
nitrogen: nylon, plastics and natural fibers, rubber, paper, etc.; It is
a colorless gas with a weak odor similar to that of bitter almonds.
The symptoms when inhaled are interference with respiration at
the level of cells and tissues.
Hydrogen Cyanide (CHN).
69. Better known as Phosgene, it is produced by the contact of flames
on chlorinated materials such as PVC, electrical installation cables
and refrigerant materials. It is a very toxic, colorless, tasteless gas
with a smell similar to wet hay.
Carbonyl Chloride (COCL 2 ).
70. Product of the incomplete combustion of organic materials with
sulfur, such as rubber, tires and wool, it is found in sewers and
organic waste treatment plants; It is a colorless gas with a strong
odor similar to decomposing eggs.
Hydrogen Sulfide (SH 2 ).
71. It is produced by the complete oxidation of organic materials with
sulfur, it is immediately noticeable as it irritates the eyes and the
respiratory system; It is a colorless gas that when combined with
the humidity of the respiratory tract becomes corrosive.
Sulfur Anhydride (SO 2 ).
72. It is released when fuels containing nitrogen such as: wool, silk,
and some polymers; in
High concentrations irritate the throat, inflame the lungs, damage
the respiratory tract and eyes, and can cause pulmonary edema
or death.
Ammonia (NH 3 ).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

73. It appears in the combustion of cellulose nitrate, ammonium nitrate Extinguisher.

and when nitric acid comes into contact with other materials such
as wood and some metals, reddish brown and highly toxic. 86. It is the material contained inside the fire extinguisher.
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO 2 ). Extinguisher.

74. It is produced with the combustion of petroleum products such as
lubricating oils, greases, and asphalt. It can appear in fires of
common materials such as wood and paper. It is highly toxic and
deadly.
Acrolein (C 3 H 4 O).
87. It is the extinguishing agent most commonly used to extinguish
fires and is used in its dry state as a propellant for other dry
powder, water and foam extinguishing agents.
Carbon Dioxide (CO 2) .

75. Fire extinguishing method that is based on the removal of heat to
prevent further combustion. An agent that absorbs a large amount
of heat and cools very efficiently is water, which when properly
applied is very useful. Cooling.
76. Fire extinguishing method that is used when the percentage of
oxygen contained in the atmosphere where the fire develops is
eliminated or considerably reduced, it will go out; it is also
achieved by throwing earth or sand.
suffocation
77. Fire extinguishing method that consists of removing fuel from a
fire, which is not always feasible, since sometimes it is a difficult,
time-consuming and dangerous task, but in other cases it is as
simple as closing a valve.
Fuel Disposal.
78. Fire extinguishing method that consists of interrupting the
transmission of heat from one fuel particle to another by
interposing catalyst elements between them. Interruption of the
Chain Reaction.
79. In this phase of the fire, the air contains a large amount of oxygen
and the fire is producing Water Vapor (H 2 O), Carbon Dioxide
(CO 2 ), Carbon Monoxide (CO), small amounts of Sulfur Dioxide.
(SO 2 ) as well as other gases.
88. It is sometimes used to replace dry CO 2 as a propellant for
powder, water, foam and halon extinguishers.
Nitrogen.
89. Agent only used to pressurize water extinguishers. Air.
90. They are steel cylinders designed to support and contain CO 2 at
high pressure and discharge it through flexible pipes and hoses
when the discharge valve is opened. Some are portable with small
hoses and plastic proportioners that are used to spray the CO 2 .
Carbon Dioxide or CO 2 Extinguishers.
91. Dry powders achieve extinction by breaking the chain reaction of
the burning fuel, they are mainly used to extinguish flammable
liquid fires. Because they are not electrically conductive, they can
also be used against fires where live electrical equipment is
involved. Dry Chemical Powder Extinguishers or PQS.
92. Normal review period for fire extinguishers. monthly.
93. Distance to the fire at which it must be placed when using PQS
extinguishers directing the nozzle at the base of the fire.
5 - 7 m.
94. Distance to the fire at which it should be placed when using CO 2

Incipient phase.
80. In this phase of the fire, oxygen-rich air is pushed toward the flame
and as the hot gases expand laterally from the ceiling to the deck,
forcing the colder air toward the bottom of the compartment,
facilitating the ignition of combustible materials.
Free phase.
81. It is the third phase of a fire in which the flame ceases to exist if
the compartment is closed, from this moment on the combustion
is reduced to incandescent embers. latent phase.
extinguishers, directing the nozzle at the base of the fire.
3 - 5m.
3.- DAM 1.10.- TRAINING OF THE AM
1. Considers the preparation and evaluation of personnel, demands
professionalism, responsibility, dedication and effort in order to
train and prepare personnel, to achieve the knowledge and
instruction necessary to efficiently and effectively fulfill the
missions.
Training.

82. It occurs between two bodies by contact between them or, in the 2. Training level that will be given to new personnel, they will be
case of a single body, within itself; Although it occurs in liquid and provided with basic knowledge of naval doctrine, they will develop
gaseous materials, it is in solids where it is most clearly seen. skills by instilling in them values that allow their adaptation to
Driving. military life.
Level l.- Basic Individual.
83. It is the predominant heat transfer mechanism that produces the
horizontal spread of fires. Wave movements (electromagnetic
waves) propagate in all directions.
Radiation.

84. It is the heat transfer that is produced by the mixture of a liquid

fluid or gas, with another of lower temperature, there must be fluid
movement, it does not occur in solids.
Convection.

85. It is a device composed of a cylindrical metal container that

contains the extinguishing agent, which can be: dry chemical
powder, liquid or gas, which is expelled under pressure in order to
extinguish or suppress the fire.

7 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
3. Level of Training that is carried out in order to prepare and 9.
train the element to perform tasks with a specific function within the
institution, depending on its hierarchy, body, service and specialty.
Level ll. - Individual Specialized.
4. Training level that aims to ensure that all component parts are
integrated as a single unit, under collective work, will depend on
discipline, cohesion, teamwork and esprit de corps.
Level III. - Basic Unit.
5. Level of Training that will be carried out between Units of a Naval
Force or Command which will include ships, aircraft, battalions or
special forces teams and operate as a Task Group.
Level IV.- Advanced Unit.
6. Level of Training that is carried out when different Units (Ships,
aircraft, battalions or special forces teams) are integrated as a
Task Force to act together with the Army, Air Force and
multinational exercises. Level V.- Group tactician .
4.- DAM 1.3.- NAVAL OPERATIONS.
(FIRST PART)
1. How does Mexico conceive a state of war?
A condition of armed confrontation between two countries.
2. Given the possibility of a threat occurring, it is essential to have
these types of plans, updated, feasible and applicable. Defense
Plans.
3. Its main mission is the maritime defense of the national territory and
preservation of sovereignty in the national seas.
Navy of mexico.
4. In a war situation, its obligation is to prepare to guarantee free
transit through the Mexican seas and combat the enemy in this
environment, as well as on Mexican coasts and islands; and when
required, support with its means the actions of the Mexican Army
and Air Force in the continental territory. Navy of mexico.
5. Military territorial division in time of war that covers all political, civil
and commercial activities that contribute to the war effort inside
and outside the country. Federal powers will continue to operate in
this area and it remains under the direct command of the
President of the Republic.
Interior Zone (ZI).
6. Military territorial division in time of war that covers all military, naval and air
operations.
Zone of Operations (ZO).
7. Military territorial division in time of war that is the limit between the
two large zones into which Mexico is divided. Demarcation Line
(LD).
8. Military territorial division in time of war that, in turn, is divided into
as many Theaters of Operations as necessary, for the Mexican
Navy it is considered: Gulf of Mexico Theater and the Pacific
Ocean Theater. Zone of Operations (ZO).
8 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
Style of War that seeks victory by causing the enemy the loss of
personnel and material until he surrenders and psychological
destruction through the destruction of his entire arsenal until he
has no means to continue his campaign.
War of Attrition.
10. War style that seeks to attack the enemy system to
systematically incapacitate it; That is, some enemy components
may remain intact, but they will not be able to function as part of a
cohesive whole.
Maneuver War.
11. Type of War that uses the regular forces of a country; that
is, to the regular units of its land, air and naval armed forces.
Regular War.
12. Type of War that uses the use of guerrillas in support of the
operations of regular forces, when they are dispersed due to the
superiority of the adversary.
Irregular War.
13. Level of conduct of war, which is the highest level, its
activities focus directly on the objectives of the nation's policy,
exercised by the President of the Republic.
Strategic Level .
14. Level of war conduct that is the link between the Strategic
and Tactical Level, some define it as “The Art and Science of
winning campaigns”, it is applied by the Theater of Operations
Commands in times of war, and in times of war. Peace is
exercised by the Commanders of Forces and Regions.
Operational Level.
15. Level of conducting war that is the lowest level, some define
it as “The Art and Science of winning combats or confrontations
and battles” and is understood as the concepts and methods to
achieve a mission.
Tactical Level.
16. It focuses all elements of national power to achieve the
nation's political objectives.
National Strategy.
17. It is subordinated to the National Strategy, applying military
force to achieve the political objectives of the nation. Military
Strategy.
18. Principle of War where every successful military operation
must be directed towards an achievable, decisive and defined
objective. The ultimate goal of war is to defeat enemy forces and
their will to fight.
Unity of Objective and Continuity in Action.
19. Principle of War, which is the decisive form of combat and is
necessary to capture, retain and exploit initiative and freedom of
action, allows the commander to exploit enemy vulnerabilities,
impose his will and determine the course of battle. Offensive
Action.
20. Principle of War that means concentrating the effects of
combat power in the decisive place and moment to obtain
decisive results, includes combat fires and support services,
requires a strict decision to economize and use what each
objective requires, avoiding excesses .
Concentration and Economy of Force.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
21. Principle of War that is applied to place the enemy in a
disadvantageous position through the flexible application of
combat power, involves the movement of forces to achieve a
position of advantage with respect to the enemy.
Maneuver.
22. Principle of War, which are all those measures to avoid surprise,
ensure freedom of action and deny the enemy information about
our forces, capabilities and plans, is essential to preserve combat
power.
Security.
23. Principle of War that applies to plans and orders, they must be as
simple and direct as the situation dictates, reducing the risk of
misunderstanding and confusion.
Simplicity.
24. Principle of War that ensures unity of effort for each objective,
through the designation of a single commander responsible for
directing and coordinating the efforts of all forces.
Command Unit.
25. Principle of War that consists of articulating, in time and space, all
the particular actions of the executing agencies that make up the
action of the whole, it is the responsibility of the commanders and
is achieved by informing each element what they should know
about the situation.
Coordination and Cooperation.
26. Principle of War which means foreseeing the means to adapt to
new situations, foreseeing situations and anticipating
uncertainties. The commander must be prepared to modify his
plan and redirect his effort.
Flexibility.
27. Principle of War, which is to attack the enemy in the place,
moment or in the way in which the enemy least expects it and is
not prepared for it, the influencing factors are speed, use of
unexpected forces, intelligence, night and time. deception.
Surprise.
28. Who is responsible for military decisions of a national nature.
Republic President.
29. He is in charge of advising on defense issues, the purpose of
which is to provide the President of the Republic with balanced,
coordinated and constant information on military affairs, taking
into account the political, economic and military considerations of
the moment.
Security cabinet.
30. Through the Chief of the General Staff, prepares the plans of the
AM and the Senior Commanders in Chief prepare the operations
plans that will support the basic plan or the emergency plans as
appropriate.
Secretary of the Navy.
31. It is described as the commander's personal expression of the
purpose of the operation, it must be clear, concise and easy to
understand.
Command Intent.
32. They are those characteristics, capabilities or locations from which
a military force derives its freedom of action, its psychological
strength or its will to fight, it may be an intangible characteristic
9 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
By: AEGV
such as morale and determination.
Gravity center.
33. They are those that allow the destruction of a capability without
which the enemy will not be able to function effectively, they
provide a point of aim for the application of one's own strengths.
Critical Vulnerabilities.
34. It is the control exercised by a command of all the
operational/tactical units in its area of responsibility for the
development of operations, in time of war it is exercised by the
Commanders of the Theater of Operations.
Operational control.
35. It is the command authority over the assigned commands or
forces, for the direction and control of movements and maneuvers
to achieve a task or mission.
Tactical Control.
36. It is the control exercised by a command for administrative and
logistical purposes.
Administrative control.
37. They are those in which, without direct subordination, one
command supports another command with its forces. This is
common in cases where two or more managers of the same level
are involved in the same operation.
Command Relations.
38. Provides what type of support is required, when and where,
maintaining mission control.
Supported command.
39. Provides its means to another command, as long as it has been
ordered or authorized by the Higher Echelon of both, the type of
support can be: general, direct, mutual or close.
Command in support.
40. It is the means by which the commander realizes what needs to be
done, and checks that the appropriate actions are being taken.
Command and Control (C2).
41. It is the authority that a commander exercises by law over his
subordinates, whether by rank or position. It involves the authority
and responsibility for the effective use of the media.
The Command.
42. It can be centralized or decentralized. The ability to command and
control an organization improves when the commander
decentralizes decision-making authority as much as the situation
allows.
The control.
43. It consists of organizing its components by assigning a specific
role to each one, it is achieved by assigning forces into: main
effort, support efforts and reserves.
Distribution of forces.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
44. It is the synchronized or simultaneous application of several
weapons: Infantry, Armor, Artillery, Fixed Wing and Mobile Wing
Aviation, Naval Fire Support, Anti-Aircraft Defense and Combat
Engineers to achieve a much greater effect on the enemy than
what would be achieved if each weapon will be used in sequence
against the enemy.
Combined Arms.
45. It is that activity or operation that is vital to achieving the general
objective of the force. The EP has priority for fire and logistics
support.
The Main Effort (PE).
46. They are all those activities or operations that contribute to
achieving the objective of the main effort.
Support Efforts (EA).
47. It is the ace up the commander's sleeve. It is that part of the force
that is deliberately left so that at a certain moment it supports the
EP or one of the EA's, being used in the decisive place and
moment.
The reserve.
48. It corresponds to the President of the Republic and has the
responsibility of leading the Nation's war effort and has the power
to order and create a Joint Chiefs of Staff that centralizes the
Nation's military strategic planning.
The Supreme Command.
49. It corresponds to the Secretary of the Navy under the command of
the President of the Republic and may be appointed to direct the
Joint Chiefs of Staff or as Deputy Chief, delegating the function to
the Undersecretary of the Navy.
The High Command.
50. It may be created when ordered by the Supreme Command and
will be the Coordinating Body of military actions at the strategic
level. It will be integrated with the General Staff of the Army, Navy
and Air Force.
The Joint Chiefs of Staff of the Nation.
51. It will be part of the Joint Chiefs of Staff and will be directed by the
JEMGA, it will act under the orders of the President of the
Republic, through the Chief of the Joint Chiefs of Staff and will be
the conduit to deliver orders to the Naval Commands.
The General Staff of the Mexican Navy.
52. They will be activated according to strategic needs, the President
will designate the area that includes each Theater of Operations
and its Commander, they are responsible for conducting the
Operational Level of the War.
The Theater of Operations Commands.
53. It is the organization of the operational units of the Mexican Navy.
Small units, large elementary units and large superior units.
54. They are considered Small Units within the Organization of
Operational Units of the Mexican Navy.
Flotillas, Divisional IM Brigades, Air-Naval Groups and all those
units lower than these.
55. They are considered Large Elemental Units within the
Organization of Operational Units of the Mexican Navy.
Fleets, the Naval Air Wings, the Amphibious Brigades and the
Marine Infantry Divisions.
56. They are considered Large Superior Units within the Organization
of Operational Units of the Mexican Navy.
The Naval Forces, the Marine Corps, the Naval Aviation Corps
10
By: AEGV
and the Navy.
57. It is a warship that constitutes the basic naval unit of a Ship
Squadron, it has the distinctive features that distinguish it as a
member of the Mexican Navy, and whose functions will be
according to its type.
Vessel.
58. Administrative or tactical organization consisting of 2 or more
vessels that have the same characteristics or perform the same
functions. It constitutes a maneuver or support element that is part
of a Flotilla.
Ship Squadron.
59. Naval unit that is part of a Fleet, which is made up of 2 or more
Ship Squadrons of the same type.
Flotilla.
60. Large elemental naval unit that is a member of a Naval Force,
which is made up of 2 or more Ship Flotillas, as well as naval
aviation units and Marine Infantry troops that are necessary to
fulfill its mission.
Fleet.
61. Large superior naval unit of the Mexican Navy, which is made up
of 2 or more Fleets or a combination of these with other large
elementary aero-naval and Marine Infantry units (Air-Naval Wing
and IM Division).
Naval Force.
62. In the Marine Corps, it is defined as the minimum administrative
unit and the basic combat or service element, it is made up of 2 or
more sections, under the same command.
Company / Battery.
63. It is defined as the set of pieces arranged to operate together, they
are made up of 4 or 6 pieces of artillery.
Artillery Batteries.
64. It is considered the fundamental unit of the battlefield and is
defined as the basic tactical maneuver or support unit of a Marine
Infantry Brigade.
Battalion.
65. It is a small regimental-type unit at the “Divisional Brigade” level
composed of 2 or more Marine Infantry Battalions under the same
Headquarters (Command and Command Group).
IM Brigade (BRIGIM).
66. It is a large elemental unit of the Independent Brigade type that
groups together under the same Headquarters (Command and
General Staff) a nucleus of 2 to 4 Marine Infantry Battalions.
IM Amphibious Brigade (BRIGAIM).
67. It is the large elemental unit that groups together under the same
Headquarters (Command and General Staff) a nucleus of 2 or
more Marine Infantry Brigades (BRIGIM's).
Division.
68. It is the large superior unit composed of 2 or more large
elementary units (Divisions or Amphibious Brigades of IM) plus
reserves of the National Military Service (SMN), it is constituted to
materialize the land and amphibious effort of the Mexican Navy at
the national level.
Marine Corps.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
69. It is any vehicle that can stay in the air with or
without engines (gliding).
Aircraft.
70. Air unit composed of 2 or more aircraft.
Air squadron.
71. Subdivision air unit of an Air Group. It is the basic
administrative air unit that integrates a command,
command group and three or four squadrons
made up of 2, 3 or 4 aircraft. Squadron.
72. Subdivision air unit of an Air Wing, made up of 2 or
more Squadrons under a single command, for
administrative and tactical control of operations.
Cluster.
73. Large air elemental unit consisting of 2 or more
Groups under a single command.
To the.
74. It is the large superior unit composed of 2 or more
Wings. Naval Aviation Corps.
75. It is the temporary organization that the Mexican
Navy uses to carry out combat operations. The
size and integration will depend on the mission to
be fulfilled, and can be small to a higher level.
The Task Force (FT).
76. It is the Command and Control Element of the FT,
where the Commander of the Task Force resides,
assisted by his General Staff in his triple task of
conceiving, preparing and conducting the
operations of the Force.
THE Command and General Staff of the FT.
77. It is the Maritime Combat Component whose task
is to carry out all those missions that have the sea
as a battlefield.
THE Surface Task Group.
78. It is the Ground Combat Component whose main
task is the capture, neutralization or destruction of
all those objectives that have a battlefield on land.
THE Ground Task Group.
79. It is the Air Combat Component of the FT whose
main task is to support the other Task Groups with
its air resources. THE Air Task Group.
80. This unit can be designated separately as a Task
Group or as a GTT Task Unit whose main task is
to carry out those operations that, due to certain
peculiarities, have a special character.
Special Operations Component.
81. The military strategy of the Nation will be directed
from this area where the Supreme Command and
its High Command will coordinate all the means at
the disposal of the nation, here the AM will carry
out jointly with the Army and the Air Force, all
those planning and logistics.
Interior Zone.
82. It is where the war effort materializes where the
battles take place. Due to the vastness of the
national territory, the war effort is not considered
on a single front but on all those that the war
requires.
11
By: AEGV
Outside area.
83. It is the geographical area where a campaign is
carried out. The geographical characteristics of
said area determine the preponderance of
operations, whether naval, land or air or a
combination of them.
Theater of Operations.
84. The last time Mexico participated in operations of
this type was during the 2nd. GM, where FAM
Squadron 201 He fought in the Pacific Theater
alongside the American Forces. Today the
Nation's policy does not allow it. Combined
operations.
4.- DAM 1.3.- NAVAL OPERATIONS.
(SECOND PART)
85. It is achieved by destroying or neutralizing enemy
ships, submarines, aircraft or mines, disabling the
enemy CC2 System, destroying its support
structure, capturing islands or choke points and
conducting barrier operations that prevent enemy
mobility.
Control of the Sea.
86. It is achieved through an offensive and maritime
transport capacity that allows the concentration of
combat and logistical power (Naval, Air and Land)
in the decisive place and moment.
The Projection of Force.
87. They are carried out with the purpose of protecting
the lines of communication, denying the enemy the
military and commercial use of the sea, protecting
logistical support to the battle forces deployed on
the front and establishing an Objective Area (AO).
Maritime war operations.
88. It integrates with surface units, provides the FT
commander with CC2, intelligence, Maneuver,
Firepower and Security capabilities, and is the only
element of the AM capable of exercising effective
control of the sea.
The Surface Task Group (GTS).
89. They comprise the evolutions that take place in the
transition from a cruising formation (or cruising
arrangement) to an intermediate phase called
"approach", and then towards and during the battle
itself.
Battle maneuvers.
90. They are those naval operations whose purpose is
to carry out search, patrol, tracking or
reconnaissance. Exploration operations.
91. They are those operations aimed at countering
enemy submarines, they are classified as either
offensive or protective.
Anti-submarine operations.
92. It consists of a systematic survey of a sea area, in
which it is suspected or known that the enemy
planted mines through localization (mines in an
area), identification (kind of mines) and Operation
(mine elimination).
Mine sweeping operations.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE 93. They are
⁃ SPECIFIC those surface operations that have the
KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A purpose of protecting FROM:
a force or denying
NAVY the TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
LIEUTENANT
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. enemy the use of the sea. Defensive maritime
operations.

94. They are tactical maneuvers of warships and

aircraft used to escort a convoy and that are
responsible for its protection.
Escort operations and convoy defense.

12 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
95. They are peripheral arrangements of units whose function is to
protect a main body, they can be used to provide a defense
system around a compact formation or lines of defense against
attack.
Curtain or Barrier Operations.
96. They are operations defined as the strategic and tactical use of
the sea, which includes the preparation, planning and planting of
naval mines by aircraft (offensive), submarines (offensive-
defensive) and ships (defensive).
Mining Operations.
97. They are used in prolonged operations when they need to
resupply a force at sea in a designated area. Logistical
replenishment operations at sea.
98. They are the set of strategic, tactical and technical military actions
aimed at determining, taking advantage of, preventing or
hindering the use of electromagnetic energy by the enemy.
Electronic warfare operations.
99. They include all actions aimed at determining the existence and
location of enemy equipment that radiates electromagnetic energy
and thereby judging and estimating the disposition and threat
potential.
Measures to Support Electronic Warfare (MAGE).
100. It is the division of the GE that brings together all actions aimed at
preventing or making it difficult for the enemy to effectively use
electromagnetic waves.
Electronic Countermeasures (CME).
101. It includes actions whose purpose is to control and guarantee to
one's own forces the effective use of this type of energy, despite
the enemy's use of GE.
Counter-Electronic Countermeasures (CCME).
102. It is the AM force whose function is to conduct all those operations
that have the land battle space, they can integrate the land
component of an Amphibious or Air-Land Task Force.
The Marine Corps.
103. It is made up of IM units, it can provide the FT Commander with
CC2, Intelligence, Maneuver, Firepower and Security Capabilities.
It is the only element of the FT capable of retaining land such as
islands, beaches, ports, etc. The Ground Task Group (GTT).
104. It is made up of three basic elements: The Command and General
Staff (MEM), the Ground Task Group (GTT) and the Aeronaval
Task Group (GTA), it is capable of carrying out inland operations,
in support of Army operations. or on its own for a limited time.
The Air-Ground Task Force (FTAT).
105. Its purpose is to destroy the enemy and his desire to fight, it is
carried out to gain, maintain and exploit the initiative and is the
only means of gaining a decision over the enemy, accompanied
by fire, maneuver and shock action.
Offensive Ground Operations.
106. It is a type of offensive operation conducted to develop the
situation and establish or reestablish contact with the enemy, it
helps the commander understand the battle space, forces are
organized in such a way as to provide flexibility and rapid
exploitation of contact gained.
Movement on contact.
13
By: AEGV
107. It is an offensive operation characterized by a coordinated
movement, supported by fire, conducted to defeat, destroy,
neutralize or capture the enemy, or to capture or secure terrain.
Stroke.
108. It is an offensive operation that usually follows a successful attack
and is designed to deeply disorganize the enemy.
Exploitation.
109. It is an offensive operation designed to capture or stop a hostile
force trying to escape, with the purpose of destroying or capturing
it.
Persecution.
110. It is the movement made to place forces in an advantageous
position with respect to the enemy, approach and defeat him, it is
divided into 6 forms: the frontal attack, the flank attack, the
penetration, the single and double envelopment, the detour
movement and the infiltration.
Offensive maneuver.
111. It is organized into three large areas: deep, close and rear.
Organization of the offensive battle space.
112. Four types of forces normally act in these operations: Security
forces, main body, reserve and support forces.
Organization of the offensive force.
113. They are conducted within the “Single Battle Concept”. The Air-
Ground Task Force (FTAT) conducts these operations in
combination with offensive operations to counter an enemy attack
and defeat the attacker, its characteristics are: preparation,
security, fracture, concentration and mass, flexibility, maneuver
and operations in depth.
Defensive ground operations.
114. Can be carried out at any unit level, a commander can sectorize
his Tactical Area of Responsibility (ATR) and assign said sectors
to his subordinate units. Area Defense (Position Defense).
115. This technique is normally used by company level units and
above.
Sector defense.
116. This technique is normally used in section and company level
units.
Defense in battle position.
117. It is a type of defense that can only be carried out by units of
Division size and larger since it requires the use of a large mobile
reserve (air troops or heliborne troops).
Mobile defense.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE
M AKIN A FROM:
FROM: NAVY
NAVY LIEUTENANT
LIEUTENANT TO:TO: CORVETTE
CORVETTE
CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
118. It is the organization of the defensive battle space.
The Security Area, Main Battle Area and Rear Area.
119. They are considered defensive operations, it is a
movement towards the rear or away from the enemy,
it can be a planned movement or forced by enemy
action.
Retrograde operations.
120. It is a type of planned retrograde operation in which
a force in combat breaks contact with the enemy, the
intention is to put distance between its force and the
enemy as soon as possible and without the enemy
knowing, it can be with or without enemy pressure.
The retreat.
121. It is an operation in which a force that is not in
contact moves away from the enemy, it is protected
by another unit between it and the enemy, however,
the unit must also establish its security.
Retirement.
122. It is a retrograde operation in which a force under
pressure gives up space to gain time, decreasing the
momentum of the enemy attack and inflicting
maximum damage without committing decisively.
The Retardant Action.
123. It is an operation in which a force moves forward or
rearward through the fighting positions of another
force, with the intention of entering or leaving contact
with the enemy.
Passage of lines.
124. It is a point or line on the ground where responsibility
changes from a stationary force to a mobile force or
vice versa.
Battle transfer.
125. It is an operation in which, by order of a Higher
Echelon, all or part of a unit is replaced in an area by
another arriving unit.
Relays in position.
126. Operations that are normally carried out through
breaching operations and river crossing operations.
Obstacle crossing.
127. It is a tactical operation where any of the available
means are employed to break through enemy
defenses, obstacles, minefields or fortifications.
Breach.
128. It is required before ground combat power can be
projected and sustained through a water obstacle.
River crossing operation.
129. It is one carried out to gain freedom of movement or
contact with friendly units.
Breaking the fence.
130. It is the sending of a fraction or detachment that a
larger unit sends to carry out a reconnaissance or
combat mission. Reconnaissance missions are
oriented toward obtaining information, while combat
missions are oriented toward preventing an enemy
attack.
Patrol Operations.
14
CAPTAIN.
By: AEGV
131. It is the AM Force whose function is to conduct all air
operations in support of surface and ground units
and provide exceptional mobility and close fire.
Naval Aviation.
132. It is used to destroy or reduce the enemy's air,
surface, submarine or land threats, as well as
suppress their maritime trade. Additionally, they are
used to gain and maintain air superiority in maritime
environments in order to protect vital areas of the
sea.
Naval Aviation.
133. It is made up of fixed wing and mobile wing units,
can provide the FT Commander with CC2,
Intelligence, Maneuver and Firepower capabilities
and is the only element of the FT capable of
conducting operations in both a maritime and land
environment, with its corresponding airspace.
The Air Task Group (GTA).
134. This air support is classified as Deep, Close,
Transport, Anti-submarine and Electronic Attack.
Offensive Air Support (AAO).
135. It is an aerial action against enemy targets located at
such a distance from friendly forces that it does not
require detailed integration of each mission into
friendly fire and movement.
Deep Air Support (AAP).
136. It is an aerial action carried out by fixed or mobile
wing aircraft against hostile targets that are in the
proximity of friendly forces, which requires close
coordination of each mission with the movement of
friendly forces, in order to guarantee its effectiveness
and avoiding fratricide. Close Air Support (CAC).
137. Provides mobility and logistical support to combat
units. Air Transport Support (AAT).
138. These operations destroy, neutralize or delay enemy
military potential before it can achieve its objectives
against friendly forces.
Air Interdiction.
139. These operations are aimed at searching for and
attacking targets of opportunity in certain areas; they
are carried out in response to targets that are not
known or informed in advance. Armed
Reconnaissance.
140. It is that operation whose requests or missions are
planned in advance to be executed according to a
plan, they can be scheduled or upon request.
Pre-planned Close Air Support.
141. They are those that are executed according to a
request on targets of opportunity; that is, unplanned
and will be provided based on aircraft availability.
Immediate Close Air Support.
142. It provides mobility through mobile wing units to
heliborne forces, and through fixed wing units to
parachute units, it is used to efficiently deploy forces,
avoid obstacles and to carry out rapid
redeployments.
Combat transport air support.
143. It is the transportation of equipment and supplies to
advanced bases or remote areas. When the area
does not allow landing, delivery can be carried out by
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
helicopter or parachute drops.
Air delivery of supplies.

15 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
144. These operations allow increasing the range and autonomy of air
missions through the use of tank aircraft. Air refueling.
145. These types of operations are carried out in coordination with a
ground force, providing mutual support, they are different from a
search and rescue operation, since these are carried out in a
hostile environment.
Tactical recovery operations for aircraft and personnel (ORTAP).
146. It is the transportation of personnel and equipment from remote
areas or advanced bases. These operations include force
extractions, medical evacuations and non-combatant evacuations.
Air evacuation.
147. They are those that the air units carry out in support of the surface
units. These are classified into Close Air Support and Distant Air
Support.
Anti-submarine warfare (GAS) operations.
148. It is the action against enemy surface forces that seek to achieve
either control of the sea or the denial of it to the adversary.
Anti-surface warfare operations.
149. They are active and passive operations to defend the airspace
from the enemy and protect friendly forces, material and
infrastructure from attacks from enemy aircraft and missiles. Air
interception operations.
150. They are air operations whose purpose is to provide security
during flight to other types of aircraft whose defense capacity
it is limited; also supports the
preparation and coverage of a Landing Zone (ZA) and in providing
Close Air Support Fire (FAAC).
Flight escort operations.
151. They are operations that constitute direct defensive actions
carried out to neutralize or reduce the effectiveness of hostile air
action, including the use of aircraft, anti-aircraft weapons,
electronic warfare and weapons not used primarily for anti-aircraft
defense.
Air defense operations.
152. They are those operations whose purpose is to carry out search,
patrol, tracking or reconnaissance.
Aerial exploration operations.
153. These are those air operations aimed at responding in a timely
manner to calls for help from own or friendly personnel to
safeguard their integrity.
Rescue Operations.
154. They are the set of actions aimed at determining, taking
advantage, prevent or hinder the employment of energy
electromagnetic by the enemy, as well as those intended to
ensure and achieve maximum effectiveness in the use of this
energy by one's own forces.
Anti-aircraft electronic warfare operations.
155. It is used to integrate the functions of anti-air warfare, offensive air
support, transportation support, electronic warfare and air
exploration, providing the commander with the means to exercise
Command and Control authority over air assets. Control of aircraft
and missiles.
156. They contribute to sea control and power projection, with the
ability to operate clandestinely, carrying out forward operations,
16
By: AEGV
hydrographic reconnaissance prior to landing, direct action
missions, combat search and rescue, as well as the ability to
degrade enemy lines of communication. .
Special operations.
157. It is a military operation launched from the sea by an Amphibious
Task Force, from ships or boats, with the main purpose of
introducing a Landing Force (FD), across the coast, to fulfill a
specific mission. Amphibious operation.
158. It conducts amphibious operations, involving land, air and sea
forces, carried out through five phases: Planning, Embarkation,
Rehearsal, Movement to the Objective Area and Amphibious
Action (assault).
Amphibious Task Force (FTA).
159. This is distinguished from other types of amphibious operations in
the implication of the establishment of a Landing Force (FD) on a
hostile coastline.
The amphibious assault.
160. It is the withdrawal of forces by sea, by ships or naval vessels,
from a hostile coastline.
The amphibious retreat.
161. It is an operation carried out with the purpose of deceiving the
enemy through a show of force, in the hope that he will decide on
a course of action that is unfavorable to him.
Amphibious demonstration.
162. They are operations launched from the sea, on a hostile coast,
that involve rapid action on an objective or its occupation for a
short time, followed by a planned withdrawal.
Amphibious raids.
163. It is the temporary organization through which the AM conducts
amphibious operations, it is integrated with a Surface Force (FS),
a Landing Force (FD) and a Naval Aviation Force (FAN).
Amphibious Task Force (FTA).
164. It consists of battle, transport and logistics ships, as well as other
types necessary for the conduct of amphibious operations.
Surface Force (FS).
165. It is defined as an organization of Marine Corps or Army troops,
for the conduct of amphibious operations. Landing Force (FD).
166. It is defined as a temporary organization of fixed-wing and mobile-
wing aircraft, as well as air defense units, for the conduct of air
operations, in support of the FS and FD.
Naval Aviation Force (FAN).
167. They are those operations conducted by military or paramilitary
units specially organized, trained and equipped to achieve
success in military, political or economic objectives by
unconventional military means, in hostile, denied or politically
sensitive areas.
Special war operations.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

168. They are short-duration attacks and other offensive actions carried of a continuous nature.
out to destroy, capture, recover or inflict damage on designated Fleet.
personnel or material.
Direct action. 5. An organized set of military, human and technological means that
are trained to operate offensively and defensively, it is the first line
169. They are special war operations that are carried out through of defense in the event of a conflict.
ambushes, raids and direct assaults. Naval Force.
Combat patrols.
6. It is the distribution of ships of the same type in flotillas,
170. They are special warfare operations that include terminal guidance squadrons, divisions and subdivisions.
operations of air, naval and ground weapons systems, including Type Organization (Administrative).
those guided by laser.
Far away attacks. 7. Administrative or tactical organization consisting of 2 or more ship
divisions.
171. They are special war operations which include the evacuation of Squadron.
non-combatants and tactical operations for the recovery of
downed pilots and aircraft, recovery of oil and gas platforms 8. Administrative or tactical organization that consists of 2 or more
(PLATPG) as well as boarding, search and/or capture of ships. ships, which for tactical purposes can also be divided into
(AVBCB). subdivisions.
Recovery operations. Division.

172. They are special war operations which include sophisticated 9. Type of organization that provides the flexibility to address
demolition techniques. operational requirements while retaining a clear idea of the chain
Precision destruction operations. of command.
Task Organization (Operational).
173. They are special war operations which are carried out against
specific ships of interest. 10. Mobile command of 2 or more task forces consisting of ships and
Operations against ship in port. aircraft necessary for the fulfillment of specific tasks of a
continuous nature.
174. They are special war operations, which include the recognition of Task Fleet.
beach access, marking of landing beaches and firing of naval
support fire, locating and breaching mined areas. 11. It is part of the fleet organized by the Commander of a task fleet,
Support operations for amphibious operations. or higher authority for the accomplishment of a specific task or
tasks.
175. They are special war operations that are aimed at searching for Task Force.
and attacking targets of opportunity in certain areas, carried out in
response to targets that are not known or informed in advance. 12. It is part of a task force organized by the Task Force Commander
Armed reconnaissance. or higher authority.
Task Group.
176. They are operations used to obtain, confirm or validate information
concerning the area of operations and the enemy, which include: 13. It is part of a task group organized by the Task Group Commander
terrain reconnaissance, target location and damage assessment. or higher authority.
Special recognition. Task Unit.

177. They are the type of operations that special operations units carry
out against threats of this nature, involving advanced Interior
Close Combat Intervention (CCI) techniques.
Counterterrorism operations.
178. They are operations which capture, destroy, neutralize or delay
enemy military potential before it can achieve its objectives
against friendly forces. This type of operation is carried out in
response to a known target informed in advance.
Maritime Interdiction Operations.
5.- DAM 1.3.1.- SURFACE OPERATIONS.
1. It is the minimum operational unit of the Mexican Navy that carries
out operations for foreign defense while preserving the rule of law.
Vessel.
14. It is part of a task unit organized by the Task Unit Commander or
higher authority.
Task Element.
15. They constitute the deterrent element of the Mexican Navy, whose
capacity is derived from the logistical train that allows operations
to be carried out under the concept of interoperability to obtain
control of the sea.
Naval Regions.
16. It focuses its efforts on operations, whose objective is to increase
the combative capacity for the maritime defense and sovereignty
of the national territory from external aggressions coming from the
sea.
Naval Force.

2. Administrative or tactical organization that consists of 2 or more

ships with the same characteristics and roles.
Squadron.

3. Administrative or tactical organization of 2 or more squads. Flotilla.

4. Temporary mobile command of ships and aircraft for specific tasks

17 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
17. They are units equipped with systems against enemy targets, their
primary function is external defense, as well as the detection,
classification and neutralization of targets.
Line ships.
18. They have the capacity to supply combat units on the high seas,
designed to transport troops and material, as well as launch
amphibious vehicles to the coast.
Auxiliary Vessels.
19. Its function is to preserve sovereignty in the territorial sea, EEZ,
islands, cays, reefs, basements and continental shelf, carry out
search and rescue operations and support the civilian population
in cases of disasters.
Naval Regions.
20. They can carry out escort, exploration, rescue and rescue
operations at sea, coordinated ship-helicopter operations and
support the civilian population in disaster areas. Ocean Patrols.
21. They carry out patrol and surveillance operations in the MT and in
the EEZ to prevent smuggling, illicit fishing and drug trafficking, as
well as rescue, location and preservation of human life at sea.
Coastal Patrols.
22. They carry out interception operations at sea to combat drug
trafficking, illegal fishing and violators of current legislation.
Interceptor Patrols.
23. They carry out surveillance in inland waters, navigable waterways
and lakes, as well as the transportation of personnel in navigable
rivers.
Riverside Patrols.
24. They are a fundamental part of the logistics train, they allow
expanding autonomy, flexibility and operability by allowing supply,
towing, hospitalization and evacuation at sea.
Auxiliary Vessels.
25. They are designed to transport troops and material, as well as
launch amphibious vehicles to the coast as a landing force.
Landing ships.
26. This type of vessel (hospital, cargo and personnel transport) can
be adapted to different functions according to the needs to
respond to a national emergency; they can perform patrol, search
and reconnaissance functions.
Multipurpose vessels.
27. Its main function is the transportation of fuel and water in order to
provide logistical support to other surface units.
Tanker.
28. Its mission is to provide towing for larger draft vessels for docking,
undocking, port entries and exits.
Towing vessel.
29. They can transport cargo and personnel, patrol, search,
reconnaissance, location, interdiction, interception, inspection,
detection or a combination of these.
Transport vessels.
30. Its function is to provide Educational Centers with naval means for
the cadets, students and students to carry out their practices.
Training Ship.
31. It supports the SM's oceanographic institutes and stations, as well
as educational centers to carry out research, bathymetric surveys,
as well as participate in hydrocarbon spill drills.
Research vessel.
32. There are 2 types, stationary and self-propelled, their function is to
18
By: AEGV
dredge docks, channels and port accesses for the safe navigation
of surface units.
Dredge.
33. They organize, train and operate with: surface, amphibious
reaction and special forces, as well as with air-naval, submarine,
anti-submarine, mining, counter-mining and maritime surveillance
units.
The naval forces.
34. They are those carried out by surface units integrated into an
operational organization within a theater of operations when there
is a state of war with another nation.
Naval warfare operations.
35. To achieve this, warships must: Destroy or neutralize enemy
ships, submarines and aircraft, disable or fracture the enemy's
CC2, capture islands, straits, peninsulas and coastal bases, and
conduct barrier operations in straits.
Control of the sea.
36. It is achieved by sustaining the offensive capacity and maritime
transport that allows the concentration of combat and logistical
power (Naval, Air and Land) in the decisive place and moment.
The projection of force.
37. They are those in which ships of the line take the initiative in
combat, carrying out maneuvers and battle formations to locate
the enemy in order to neutralize or destroy it, using the maximum
combat power available.
Offensive Operations.
38. It is a military operation launched from the sea by an Amphibious
Task Force, from ships or boats, with the main purpose of
introducing a Landing Force (FD).
Amphibious Operations.
39. They are those naval operations that have the purpose of carrying
out a systematic investigation within a defined area, in which
search, patrol, tracking or reconnaissance operations can be
carried out.
Exploration Operations.
40. They are concerned with the location and destruction of enemy
submarines. Anti-submarine operations.
41. It is integrated with a Force of Surface, a force of
Landing and an Air-Naval Force, which are organized, equipped
and trained to conduct amphibious operations.
Amphibious Task Force (FTA).
42. It is the systematic investigation of a defined area in order to
locate or confirm the absence of a target known or suspected to
be located somewhere in that area.
Search.
43. It is the systematic and continuous investigation along a patrol line
to prevent a target from crossing it undetected. Patrol.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
44. It is the monitoring of a target in order to regularly report on its
composition, location, movement and any other relevant
information. It is often a consequence of positive results from a
search or patrol.
tracheo
45. It is the operation undertaken to obtain information about the
activities and resources of a potential enemy; or to obtain data
regarding the meteorological, hydrographic or geographical
characteristics of a particular area.
Recognition.
46. Their purpose is to protect a force, deny the enemy the use of the
sea, as well as protect national strategic interests. They must be
directed against existing threats, whether enemy ships, aircraft,
submarines or minefields. Defensive Operations.
47. They can be used to provide a defense system around a compact
formation, or to provide lines of defense against attack in a
particular direction.
Curtain Operations.
48. It is a number of merchant ships or naval auxiliaries or both,
ordinarily escorted by warships and/or aircraft, or a single
merchant ship or naval auxiliary under surface escort, assembled
and organized for the purpose of sailing together.
Convoy.
49. They are one or more warships that sail with a convoy for
protection during all or part of their navigation.
Surface escort.
50. They are one or more warships assigned to a local area command
that sail with a convoy and are responsible for the protection of the
convoy while it passes through that command or its adjacent
waters.
Local surface escort.
51. They are one or more warships sailing with a convoy, and whose
primary duty is to protect the convoy against submarine attack.
Surface anti-submarine escort.
52. These operations are designed to support both offensive and
defensive operations; For its execution, the use of both line and
auxiliary vessels is contemplated. Complementary Maritime
Warfare operations.
53. These are operations carried out when other operations are
prolonged and require resupply of the force at sea in the
designated area.
Logistical replenishment operations at sea.
54. They are the set of strategic, tactical and technical military actions
aimed at determining, taking advantage of, preventing or hindering
the use of the electromagnetic spectrum by the enemy, they
include: MAGE, CME and CCME.
Electronic Warfare Operations.
55. These are the 6 tactical situations that can arise in a theater of
operations, with the application of offensive, defensive actions or a
combination of both.
1. Offensive against enemy naval power.
2. Defensive-offensive against the threat of enemy naval power
over one's own.
3. Offensive against enemy shipping.
4. Defensive of own communications lines.
19
By: AEGV
5. Offensive against enemy territory.
6. Defense of own territory.
56. The objective of this action is the destruction or significant attrition
of the enemy naval forces, in order to be able to act on their
territory and their maritime transportation system, overcoming or
significantly reducing the need to protect their own.
Naval battle (Wear).
57. It consists of the confinement of enemy naval forces in their bases,
depriving them of acting on the high seas. It is used against an
inferior but potentially dangerous enemy, it can be close or far
away. Naval blockade (Immobilize the enemy).
58. The enemy naval force can be subject to systematic attrition by
means of submarines and aircraft.
Wear with submarines and/or aircraft.
59. It constitutes a high-performance operation, not only because of
the damage it can cause to the enemy, but also because of the
effort involved in its “Sweeping”, it is considered temporary and
economical attrition.
Offensive undermining.
60. It is the attack on naval forces in their bases, exploiting the
element of surprise, allowing important results.
Attack on the bases.
61. It is an operation that combines a defensive attitude, with the
intention of preserving one's own naval force, with another attitude
of an offensive nature, whose purpose is to harass the enemy
naval force.
Non-decisive wear actions.
62. It refers to an inferior fleet but which may constitute a concern due
to its potential capacity; to destroy it, it will be necessary to resort
to an action that can be very costly. Fleet in Power.
63. In the past it was developed by solitary surface ships. The
submarine has been the great executioner of maritime transport.
Corsican War.
64. It is a less bloody alternative than the Corso war, it is imposed by
presence and admits a gradual and flexible use of force.
Commercial Blockade.
65. It is the grouping of merchant ships protected by a common
escort, it represents the most effective response against
submarines.
Convoy.
66. It consists of distant or distant protection. It is intended to defend
one or more convoy routes with a conveniently stationed naval
force, which can act by reinforcing the convoy escort.
Coverage.
67. They are minefields planted as a protection measure against
enemy submarine attacks, thus protecting focal areas, access to
bases, straits, and other areas of strategic interest. Defensive
mine.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
68. It seeks the establishment of a beachhead, it is an operation in
which the sea overturns over the land, it is called an assault or
incursion.
Amphibious projection.
69. It is the other characteristic operation where the sea pours over
the land, its objective is to constitute the complement of an
amphibious projection, the bombing may have the purpose of
distraction.
Firepower projection (Naval fire support).
70. The defense of the coasts is considered the main and final goal of
naval warfare and the imperative and clearly delimited objective of
the maritime organization. The navy must ensure the inviolability
of its own coasts.
Naval forces.
71. They use torpedo boats, and have been enhanced with the advent
of the missile. The possibility of installing four or more surface-to-
surface missiles on small boats makes it possible for modest
coastal navies to challenge much more powerful ones.
Subtle forces.
72. Its purpose is to prevent entry into areas such as approaches,
straits, passes, bays, gulfs, etc., and is limited to preventing
enemy naval forces, surface and submarine, from operating freely
in certain areas of its own coastline.
Defensive mine.
73. Surface-to-surface and surface-to-air missiles are predominantly
used.
Coastal defenses.
74. It occurs in air-land operations, where own forces are committed
to defending the territory, naval forces provide decisive support for
the projected effort. Naval support for land operations.
75. It is defined as the strategic and tactical use of the sea, which
includes the preparation, planning and planting of naval mines,
due to its method they can be: planted by aircraft (offensive), by
submarines (offensive - defensive) and by ships (Defensive).
Mined.
76. They are focused on contributing to the maintenance of the rule of
law, deterrence, conflict resolution and promotion of peace
developed by the Naval Regions, Zones and Sectors, applying the
laws and combating illicit activities.
Naval operations other than those of war.
77. It is the classification of Naval Operations Other than War.
1. Operations to contribute to the maintenance of the rule of law.
2. Relief operations for the population and sustainability of the
ecological environment.
3. Training evaluation operations.
78. Operations conducted to intercept cargo or items within or in the
vicinity of a specific area to determine whether it is complying with
or violating laws and regulations, as well as gather intelligence on
the vessel's itinerary.
Maritime interdiction operations.
79. Maritime interdiction operations carried out with the purpose of
intercepting and capturing drugs while patrolling in suspicious
areas.
Against illegal trafficking of narcotics and psychotropic drugs.
20
By: AEGV
80. Maritime interdiction operations carried out in support of the
National Migration Institute.
Against illegal human trafficking.
81. Maritime interdiction operations carried out in the application of the
Federal Firearms and Explosives Law. Against the smuggling of
weapons and explosives.
82. Maritime interdiction operations carried out in support of the
country's Security Institutions to capture criminals. Against
Organized Crime.
83. Their purpose is the physical protection of facilities with strategic
value for the nation.
Security operations at strategic facilities.
84. They are carried out in the strip, river and lake to guarantee free
transit of vessels in commercial and tourist activities. Protection
operations for maritime, river and lake traffic.
85. These are operations aimed at responding to distress calls to
locate and safeguard human life at sea. Search and rescue.
86. These are Operations aimed at carrying out the movement of
personnel to and between medical facilities for treatment.
Evacuation.
87. These are operations that are carried out at an international level
to transport resources to support people in situations of risk or
disaster.
Humanitarian aid.
88. These are operations aimed at combating and controlling
hydrocarbon spills and conservation of marine species.
Protection and Conservation of the Marine Environment.
89. They are Operations that are carried out in order to evaluate the
training of Surface Units alone or in conjunction with special
forces, amphibious forces and aircraft.
Training operations.
6.- DAM 1.3.1.2.1.- OPERATIONS OFFICER.
(FIRST PART)
1. He is responsible for the efficient functioning of all areas included
in the Operations Department of a ship, and must have multiple
qualities and knowledge.
Operations Officer.
2. Its basic function is to establish and maintain controls for the
collection, evaluation, presentation and dissemination of tactical
and operational information for the development of operations and
combat.
Operations department.
3. They are the positions or divisions assigned to the Operations
Department.
CIC, Navigation and Communications.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
4. He exercises Command Control and relies on the
officers who occupy various control stations within
the combat fray to execute his orders.
Commander.
5. They are the Control Stations in any operational
condition on which the Organization of a ship is
based.
Command, Direction, Operations, Weapons,
Propulsion and power, Breakdowns, Air and
Landing.
6. It is the general term used to designate those
activities under the responsibility of the Operations
Officer.
Operations Control.
7. They are used in the CIC to locate a given position,
they include grid systems; local tactical grid (LTG);
global geographic reference system (GEOREF);
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and
Cartesian coordinates.
Positioning methods.
8. They are used to simplify the exchange of position
information between ships and/or aircraft. They are
a grid drawn on a chart of numbers and letters,
where a position on the chart can be indicated by a
code of letters and/or numbers.
(Read page 26)
Grid System.
9. They are the type of grids for reporting positions.
Fixed and mobile grilles.
10. Any point on the Earth's surface can be located by
a given grid reference, it never indicates more than
one point and it never changes.
Fixed grille.
11. It is based on a reference point, and moves at a
course and speed that are a function of the effects
of current and wind.
Mobile grid.
12. Intended to provide a quick and simple system for
reporting, aerial and surface plotting used within a
force, it is a mobile grid used in open waters with
no geographical significance. (Read pages. 26 –
28) Local Tactical Grid (LTG).
13. It is a system known as a grid, which is a simple
and fast method to express latitude and longitude,
it allows locating any position on the Earth's
surface over long distances and high speeds, it is
mainly used in aerial operations. (Read pages. 28
– 31).
World Geographic Reference System (GEOREF).
14. The purpose of this system is to simplify and
increase the accuracy of reporting in military
operations (ground bombing, target positions,
etc.). It can be used for other purposes when small
areas of the Earth's surface are designated. (Read
page 31)
Military Reference Grid System.
15. In this projection, vertical and horizontal lines are
projected from the surface of the earth onto a
cylinder, in this system, both meridians and
21
By: AEGV
parallels appear as subtly curved lines, it is based
on five independent spheroids that are
mathematically corrected to compensate for the
slight flattening of the land. (Read pages. 32 – 35).
Universal Transverse Mercator Grid (UTM).
16. Also known as "Comanche" rose, it is used to
transform the sighting made with reference to a
true, magnetic or grid azimuth (observer's target
line) to corrections with reference to the cannon's
target line. (Read pages. 35 – 41).
Spout grating converter.
17. This system originated for use by the Naval
Tactical Data System (NTDS), the computers used
by the NTDS calculate positions in XY coordinates
relative to a known reference point. (Read pages.
41 – 43).
Cartesian coordinate grid (XY).
18. Grid that is applied in both the Mexican Navy and
the Mexican Army during fire support operations.
Universal Transverse Mercator Grid (UTM).
19. Its basic task in an amphibious operation is to
support the assault on the target area through
neutralization either by disabling or destruction.
Naval Fire Support Units (FNA).
20. It is an organization established to carry out an
amphibious action. In addition to including the
landing force, it is divided into several task groups,
such as: transportation; naval fire support, anti-
submarine protection, etc.
Amphibious Task Force (FTA).
21. These ships are not providing artillery action for the
benefit of the landing force, but are a mere reserve
available to the Commander of the Amphibious
Task Force to be able to establish relief.
Support Vessels in reserve.
22. Class of direct support ships that work with a
battalion, remain linked to its command and
receive fire requests.
Destroyers.
23. They are general support ships, they remain linked
to the commands of the regiments (brigade) and
carry out fires in support at their request, they
carry out those missions for which the artillery of a
destroyer is not sufficient.
Cruisers or superior ships.
24. Class of ships that include naval fire support
groups or units, they are used almost exclusively
during “H” hour firing. Sometimes they are ready to
carry out general support (joint action), in case a
sector of enemy resistance has to be swept away
or for other missions requested by the troops.
Rocket launch boats.
25. It has the mission of: Organizing instant naval
reaction, coordinating ships against enemy
attacks, logistical control of actions, relief of ships
in direct support and coordination of ship
movements in direct support.
Support Weapons Coordinator and Shooting
Director.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
26. In an amphibious operation, he remains with the
Commander of the Landing Force Unit to which he
has been assigned and advises him on the
possibilities of such support.
Naval Fire Officer.

27. It refers to ordering a ship to put itself at the service

of a Unit supported on land to assist and support it,
and must carry out requested support fires such
as: Fire missions, Targets to be shot, Volume of
fire and shooting corrections.
Relations between Support Ships and Landing
Battalions.

22 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
28. It is an organic entity of the naval forces, it is the agency through
which the CFTA (Commander of the Advanced Task Force)
exercises global coordination of the support fires that it controls. It
is located on the flagship next to the CFTA and never disembarks.
Support Arms Coordination Center (SACC) Support Arms
Coordinated Center.
29. With the advice of the Landing Force Support Fire Coordinator,
integrates the fire plans of the support weapons, to guarantee the
most effective use required by the maneuver scheme of the
Landing Force.
Coordinator of Support Weapons.
30. It is an organic entity of the Landing Force and is the agency
through which the Commander of the Landing Force or
Commander of the Landing Group, plans the integration of the
fires of the support weapons, in order to favor the scheme of the
maneuver.
Fire Support Coordination Center (FSCC) Fire Support
Coordinated Center.
31. It is in charge of the Support Fire Coordination Center, it receives
requests from the subordinate echelons of the Landing Force and
notifies the Support Weapons Coordinator what the Landing Force
requirements are in terms of support fire and reports on ground
artillery activities.
Support Fire Coordinator.
32. Fire Restrictions Plan that prohibits ships and artillery from firing
with trajectories exceeding 1,100 feet in height within a circle of
2,500 m. radio whose center is the target indicated.
Victor Plan.
33. Fire Restrictions Plan where naval or land artillery cannot fire, so
that their trajectories penetrate a cylinder of unlimited height and
2,500 m. of radius around the designated target. The planes can
remain within that cylinder without fear of any artillery trajectory.
November Plan.
34. Fire Restrictions Plan where no artillery trajectory should penetrate
a 1000 m parallelepiped. wide, centered on a reference line and of
unlimited height. Planes can fly calmly through that airspace. It is
widely used as a helicopter corridor.
Whiskey Plan.
35. It is one of the important factors, since naval artillery cannot act
effectively against all types of coasts. If the beach has many
counterslope areas, these will be difficult to defeat and many
enemy weapons may remain unharmed.
Landing place.
36. They are extensions of land on which a ship can act
independently, attacking the targets that appear based on the
power of the ship, the range of its artillery, its caliber and the
topography of the terrain.
Areas of responsibility and assignment of support vessels for
these areas.
37. These are recommended points where the ship will be in good
condition to attack any target within the area.
Support stations for ships in areas of responsibility.
38. It is the plan for the replacement of ships taking into account the
consumption of ammunition and the fatigue of the crews.
Relief of support vessels.
39. This document establishes all the needs and even the fly rods, if
23
By: AEGV
they become completely worn out. Days and hours of ammunition,
quantities to be ammunition, types of ammunition, etc.
Ammunition resupply plan.
40. It refers to creating a table with the total ammunition necessary for
each action, indicating the type of ammunition to be used against
each of the targets.
Ammunition.
41. Try to organize the Surface Units in different missions such as
destruction, neutralization, minesweeper protection, air defense,
etc.
Distribution among ships of the various fire missions.
42. Try to ensure that in the first phase of the operation there will be
no scouts on the ground, but spying from a plane or helicopter
may be possible.
Study on shot shooting.
43. It refers to the fact that there must be a schedule for the
neutralization of the beach at “H” time, the schedule for
harassment fires, etc., all of this will lead to drawing up the table -
fire distribution schedule.
Shooting schedule.
44. It refers to the fact that the targets presented by the intelligence
service must advise whether they should be hit by naval artillery
or by another weapon.
Designation of targets that must be destroyed or neutralized.
45. Establishes, if necessary, whether vessels should shoot while
sailing or at anchor in geographic, direct or indirect shooting, etc.
Techniques for performing shots.
46. Recommendation that depends on the situation of the support
ships, their firing schedule, the lines of movement of airplanes and
helicopters, etc.
Fire restrictions.
47. This section specifies the missions of each ship, its areas of
responsibility and support stations, the targets to be hit, the times
at which they will do so, the ammunition to be used and reserved
for self-defense or missions other than landing and
communications.
OO Naval Fire Annex
48. Its primary objective prior to "D" day is the physical destruction of
vital ground installations for the enemy, in order to prepare the
area for assault, as well as the destruction or interdiction of enemy
communications routes.
Naval Fire Plan.
49. Types of Fire according to the desired effect.
Destruction, Neutralization, Harassment, Illumination and
Interdiction.
50. It is carried out with the sole purpose of totally or partially
annihilating a target, it is carried out at short distance and at low
cadence, the largest caliber available is used.
Fire of destruction.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
51. It is used when the aim is to paralyze the enemy's movements for
a certain time, prevent or interrupt the movement and/or firing of
their weapons.
Neutralization fire.
52. It is designed to disturb the rest of enemy troops, hinder their
movement, threaten casualties and affect their morale. Try to
unnerve the enemy, make the use of an area dangerous. It is a
very irregular rhythm shot.
Harassing fire.
53. It is carried out with the aim of illuminating an enemy area,
observing hostile night operations, adjusting own fire by
observation in hours of darkness and supporting friendly night
operations.
Lighting fire.
54. It is perpetrated over an area or point to prevent the enemy from
effectively using that area or point.
Interdiction fire.
55. They are the types of naval fire according to their Tactical use.
Close, Immediate, Depth, Preparation, Counter Battery,
Reconnaissance, Anti-Aircraft Battery Suppression, Defensive,
Isolation, Protection and Concealment and Masking.
56. It is carried out on enemy troops, weapons or positions that, due
to their proximity to the supported unit, represent an immediate
and serious threat.
Close support fire.
57. It is carried out against targets close to the limit of the minimum
safety distance. You have to take into account the movements of
your own troops, to protect advances or retreats, the best caliber
is 5”.
Immediate support fire.
58. It serves to neutralize and destroy the enemy's reserves and
weapons and interfere with its chain of command, supply lines
and observations.
Support fire in depth.
59. Fire that is fired on targets or specific areas as an initiating
measure for an assault.
Preparation fire.
60. It is perpetrated against active enemy weapons and/or arms
control stations. It is what the ship establishes in response to
enemy artillery attacks against friendly troops or the ship itself.
Fire against battery.
61. It is executed over areas where the enemy is suspected of having
camouflaged positions.
Reconnaissance fire.
62. It is used to suppress enemy anti-aircraft fire before and during an
air attack on enemy positions.
Suppression fire from anti-aircraft batteries.
63. It is committed by direct support and general support ships to
protect supported units from enemy counterattack.
Defensive fire.
64. It is a planned fire, used to destroy or interdict roads or railways
and other lines of communication or approach: roads, roads,
bridges, etc.
Isolation fire.
65. It is carried out by support ships during the period of
reorganization of supported units after a position has been
24
By: AEGV
captured.
Protective fire.
66. It uses smoke-producing projectiles to make it difficult for the
enemy to see its own or friendly units and its deployment,
movements and maneuvers are rarely used taking into account
the wind.
Concealment or masking fire.
67. They are the types of Naval Fire according to their degree of
Planning. Planned, Request and Incidental or Opportunity.
68. These are the fires that are specified in a formal naval fire plan or
annex. It is known what time they will be carried out, type and
number of ammunition to be used, type of shooting, targets or
areas involved, etc.
Planned fires.
69. They are carried out on specific targets and are requested by the
troops through their scouting equipment. The ship is in direct
support, the assisted unit specifies the types of targets,
ammunition, etc.
Fires on request.
70. They are those carried out on targets of opportunity or transition
discovered by the ship itself. Generally, the spying will be direct
from the vessel itself without planning. Incidental or opportunity
fires.
71. They are the types of Naval Fire according to their Type.
Area or Zone, Precision, Defiling or Counterslope, Leading,
Concentration, Barrier and Time.
72. It is a fire of considerable volume carried out over a more or less
large prescribed area. Normally it is the type of fire used for
neutralization.
Area or zone fire.
73. Naval fire intended for the destruction of specific targets (small,
defined targets), direct impact is sought. Precision fire.
74. Type of Naval Fire carried out against a target located behind a hill
or hill. The trajectories of the projectiles may be intercepted by the
terrain, making it necessary to increase the firing distance, use
reduced loads or shoot in the second sector.
Defiled or counterslope fire.
75. Naval fire perpetrated against a target in such a way that the
range dispersal rose is oriented in the direction of the longitudinal
axis of the target.
Leading fire.
76. Naval Fire where several ships fire on the same target.
Concentration fire.
77. Naval Fire that tries to put up a curtain of fire that prevents the
enemy from crossing it, it can be fixed or mobile.
Barrier fire.
78. Naval fire with a time fuse and trying to achieve explosions in the
air about 20 meters from the ground, it involves casualties in
personnel.
Fire of times.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
79. They are the types of Naval Fire according to aim.
Direct and Indirect Fire.
80. Naval fire that is carried out on a target visible from the ship,
through the line of sight of either the cannon or firing director.
Direct fire.
81. It is executed on a target that cannot be used to aim the line of
sight of the guns or that of the director.
Indirect fire.
82. Every shot on the coast must be observed and corrected, it
represents a dependency for the ship, since it must be located at
a certain point in the sea from where it can see the target or it will
have to be in communication with a land or air spotter.
Fire Splash.
83. It is used when the target is visible from the sea and you shoot at
it, the results are appreciated and the shot is corrected until it is
centered and the target is destroyed.
Spoke from the ship itself.
84. Equipment of this type of spotting is essential when the target is
not visible from the ship and the shot must be executed with
precision. The spotter may be forced to fix his location at a point
determined by factors such as the enemy, the security of not
receiving projectiles from one's own ship, the characteristics of the
terrain, etc.
Terrestrial Spoke.
85. It will be used when it comes to hitting targets that are not visible
from the ship or are difficult to see and there is no possibility of
locating spotters on land.
Aerial Splash.
86. Must be thoroughly familiar with the functions and duties of the
spotting network radio operator, plotting table plotters, and
spotting grid converter operator.
Armaments Liaison Officer (OAS).
87. Its main obligations are: Report the magnetic variation to the AEO,
plot the battle area, locate the target on the chart, inform the AEO
of the bearing and distance of the target, determine the course
and speed of itself and the target.
Plotters of the Meza plotter.
88. It is the set of strategic, tactical and technical military actions
aimed at determining, taking advantage of, preventing or
hindering the use of electromagnetic energy by the enemy.
Electronic Warfare (GE).
89. They include all actions aimed at determining the existence and
location of enemy equipment that radiates electromagnetic energy
and thereby judging and estimating the disposition and threat
potential.
Measures to Support GE (MAGE).
90. It is the division of the GE that brings together all actions aimed at
preventing or making it difficult for the enemy to effectively use
electromagnetic waves.
Electronic countermeasures (ECM).
91. It includes actions whose purpose is to control and guarantee to
one's own forces the effective use of this type of energy, despite
the enemy's use of GE.
Counter - electronic countermeasures (CCME).
25
By: AEGV
92. Its objective is to ensure the free use of the sea by its own forces
by providing operational commanders the ability to adopt courses
of action using the electromagnetic spectrum, warning of hostile
intentions and protecting their own or friendly forces.
Naval Electronic Warfare.
93. Exercises general control of Electronic Warfare, complementing
fleet policies and doctrine with specific instructions for MAGE,
CME and CCME that are necessary.
Tactical Control Officer (OCT).
6.- DAM 1.3.1.2.1.- OPERATIONS OFFICER.
(SECOND PART)
94. It is the Commander who has been assigned Electronic Warfare
control functions, he can coordinate the efforts of numerous ships
and aircraft, or only some surface units of the formation.
Electronic Warfare Coordinator (CGE).
95. He is responsible for the general control of Electronic Warfare
actions on board, as well as for the conduct of GE operations that
have been assigned to the ship by higher authority.
Commander of the Ship.
96. Has the responsibility of conducting, coordinating and controlling
Electronic Warfare operations before the Commander.
Operations Officer.
97. He is responsible to the Operations Officer for coordinating
Electronic Warfare information with combat information from other
sources.
CIC officer.
98. Organizes, supervises and coordinates the unit's Electronic
Warfare efforts, directly supervises the training of GE equipment
operators, as well as the maintenance, repair and calibration of
such equipment.
Electronic Warfare Officer.
99. Searches for signals in the assigned frequency band, analyzes
and determines the direction of any intercepted signal (passive),
and keeps the equipment ready in the operating mode indicated
by the GE Officer or the CIC Officer. (active).
Counter Electronic Measures (CME) Operator.
100. They constitute the division of Electronic Warfare that involves the
interception of electromagnetic emissions, their analysis and
evaluation, they provide GE's source of information for CME,
CCME, detection of potential threats, warning, evasion, target
acquisition and weapons engagement. guided.
Measures to Support Electronic Warfare (MAGE).
101. These are the Phases of Measures to Support Electronic Warfare
(MAGE).
Exploration and detection, Location and tracking, Signal analysis
and Evaluation.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
102. MAGE phase that is carried out by carrying out a search by
sweeping electromagnetic frequencies and bands suspected of
the enemy for detection and tracking by radar, communications,
navigation, IFF or missile control.
Exploration and detection.
103. Phase of the MAGE that is carried out by taking bearings of the
intercepted signals to obtain their position and plotting the sender
in the navigation plots.
Location and tracking.
104. MAGE phase that provides data on the technical characteristics of
the enemy's weapons and electronic devices and is read directly
on the screens of the interception system. Signal analysis.
105. MAGE phase that is based on the data obtained during the first
three phases of the MAGE and can provide the following
indications: Degree of threat, enemy position, course and speed of
the station and composition of the force.
Assessment.
106. MAGE interception scouts, who have more interception equipment
and more personnel, are better equipped for detailed analysis of
intercepted emissions. (Read page 71).
Surface Units.
107. MAGE interception scouts that, due to their speed and antenna
height, can carry out interception surveys over large areas and
provide maximum early warning.
Air Units.
108. MAGE intercept scouts who, as pickets of a surface task force,
may be assigned interception searches or other GE operations.
They are well suited to collecting tactical and strategic information
on enemy electronic activities.
Submarines.
109. It controls the interception guards (Countermeasure Guards) that
a task force develops, assigning the frequency band that each
vessel must specifically cover (monitor).
Tactical Control Officer (OCT).
110. They are used to detect, locate, analyze and record electronic
emissions in the EEM frequencies, they provide a force with the
ability to obtain tactical and strategic intelligence of enemy
electronic activities of all types, while allowing them to remain
undetected by the enemy.
MAGE Systems.
111. They are the fundamental piece of any MAGE equipment, these
are classified according to the scanning method into 2 types:
broadband and narrow band. They are used to detect enemy
electromagnetic emissions.
Interception Receivers.
112. Type of Interception Receivers that constitute the most common
type used by MAGEs, they are superheterodyne receptors with
excellent selectivity, sensitivity and stability.
Narrow band receivers.
113. Type of Interception Receivers that simultaneously intercept all
signals within coverage
full on receiver frequency. These are untuned, open, video-to-
video receivers. crystal with relatively low
sensitivity and poor frequency selectivity.
Broadband receivers.
114. They have omnidirectional arrays for good initial detection and
efficiency, they should be placed in a field that is free of
obstructions and as high as possible to provide the greatest range
in their detection horizon.
Fixed Receiving Antennas.
26
By: AEGV
115. They can be fixed arrays or high-gain antennas, they rotate at
speeds greater than 300 rpm. When used in conjunction with the
appropriate receiver and display, the direction from which the
signal arrived is indicated by a lobe that appears on the display
screen.
Goniometric Receiving Antennas.
116. MAGE equipment whose purpose is to alert the operator to the
presence of a signal, provide a visual indication of the frequency
range, and determine the bearing of the source. Presentation
Screens.
117. Type of MAGE display that is used to indicate the presence of a
signal in the frequency range being scanned, a bright dot appears
in the part that corresponds to the signal frequency within the
scanned band.
Acquisition screen.
118. Type of MAGE Screen that allows you to visually observe the
intercepted part of the frequency spectrum, facilitates
simultaneous attention to the signals in the entire frequency range
and presents the characteristics of the receiver's operating band.
Panoramic screen.
119. Type of MAGE screen that allows electronic analysis of the
intercepted signal, it is used to determine: Pulse repetition
frequency, pulse width and shape, and scanning characteristics.
Pulse analyzer screen.
120. MAGE Screen Type where the top three lines are equivalent to the
analysis screen, lines 4 and 5 correspond to the goniometric
screen and the bottom line is the panoramic screen.
Combined screens.
121. Type of MAGE Screen that provides tactical information to the
operator. The antenna rotation speed of the emitting bank is
determined by the period of time elapsed between the bursts of
pulses heard in the hearing aids.
Audio presentation.
122. They represent the active part of the GE, involving activities
whose purpose is to prevent or nullify the enemy's use of their
equipment, through Interference (or disturbance) and Deception
(or deception).
Electronic Countermeasures (CME).
123. It consists of the intentional radiation, re-irradiation or reflection of
electromagnetic energy with the aim of reducing the effectiveness
of the enemy's use of their devices, equipment and/or electronic
systems. (Read page 77)
Interference from Counter Electronic Measures (CME).
124. They have the advantage of carrying more powerful jamming
equipment because they have fewer space, weight and available
energy restrictions, however, the short distance of their radar
horizon limits their coverage capacity.
Surface Units.
125. They have the advantage of speed, maneuverability and the ability
to reach positions not accessible to surface forces. The increase
in height allows for a much greater range of effective interference.
Air Units.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
126. Their use of jamming is limited because their main advantage is
being able to remain undetected, however, their ability to remain
on station provides an advantage in some cases.
Submarines.
127. It varies according to the type of equipment the enemy has and
whether the measures to be used are offensive or defensive in
nature. It is used in relation to the following countermeasures:
Radar, Communications, Missiles and Control and Navigation
devices.
CME jamming tactic.
128. These are the types of Interference in Electronic Counter
Measures. Electronics and Mechanics.
129. A type of jamming, referred to in some publications as On-Target
or Self-Screenning jamming, is used when a unit uses its jamming
equipment to protect itself from enemy detection devices.
Self-Protection Electronic Interference.
130. Type of interference called Off-Target or Stand-Off interference, it
is used to support or protect units (ships or aircraft) that are
potential targets of enemy electronic detection devices.
Supporting Electronic Interference.
131. Type of jamming where chaff and other non-electronic jamming
methods are used to gain a tactical advantage, both by ships and
aircraft.
Mechanical Interference.
132. They are metal strips that come packaged in containers of various
lengths and quantities, used generously, they must be thrown at
frequent intervals and at sufficient height, they reach their
maximum effectiveness in 1 min. after being launched and can
last up to 30 min.
Chaff.
133. It consists of the deliberate radiation, irradiation, alteration,
absorption or reflection of electromagnetic energy with the
intention of confusing the enemy in the interpretation and use of
the information received through their electronic systems.
CME disappointment.
134. These are the types of Deception in Electronic Counter Measures.
Manipulative and Imitative.
135. Type of CMEs Deception, which is the alteration or simulation of
friendly electromagnetic radiation to deceive the enemy.
Manipulative deception.
136. Type of CME Deception that consists of introducing radiation into
enemy channels by imitating their own emissions.
imitative disappointment.
137. Its purpose is to confuse the enemy by electronic means and thus
reduce the effectiveness of their electronic systems. The final
result: minimize or nullify the destructive capacity of the enemy's
systems. (Read. p. 83)
Concept of CME Disappointment.
138. It consists of actions related to CME Deception, designed to
provide security and prevent the ability, readiness and intentions
of the force from being known by keeping the enemy in the dark.
Coverage and concealment of Electronic Warfare.
139. They are used to nullify the usefulness of enemy electronic
equipment, interfering with it to prevent it from receiving
information or by deception by providing false information; the
possibilities of its use are only limited by ingenuity and
imagination. CME Equipment and Devices.
140. They can be of special design or common equipment, they use
27
By: AEGV
the corresponding modulation to interfere with a particular type of
system, they are named according to the audio sounds they
produce: Noise, Saw, Variable Saw, Random Pulsation and
Bagpipe.
Communications Countermeasures (COMCM).
141. A type of Communications Countermeasures Modulation
(COMCM) that is randomly modulated in amplitude and frequency
creating an extremely loud static sound.
Noise.
142. A type of Communications Countermeasures Modulation
(COMCM) that is frequency modulated producing a characteristic
warble in the audio.
Mountain range.
143. A type of Communications Countermeasures Modulation
(COMCM) that is similar to saw modulation except that the
modulating frequency varies in discontinuous steps.
Variable Saw.
144. Type of Communications Countermeasures Modulation (COMCM)
where the pulses are random and with a cadence similar to that
used in equivalent CW transmission from a few words to 30 or 40
per minute.
Random Press.
145. A type of Communications Countermeasures (COMCM) amplitude
modulation by sinusoidal audio-frequency voltages which
produces many different audio tones in rapid sequence. It is an
extremely effective method against phone circuits.
Bagpipes.
146. These produce random noise or emissions similar to radar
signals. Jamming equipment that has the ability to obscure the
information on the screens is called masking jammers (they
produce snow, scratches and noise spots) to differentiate them
from repeater transponders that modify radar echoes.
Radar Countermeasures (RADCM).
147. These are the ones that present false targets to victim radars.
They should be considered as interference or deception devices,
depending on the intentions of their use. Devices of this type
include chaffs and lures.
Non-Electronic Devices.
148. They are the four basic techniques of electronic interference.
Localized Disturbance, Sweeping, Frequency Search and Locking
and Barrier.
149. Disturbance Electronic Interference that are narrow band, with
manually tuned transmitters that can modulate in frequency or
amplitude with random noise or a periodic signal.
Localized disturbance.
150. Electronic Interference Disturbance are self-tuning narrowband
transmitters that sweep from top to bottom across a frequency
band at a given speed, reaching several thousand sweeps per
second.
Sweep disturbance.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
151. Electronic Jamming uses a transmitter in which a narrowband
jamming signal can be tuned over a wide band of frequencies by
locking the signal at any particular frequency. Search disturbance
and frequency lock.
152. Electronic Interference Disturbance, which are broadband
transmitters modulated by noise or frequency which prevent the
use of frequencies of a wide portion of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
Barrier disturbance.
153. It is the name used for light strips of aluminum and metallized
paper that function as resonant dipoles, which are launched from
aircraft or dispersed by launch in munition or rocket, acting as a
reflector that returns an echo to the affected radar equipment.
Chaff.
154. Consisting of metal strips 400 to 700 feet long and ½” wide, each
tape has a piece of cardboard attached to each end to balance it
horizontally as it descends. Rope.
155. They are devices used to present false aerial or surface targets or
make a small target produce a large echo, making it difficult for
the enemy to assess the threat.
Lures.
156. Type of decoy that consists of small metal strips placed
perpendicularly on a frame. They produce large echoes to any
radar, appearing to echo from a large target.
Reflective meshes.
157. Type of decoy that consists of a reflective mesh installed on a
buoy, which drifts in the sea to simulate a ship. Reflector buoys.
158. Type of decoy consisting of reflective material attached to a
helium balloon that is released to simulate aircraft. Its movement
depends on the intensity of the wind, which at high altitudes is
high speed.
Kites.
159. They optimize the capacity of electromagnetic equipment and
systems of their own forces, nullifying the GE actions of the
enemy, this is achieved through: Emissions control (EMCON),
Evasion, Anti-interference techniques, Agility and frequency
diversification, Training of operators and Tactical action. Counter-
Counter Electronic Measures (CCME).
160. It is the effective management of all electromagnetic and
electroacoustic emissions of a force or unit with the aim of
obtaining maximum tactical advantage.
Emissions Control (EMCON).
161. Use of Emissions Control (EMCON) which was from
reconnaissance satellites, because it becomes increasingly
difficult to move a naval force without discovering its existence
and general location, which is why it usually requires electronic
silence on all bands.
Tactical evasion.
162. Use of Emissions Control (EMCON) when the enemy can be
warned of the existence and approximate location of a force.
Avoid obtaining intelligence to the enemy or providing false
intelligence.
163. Use of Emission Control (EMCON) in order to prevent one's own
28
By: AEGV
efforts from being nullified or limited, it is frequently necessary to
restrict radiation.
Avoid interference.
164. They are those that support the implementation of emissions
control. They are used during the planning execution phase to
authorize, control or prohibit the use of electronic emitting
equipment, revalidating, expanding or modifying the Emissions
Control plan (EMCON).
Emission Control Orders (EMCON).
165. It states that, in a tactical emergency situation, the current
conditions of the EMCON plan, despite all restrictions, can be
broken by an isolated unit upon detecting an approaching threat.
Emissions Control Breakdown (EMCON).
166. It is used to quickly and accurately carry out any change in the
Emission Control conditions (EMCON) in accordance with the
dictates of the tactical situation to optimize the reaction, giving a
quick and positive response to each vessel.
Emission Control Board (EMCON).
167. It consists of determining which equipment is affected and the new
condition that must be communicated to the necessary stations
when an Emission Control order (EMCON) is received. The GE
Duty Officer must contact the responsible personnel for each
team.
Execution of the Emissions Control Plan (EMCON).
168. They are assigned to reduce to a minimum the amount of
equipment operating in a force, only the ship(s) in this condition
can use that equipment, it has the responsibility of carrying out
360° coverage. (Read page 89) Radar Guards.
169. They are based on the method used to counteract the effects of
interference or deception, they are circuits that prevent strong
interfering signals from overloading or saturating the radar
receiver and that prevent interfering signals from passing through
them, but allow the passage of the real echoes.
Anti-Interference Circuit.
170. It consists of each type of equipment working in a frequency range
as wide as possible, if the enemy tries
Interfering with them must disperse their interfering capacity
(power and/or equipment) in direct proportion to that margin. If you
cannot cover the entire margin, some equipment will continue to
operate effectively.
Frequency Diversity.
171. It is a technical design characteristic of CCME equipment, in which
the transmitter frequency is variable within a specific frequency
range. This reduces the enemy's ability to jam the equipment in
question.
Frequency Agility.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
172. It is the most important aspect in preparing CCME activities, they
must be able to: Recognize the presence of interference,
disturbance or deception, report and process information, obtain
the best possible efficiency from their equipment, Integrate
combinations and Obtain information despite interference. (Read
pages. 92 and 93) Operator Training.
173. Since the Commander delegates his authority to carry out the
ship's evolutions and fire the weapon systems to two control
officers.
The Bridge Watch Officer and the Tactical Action Officer.
174. He is the officer responsible for controlling the ship and ensuring
that the maneuvers ordered by the OAT are carried out safely.
The bridge watch officer.
175. To handle this situation, the OAT announces with a loud voice that
it has lost it, those responsible for the CIC areas verbally report
the situation they face, what they recommend the ship do, and
what was the last order given by the OAT.
Loss of Image of the Situation.
176. It is responsible for ensuring that combat systems doctrine is up-
to-date and that control relationships are clearly established
before the ship goes into action.
The Operations Officer.
177. They are all those in which the ship provides intelligence and
logistical support to the interceptor patrols with which it is
operating, in order to obtain better results in the development and
fulfillment of a mission.
Ship-interceptor binomial operations.
178. They are based on the use of surface units that operate with a
helicopter on board, to which the interceptor patrol is integrated,
allowing a joint operation.
Trinomial ship-helicopter-interceptor operations.
179. Its missions are to develop external defense operations and
maintain internal security, protect convoys and landing forces, hit
and annihilate any force that attacks the state and transport
personnel, vehicles and equipment to the combat area.
Warships.
180. They are the classes of Warships of the Mexican Navy.
Destroyers, Frigates, Corvettes and Amphibious Warfare.
181. Its missions are: Carry out operations in the EEZ in order to avoid,
interdict and deter acts contrary to national legislation, search and
rescue operations, provide maritime support and conduct low
intensity conflicts.
Ocean Patrols.
182. They are the types of Ocean Patrols.
Oaxaca, Durango, Modified Durango, Sierra, Holzinguer, Uribe
and Valle.
183. Its Missions are: Carry out operations in the Pacific Ocean and
Gulf of Mexico for the defense of maritime interests, surface
operations with safety and efficiency, satisfy the need for assault
ships and transport an amphibious force, support in disaster zones
and support logistic.
Auxiliary Vessels.
184. They are divided into different types: Supply ships, tanks,
multipurpose ships, hospital ships, tugboats, transport ships,
workshop ships, dredgers and docks.
29
By: AEGV
Auxiliary Vessels.
185. It is the multipurpose auxiliary vessel that has sufficient
characteristics to carry out trinomial type operations. Huastesco.
7.- DAM 1.3.1.2.3.- MAINTENANCE OF THE STATE OF
RIGHT.
1. These types of operations are focused on maintaining the rule of
law and conclude with an inspection.
Interdiction Operations.
2. He is the person in command of the boarding team, and is
responsible for the visit and search on board the suspicious
vessel, remaining in control of the boarded vessel until he is
relieved or receives the order to return control to the master of the
vessel.
The inspection officer (IO).
3. It is required that both the surface unit that carries out the
inspection, the Inspection Officer (OI), and the security cell have
them, which will allow them to maintain continuous, safe and
reliable communication for coordination purposes.
Communications.
4. This phase provides the fundamental basis to carry out the
inspection of a ship, maintain good judgment and extreme
security, be respectful, remain cautious, alert and control the
situation, it is an opportunity to obtain intelligence information.
Gathering of information, approach and boarding of the unit to be
inspected.
5. In this phase, the Surface Unit must be on inspection duty,
maintain communications, surveillance, report the situation, and a
recording of the conversations carried out must be made.
Requirements of the surface unit that passes inspection.
6. During this preparatory phase, the Commander will maneuver his
unit in order to minimize the threat of hostile acts, such as
shooting or launching of explosives, he will position himself on the
side of the sun with respect to the ship's bow at the effective range
of the weapons.
Positioning.
7. Preparatory phase in which the Inspection Team must get ready at
the call of the day, before boarding, the ship's organization must
ensure that all the inspection equipment is available.
Alert Condition.
8. Preparatory phase in which the Unit must approach the quarter of
the suspect vessel (500 yards), the ice on the non-visible side with
a security sweep, count the personnel gathered in the stern
looking for potential dangers.
Ship Maneuvers.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

9. This can be carried out by a surface unit or by an aircraft, its
purpose is to obtain information about the suspicious vessel in
order to determine if it is necessary to carry out a boarding and
inspection.
Initial information collection.
10. It refers to the questioning about the name, nationality and
institution to which it belongs, port of registration, flag, registration
number, international call, cargo, last port visited and next port to
visit.
Initial information collection.
11. Additional information that must be gathered if it is determined to
carry out an inspection boarding of a suspicious vessel. Number
of personnel on board, if there are animals on board, information
on weapons and their location and the positioning of the boarding
ladder.
12. It must be deliberate with a security posture considering evasion
routes, it must be positioned aft of the beam of the windward
quarter of the vessel to be boarded, maintaining a safety distance.
Approach procedure.
13. Procedure where the rules of engagement (ROE) must be
considered, the vessel carrying out a collision is aware of the
limits to the magnitude and type of force that it can use.
Shutdown procedure for a suspicious vessel .
14. Number of designated members that make up the boarding team.
10 members.
15. He must be of the officer category, a mature person, in good
physical condition, qualified in the use of small arms and have the
full confidence of the ship's commander.
Inspection officer.
16. It is of the officer category, who must be in training or already
qualified as an inspection officer, in good physical condition,
qualified in the use of minor weapons and have the full confidence
of the ship's commander.
Inspection officer assistant.
17. He must be of the category of second master at least, he must be
a mature person, in good physical condition, qualified in the use of
minor and automatic repeating weapons.
Leader of the security cell.
18. It is a group of at least 5 members of mature people, in good
physical condition and qualified for the use of small arms and
automatic repeaters, in charge of securing machinery spaces, it
includes a machinery element.
Security cell.
19. It is a team made up of 2 of the most experienced people in
locating hidden material and inspecting containers. They are
mature people, in good physical condition, and qualified for the
use of small arms.
Search team.
Security cell.
22. He is responsible for the equipment of the Inspection Group (IG)
and for receiving specific instructions and assignments for the
operation to be carried out. He must ensure that the crew is
gathered and that the security cell is positioned around it at
strategic points.
Inspection officer.
23. To recommend it, the Inspection Officer (IO) must know and
correctly understand the legislation regarding prohibited and
permitted goods, the final decision is made higher up the chain of
command, the recommendation is critical for decision making.
Assurance Decision.
24. It will be considered as the one in which the temporary meeting of
tactical elements (ship, helicopter, interceptor) that is organized is
presented, to make better use of the means, achieving an
operational synergy that repotentializes the results to be obtained.
Trinomial operations.
25. When information about a suspicious target is received, a flight will
be ordered and the rescue vessel will be ready and the
interceptor, in coordination with the helicopter pilot and the
interceptor skipper, will design the search patterns.
Commander.
26. It will receive information about the probable area where the target
is located, issuing the necessary instructions to remove the
helicopter from the hangar and prepare it to take off at the
moment ordered.
Helicopter pilot.
27. He will order the sniper and the underwater work element to board
the helicopter, the first armed with a long weapon and the second
with a short weapon, and will instruct the Inspection Officer (IO) to
prepare to embark aboard the vessel. ship interceptor.
Second Commander.
28. Type of helicopter exploration search where the interceptor will be
ordered to go to the end of the pattern, continuing it according to
its own sweep width and until the helicopter joins again.
Rectangular search.
29. Type of helicopter exploration search where the interceptor will be
ordered to head towards the end of the pattern, continuing
according to the vessel's own sweep width, proceeding in the
same way when the helicopter returns.
Search for increasing square.
30. Type of helicopter exploration search where the interceptor unit
will be ordered to a heading that is the bisector of the angle that
makes up the helicopter's round-trip heading, remaining on the
same until the helicopter flies back, proceeding to remain
hoisted. .
Sector search.

20. Element of the inspection team that must be in good physical

condition and qualified for the use of small arms and familiar with
low-light photography and video.
Photographer.

21. You must be the first to board the boat and secure the area
around the ladder for the rest of the team to board. If a member of
the crew approaches, you must inspect them first.

30 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
31. Type of helicopter exploration search where the interceptor unit
will go to the center of the search area and when it arrives there it
will continue making figure eight patterns until the helicopter
finishes its journey.
Search for intercept.
8.- DAM 1.3.1.5.8.- SEARCH AND RESCUE.
1. It is a systematized set of principles, theories and norms, which
define the purpose of a discipline, activity or institutional
organization.
Doctrine.
2. These are functions of supervision, communication, coordination,
search and rescue of people in danger, including the provision of
medical advice, initial assistance and/or medical evacuation.
Search and Rescue (SAR).
3. National maritime geographic area where the Mexican State has
the responsibility of providing SAR services. It includes all
Mexican marine areas.
National Search and Rescue Region (NSRR).
4. Sub-division of the NSRR with delimited dimensions, associated
with a Regional Maritime Rescue Coordination Center (MRCC) in
which SAR services are provided. Its limits coincide with those of
each Naval Region.
Search and Rescue Region (SRR).
5. Permanent body in the EMGA in charge of promoting the effective
organization of SAR services, facilitates the collection and
exchange of information with national and international
institutions, supervises the implementation of SAR operations
within the NSRR.
National Maritime Search and Rescue Coordination Center
(NMRCC).
6. Coordinating center in each Naval Region, in charge of
coordinating and directly supporting SAR services within its SRR,
providing coordination with the NMRCC, Sub-centers and Naval
Search and Rescue Stations of its Region.
Regional Maritime Rescue Coordination Center (MRCC).
7. It is established in the Naval Zones or Sector to maintain close
coordination of the SAR means with the MRCC when necessary
due to distance or lack of communication due to the size of the
SRR area.
Maritime Rescue Coordination Sub-centre (MRSC).
8. Operational unit equipped with personnel, units and specialized
equipment for the coordination and execution of SAR operations.
Naval Search and Rescue Station (ENSAR).
9. Surface, air or land operational unit engaged in the development
of SAR operations.
Search and Rescue Unit (SRU).
10. Responsible for establishing and providing SAR services in the
NSRR and ensuring that the planning of such services is properly
coordinated. It is carried out by the Chief of the General Staff of
the Navy.
National Search and Rescue Coordinator (NSC).
11. Responsible for coordinating, supervising and monitoring SAR
operations. It is carried out by the Head of the Sixth Section.
31
By: AEGV
Maintains direct communication with the SMCs through the
Command and Control Room.
Search and Rescue Coordinator (SC).
12. Responsible for planning, coordinating and executing SAR
operations. It is performed by the Commander of the Region,
Zone or Naval Sector, and the functions are delegated to the
Commander of the ENSAR or Head of the Third Section or 23.
Search and Rescue Mission Coordinator (SMC).
13. Responsible for executing the SAR operation, keeping the SMC
informed of the evolution of the operation and coordinating SAR
operations at the scene of the incident when more than one unit is
involved.
On Scene Coordinator (OSC) .
14. A measure of how well a given sensor can detect a certain object
under the prevailing environmental conditions. Sweep width (W).
15. Geographic area delimited through the Search and Rescue
Optimal Planning System (SAROPS), within which the various
actions aimed at the search and/or rescue of ships or people will
be carried out.
Area of interest (AOI).
16. An operation normally coordinated by an MRCC or MRSC, in
which available personnel and means are used to locate people in
danger.
Search.
17. It will be defined as when a SAR case cannot be closed and future
search efforts seem futile, in this case the search can be
temporarily interrupted and resumed if new information is
received.
Active Search Suspended (ACTSUS).
18. Initial acquisition of information, generally obtained from the
reporting source, related to the location and condition of a vessel
or persons on board.
Preliminary Communications (PRECOM).
19. Obtaining information related to the SAR case. It begins if, after
completing the preliminary search, the minimum information
necessary to execute the operation was not obtained. Extended
Communications (EXCOM).
20. Last known position of the search object, corrected for drift. Point,
line or geographic area that is used as a basis in planning the
search.
Datum.
21. Movement on the surface of the sea, caused by the combined
effects of wind and current.
Drift.
22. Condition of decreased mental and physical capacity that affects
the performance of the crew. It occurs due to being exposed to
long periods of effort and stress, which reduces the individual's
ability to respond to an external stimulus. Fatigue.
23. Ship or person that is lost or at risk and towards which the SRU's
location efforts are directed.
Search Object.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
24. Any act or activity undertaken to help or assist a ship or to
safeguard other property that is in danger in navigable waterways
or other waters.
Rescue operation.
25. Document prepared by the SMC that contains the necessary
instructions for the execution of the SAR operation.
Search Action Plan (SAP).
26. Set of existing documents at all levels of the national and
international SAR structures, which detail the objectives,
measures and procedures that support the provision of these
services.
Search and Rescue Plan (SAR Plan) Marine Rescue Plan.
27. Probability that the search object is within the AOI.
Probability of Containment (POC).
28. Probability that the search object will be detected, assuming it will
be within the AOI when the search is performed.
Probability of Detection (POD).
29. Probability of finding the search object, based on the POC and the
POD. POS = POC x POD.
Probability of Success (POS).
30. Geographic location of the start of a search pattern. Search Start
Point (CSP).
31. Operation carried out to recover people in a dangerous situation,
including the provision of medical advice, initial assistance and/or
medical evacuation.
Rescue.
32. Situation of a ship when it has not reached its destination and its
whereabouts are unknown.
Delay.
33. Situation of a ship that has not reported its situation or status
when expected and its whereabouts are unknown.
Not reported.
34. Geo-referenced computer system, used to obtain, through
mathematical models, the behavior of a drifting object and an
optimal SAP to be carried out with the available means. Search
and Rescue Optimal Planning System (SAROPS).
35. It is the term used to indicate the last position obtained or
observed.
Last Known Position (LKP).
36. Situation that must be monitored, which requires more information
in this regard, and the sending of resources is not required.
Uncertainty phase.
37. Situation in which a ship and/or the people on board are facing
difficulties and may need help, but are not in immediate danger.
Alert phase.
38. Situation in which there are justified reasons to believe that a ship
and/or the people on board are threatened by serious and
imminent danger and need immediate assistance.
Danger phase.
39. Portable transmitter of radio frequency signals that allows the
location of the user.
Personal Location Radio Beacon (PLB).
40. Portable radio frequency signal transmitter to activate the SAR
system and allow its location.
Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB).
32
By: AEGV
41. Radio frequency signal transmitter installed on board aircraft,
which allows its location when activated.
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT).
42. Dissemination of a request for support to the maritime community,
in order to assist a ship or people who require it. This message
contains the name of the transmitting station, geographic location
of the requester, and type of support required.
Transmission of Maritime Assistance Request (MARB).
43. Dissemination of the SMC to the maritime community to alert them
about a real or potential emergency situation, or to obtain more
information about it.
Transmission of Urgent Maritime Information (UMIB).
44. Action of extracting or removing a person who requires medical
assistance from a healthcare level higher than that which can be
obtained in the place where they are located.
Medical Evacuation (MEDEVAC).
45. Action of providing remote medical assistance via radio. Request
for Medical support (MEDICO).
46. Due to Mexico's geostrategic position, it has a bioceanic coastline
with more than.
11,000 km of coastline.
47. At this stage, some member of the SAR system is aware that a
real or potential emergency exists. It is short-lived, but it is
important to recognize that you have a SAR case before you start
acting on it. The report can come from the person who is in
danger, from a third party or through an electronic signal.
Alert.
48. Stage in that takes out the obtaining information
additional, evaluation of the incident, determination of the
emergency phasein That finds SMC designation,
transmission of alert messages (UMIB and/or MARB) and the
means to carry out the operation are alerted or deployed.
Initial action.
49. In this stage, an operations plan is developed that includes the
determination of the Datum, delimitation of the AOI, preparation of
the SAP, as well as ground support requirements. For this stage,
the SAROPS is available.
Planning.
50. Stage during which the SAP is provided to the SRU Commander
or Master, the SRUs are coordinated and/or deployed to the
incident area, the OSC is designated, the rescue is carried out
and the survivors are transported. This stage is the physical
execution of a SAR case.
Operations.
51. At this stage the SRU returns to port or continues with its assigned
operations order, the crew prepares the material for the next SAR
case, a final critique is carried out, the case is documented, and
the SAR system is deactivated.
Conclusion of the mission.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
52. The SAR case is in this phase when we are aware
of a situation that must be monitored or that
requires the collection of more information but that
does not imply the deployment of units.
Uncertainty.
53. This classification is assigned to the SAR case
when a vessel or person is experiencing difficulties
and may need assistance, but is not in imminent
danger or does not require an immediate
response.
Alert.
54. This phase is established within the SAR case
when a serious and imminent danger threatens a
ship or person and requires an immediate
response.
Danger.
55. A SAR case is closed when the ship or people who
were in danger has been located, when it has
been determined that the ship or people who were
reported in danger are not actually in danger, or
when a hoax has been confirmed.
Case closed.
56. A SAR case remains pending when all search
efforts have been completed and the ship reported
in emergency or all of the people involved have not
been located.
Pending case.
57. It is the temporary suspension of the SAR case
pending information that supports the initiation of
new searches.
Active search suspended.
58. It is the primary tool used by the SAR services in
Mexico to plan a search operation, developed by
the United States Coast Guard and since 2009 it
has been used in the AM
Search and Rescue Operations Optimal Planning
System (SAROPS).
59. Establishes, based on mathematical models
(Monte Carlo Model), the behavior of an object that
is adrift. It has information to select various objects
considering that each of them derives: equipment
and accessories, people, or type, class, length and
beam of a boat.
Search and Rescue Operations Optimal Planning
System (SAROPS).
60. It allows the SRU to effectively plan its route,
ensures that the SRU search patterns are
separated, and that they begin the search at the
desired point and time. Search starting point
(CSP).
61. Longest section of the track of any pattern. Search
Leg.
62. Connection section between two search legs.
Cross leg (CRP).
63. Direction in which an SRU moves across a
rectangular or square area, usually in the same
direction as legs crossed.
Swept.
33
By: AEGV
64. A coded system of letters and numbers is used.
The first letter indicates the type of pattern to be
made, the second letter denotes the
number/quantity of SRUs that will be used and the
third letter, when it exists, indicates specific
instructions for the SRUs. Designation of search
patterns.
65. They are used when the planned route of the
object to be searched is known. Route tracking is
the first action, it is presumed that the object is on
or near the planned route and can be easily
sighted or the survivors will signal.
Route tracking patterns.-Tracking Line Pattern (T).
66. They are most adaptable to rectangular and
square areas and have straight search legs that
align parallel to the long axis of the search area.
They are used in large, almost flat search areas,
where only the approximate initial position is
known.
Parallel patterns. - Parallel Pattern (P).
67. They are a special type of parallel patterns where
the direction of the sweep is along the long axis,
they are used to cover one end of an area in the
first instance, or to change the direction of the
search legs when the reflection of the sun or the
direction of the tide so require.
Tracing patterns by transverse lines. - Creeping
Line (C).
68. They are used for searching in small areas when
there is any doubt about the location of the
emergency. These offer more uniform coverage
than sector search and can be expanded, starting
at the Datum and extending outwards. Square
search patterns. - Square Pattern (S).
69. They are used when the emergency position is
reliable, or the search area is not very large, and a
concentration of effort is desired in the Datum; the
aircraft sector search areas have a radius of less
than 30 miles, while Maritime vessels use a
maximum radius of 5 miles.
Search patterns by sector. - sector pattern (VS).
70. It is the essential document for the SRU to initiate
the SAR operation, which contains the necessary
and sufficient information for the SRU to execute
the operation and the OSC to coordinate with other
SRUs.
Search Action Plan (SAP – Search Action Plan).
71. This document is in the form of sections containing
the information that is essential to know to
correctly interpret and execute the operation.
Search Pattern Summary.
72. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that refers
to information about the case, description, people
on board, search object, weather forecast, and
additional information. Situation.
73. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that
indicates who the SAP is directed to, which SRU
will execute it, as well as the assigned area and
the start time of the search.
Action.
74. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
contemplates area measurements in MN and
geographical location of the search area vertices.
Search Area.
75. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that
indicates the corresponding area, responsible
SRU, SRU commander, search pattern, direction
of the search leg, height in feet, start coordinates
and search time.
Execution.

76. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that

contains the designation of the SMC, SRU,
instructions for the OSC and SRU, authorization
for the SRU to maneuver and instructions to insert
additional means of obtaining data.
Coordination.

34 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
77. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that indicates the
communications medium to be used for surface-air links,
equipment and primary and secondary frequencies to be used.
Communications.
78. It is a model used to identify dangers, based on the following
considerations: Planning, Complexity of the event,
Communications and Environmental Conditions, assigning certain
points in each section and the total determines the risk level: High,
Medium or Low.
PEACE model.
79. This model allows us in a simple way to consider all the factors
that are involved when evaluating risks and basically refers to
intrinsic issues of the crew, equipment, environmental factors and
complexity of the mission.
GAR model (Green, Amber, Red).
80. This model is used for risk analysis, it is considered when
identifying options, namely: disseminate, transfer, accept, avoid
and reduce. The common denominator is risk and assuming it will
depend on the material, technological and human means.
STAAR model.
81. Surface units that, due to their characteristics, are used par
excellence for SAR operations, are self-righting vessels for
adverse weather conditions.
Textron Marine MLB (47') and Defender Safe Boat (33').
82. Range of the Defender and MLB vessels in a specific search
operation from the coastline to respond to distress calls.
50 miles.
83. Scope of the Defender and MLB vessels to carry out a rescue
operation, where the geographical location of the vessel or person
requiring support is known precisely. 100 miles.
84. They make up the combat fleet, whose main mission is to become
the nation's first defense shield in the event of an offensive from
abroad. In peacetime, they carry out operations such as:
Patrolling, surveillance, maritime traffic control and others ordered
by the High Court. Command.
Warships .
85. They are designed to maintain the rule of law and exercise State
functions in jurisdictional maritime spaces, their weapons systems
are flexible and have adequate means of data acquisition and
communications, they carry out patrol and surveillance operations
with autonomy of up to 30 days, search and interception, maritime
traffic control, information collection and escort.
Ocean Patrols.
86. They are smaller surface units, most of which have reached the
limit of their useful life and their capabilities are limited, they can
perform patrol and surveillance roles with autonomy of up to 7
days, they have the capacity to operate as a mother ship for
patrols. interceptors.
Coastal Patrols.
87. They are units that are characterized by their high speed and
great maneuverability, they efficiently carry out interception and
detention operations of vessels engaged in illicit activities.
Interceptor patrols.
88. They are Surface Units used for logistical missions of very diverse
characteristics and capable of developing support operations for
the civilian population in cases and disaster areas, including
search and rescue operations at the time.
Auxiliary Vessels.
35
By: AEGV
89. They stand out within the capabilities focused on Search and
Rescue operations, they are equipped with an aircraft and an on-
board interceptor, they make up the binomial and trinomial
concept, they allow SAR tasks to be carried out at more than 50
miles.
Ocean Patrols.
9.- DAM 1.3.1.5.9.- NAVAL TRAFFIC CONTROL
MARITIME.
1. It is the key factor in the economies of the countries, its security
constitutes the basic antecedent and most important incentive for
the creation of the Navy.
Maritime trade.
2. Organization created after the 2nd. World War, which was
dedicated to the task of studying the organization and defense of
Maritime Traffic at the Inter-American level.
Inter-American Defense Board (IADB).
3. Treaty signed by the American countries at the Inter-American
Conference for the Maintenance of Peace and Security of the
Continent, held in Rio de Janeiro on September 15, 1947.
Inter-American Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance (TIAR).
4. Year in which the Inter-American Defense Board (IADB)
developed and entered into force the Plan for the Coordination for
the Defense of the International TM (PLANDEFTRAMI).
1959.
5. Year in which the Coordination for the Defense of Inter-American
Maritime Traffic (CODEFTRAMI) is approved and enters into
force, replacing the Plan for the Coordination for the Defense of
the International TM (PLANDEFTRAMI).
1996.
6. Date on which Mexico denounces the Inter-American Treaty of
Reciprocal Assistance (TIAR), its effects ceasing as of September
9, 2004, in reference to art. 56 of the Vienna Convention.
September 6, 2002.
7. Its mission is to coordinate the actions inherent to the
Management, Monitoring and Defense of the CM, fishing and
other economic activities carried out in the waters of the American
countries, in order to contribute to the Security of the TM.
Coordination of Defense of Inter-American Maritime Traffic
(CODEFTRAMI).
8. The objective of this Plan is to ensure the freedom of navigation of
the TM, including its commercial and/or military cargoes, against
any circumstance that represents a threat, in a way that allows
safe arrival.
Coordination of Defense of Inter-American Maritime Traffic
(CODEFTRAMI).
9. It is the Maritime Area of responsibility of the USA Mexico,
Venezuela and Colombia, according to the CODEFTRAMI Plan.
North Atlantic Maritime Area (NAMAN).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
10. It is the Maritime Area of responsibility of the USA Mexico, El
Salvador and Honduras, according to the CODEFTRAMI Plan.
North Pacific Maritime Area (AMPAN).
11. It is the Maritime Area of responsibility of Argentina, Brazil,
Paraguay and Uruguay, according to the CODEFTRAMI Plan.
South Atlantic Maritime Area (AMAS).
12. It is the Maritime Area of responsibility of Chile, Ecuador and Peru,
according to the CODEFTRAMI Plan.
South Pacific Maritime Area (AMPAS).
13. It is defined as the activity of monitoring and controlling the
movements of the TM that contributes to its normal development
as a basic passive measure to provide its safety and protection.
Naval Control of Maritime Traffic (CNTM).
14. Civil component of CODEFTRAMI that includes 3 main aspects:
Supervision of the national policy of the TM, Supervision of port
loading and unloading operations of the WB and Control over the
employment of the BM, their loads and destinations.
Organization of Civil Directorate of Marine transport
(ORGDCTM).
15. Component CODEFTRAMI civil which includes the
Supervision of the national fishing policy and Supervision and
control of fishing activities.
Civil Fisheries Directorate Organization (ORGDCP).
16. Its mission is to promote safe, protected, ecologically rational,
effective and sustainable Maritime Transport through Cooperation.
International Maritime Organization (IMO).
17. Its mission is to support military commanders and TM activities in
times of peace, tension, crisis and conflict through Cooperation,
Guidance, Advice, Assistance and Supervision, as well as
providing guidance, advice or support in military commercial
interests. .
Naval Cooperation and Guidance for Maritime Transport
(NCAGS).
18. Its objective is to develop and implement measures to facilitate the
conduct of military activities at sea, either involving the TM or in
the presence of it.
Naval Cooperation and Guidance Organization for Maritime
Transport (NCAGSORG).
19. Level of the CNTM that develops daily in a current normal
situation in which there are no threats to the TM.
Cooperation (CNTM/C).
20. Level of the CNTM that exists in threat situations where they may
suffer attack, harassment or interference, a Risk Area is
established, the naval authority is not responsible for the safe
transit of the TM.
Guidance (CNTM/O).
21. CNTM level where control of the TM passes into the hands of the
Naval Force, the naval authority is responsible for the safe transit
of the BM, the convoy system is used.
Supervision (CNTM/S).
22. Doctrine where the type of activity generates the type of
appropriate response carried out by the Organization at any level
of crisis, added to the contact with the maritime community, will
benefit Naval commanders to achieve their mission. NCAGS
Doctrine.
23. Doctrine where there are three types of control (Cooperation,
36
By: AEGV
guidance and supervision) that are implemented when there are
traditional, non-traditional or emerging threats to TM, measures
are applied to neutralize and/or mitigate them.
CNTM Doctrine.
24. Provides Military (Naval) Authorities with the development of
maritime transport events presented in the surface panorama.
Naval Cooperation and Guidance for Maritime Transport
(NCAGS).
25. CNTM/NCAGS scenario where shipowners, owners and lessees
are responsible for directing and supervising the movement of
their vessels to comply with commercial requirements, CNTM/C
(Cooperation) control is carried out.
Period of Peace.
26. CNTM/NCAGS scenario where in certain maritime, river, lake or
land routes, there are areas where the TM has its security
threatened, due to being at risk of suffering an attack, harassment
or interference, CNTM/O control (Guidance) is carried out.
Period of Tension or Crisis.
27. CNTM/NCAGS scenario where maritime communication routes
may be under threat of attack, CNTM/S (Supervision) control is
carried out. The ships will be controlled and protected by a Naval
Force, responsible for the safe navigation of the BMs.
Conflict Period (armed/asymmetric).
28. Its objective is to provide channels that facilitate the transfer of
data and the dissemination of information between participating
organizations to achieve coordination between civil and military
authorities, as well as naval command and control when
transferring data and disseminating information.
CNTM/NCAGS Communications.
29. They are for use by CNTM authorities, they are used when
activating CNTM Organization and allow the exchange of various
information and specific orders for CNTM, DCTM and DCP.
CNTM/NCAGS messages.
30. Authority exercised by the National Maritime Administration for the
exercise of sovereignty, protection and maritime security, as well
as the maintenance of the rule of law in the Mexican Marine
Zones.
SEMAR.
31. Where the Control of Maritime Traffic is carried out at the National
Level. CC2, SC2 and MC2.
32. It is responsible for controlling navigation in port areas and
anchorage areas, through the Comprehensive Port
Administrations and the Maritime Traffic Control Centers (CCTM).
Ministry of Communications and Transportation (SCT).
33. It is the responsible authority in Mexico for the CNTM/NCAGS.
Secretary of the Navy (SEMAR).
34. Component of the CNTM/NCAGS carried out by SEMAR through
the Port Captaincy and Maritime Affairs Unit (UNICAPAM) in
maritime sovereignty and security actions for the maintenance of
the rule of law.
National Shipping Authority (NSA).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
35. It is the National Fisheries Authority (NFA) which directs the
implementation of policies, programs and regulations that lead
and facilitate the competitive and sustainable development of the
Country's Fishing and Aquaculture Sector.
SAGARPA through CONAPESCA.
36. It is the Naval Authority responsible for applying CNTM/NCAGS
measures and employing TM protection and defense measures.
The Mexican Navy through JEMGA,
37. It will be designated by member countries of the CODEFTRAMI
when the CNTM/NCAGS organization is established for the
protection of the TM of the American continent, it will have a
General Staff of allied countries, in the event that Mexico is
designated as such, the High Command will exercise the
Authority.
Major Area Commander (MAC).
38. It will be designated by the countries of the AMPAN (USA, Mexico,
El Salvador and Honduras) and the AMAN (USA, Mexico,
Venezuela and Colombia) upon establishing the CNTM/NCAGS
organization at the Regional level, in case Mexico is designated
as such, the High Command will exercise Authority through the
JEMGA.
Area Commander (AC).
39. In Mexico, the JEMGA will designate one per coastline, it will be
exercised by a Higher Command in Chief and will perform
functions as Operational Commander.
Operational Control Authority (OCA).
40. It will be subordinate to the OCA (Operational Control Authority) of
its coast, it will exercise functions through its S-2, S-3, UNAPROP,
SC2/MC2 and corresponding CEREGINA, it may designate a
reporting officer (REPTOF/NU) under its orders to serve the
secondary ports of their jurisdiction.
Naval Maritime Traffic Control Officer (NCSO).
41. It will be carried out by the UNAPROP Commanders, through their
Head of the Traffic Control and Maritime Protection Section, and
must have course and experience in CNTM/NCAGS matters.
Reporting Officer (REPTOF).
42. It will be proposed by the OCA (Operational Control Authority) to
the JEMGA for the procedures before the corresponding
diplomatic authority in both Mexican and foreign ports. Consular
Informant (CONSA).
43. It will be exercised by an Officer designated by the NCAGS ORG
MEXICO, commissioned on board a BM.
NCAGS Liaison Officer/Liaison Officer (LO).
44. It will be exercised by a Naval Officer, designated by the General
Staff of the Navy to join a General Staff of an allied country.
CNTM Liaison Officer (NCSLO).
45. Some of their responsibilities are: establishing policies for Port
Safety and Security operations of the TM and CNTM/NCAGS,
establishing general guidance for the BMs, establishing the type
of CNTM control in each situation, establishing policies for
independent vessels, assigning auxiliary vessels to Naval
Commanders and establish ship-to-shore communications
policies.
MAC's Major Area Commanders.
46. Some of their responsibilities are: conduct CNTM/NCAGS
operations in their area, issue control and routing instructions for
the OCA's, establish convoy programs, dictate fishing policies,
maintain liaison with TM civil authorities, promulgate limited route
systems and establish ship-to-shore communications policies.
Area Commanders (AC's).
47. Some of their responsibilities are: conducting CNTM/NCAGS
37
By: AEGV
operations in their subarea, TM monitoring, registration of BMs of
interest, sailing and routing authority, integrating coastal convoys,
requesting protection measures, maintaining control of NCSOs,
updating the situation sea general and maintain coordination with
NSA allies.
Operational Control Authority (OCA).
48. Conducts the port or anchorage phase, is established in an office
with personnel and material for its task, is responsible for: visiting
and indoctrinating each arriving BM, preparing sailing and routing
orders, preparing and organizing oceanic and coastal convoys,
distributing letters , warnings and alerts, issues sailing messages
and maintains records of TM movements.
Naval Maritime Traffic Control Officers (NCSO).
49. They serve in national or neutral ports, from peacetime or war
situations, in national ports they are Officers subordinate to a
NCSO (CNTM Officer), in neutral ports they are Officers of
another Armed Force or civil state agents. Maritime Traffic
Reporting Officers (REPTOF/UN).
50. They are authorities in neutral ports and of interest, from
peacetime to war situations, they are always undercover Naval
Officers dressed in civilian clothes without showing military
hierarchy, their fusion is to report movements of the TM and
instruct the arriving BMs of their flag.
Consular Maritime Traffic Informants (CONSA).
51. He is an Officer Naval commissioner on board of a BM, for
provide link between the Captain of the ship with the
Naval Authorities.
NCAGS Liaison Officer (NCAGS LO).
52. He is a Naval Officer appointed to serve in the General Staff or
office of an allied NCSO. He is the representative of the interests
of his country in matters pertinent to the CNTM.
CNTM Liaison Officers (NCSLO's).
53. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Having knowledge
of the MDA through its Sections and CC2, coordinating with
UNICAPAM and UIN to support the decision-making of the Naval
Commands regarding CNTM/NCAGS.
Chief of the General Staff of the Navy (JEMGA).
54. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Carry out
monitoring and analysis of the TM under normal or conditions of
interest and share data with the CC2, UNICAPAM, S3 EMGA and
UIN, in order to maintain control and dominance of the MDA.
Intelligence Section (S2 EMGA).
55. His responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Representative of
the JEMGA before international authorities, he is the Local
Commander of Operational Control, liaison and coordination in
civil-military operations (CIMIC), advise the JEMGA in the
Planning and Execution of Operations and coordinate
UNAPROP's activities.
Operations Section (S3 EMGA).
56. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Keeps the MDA
updated, in order to support decision making and coordinate and
share the COP with the S2 EMGA and S3 EMGA. Command and
Control Center (CC2 AM).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
57. Their responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Coordinate and
share information with the S2 EMGA, S3 EMGA and CC2 AM,
plan, organize, direct, control and conduct the exercise of the
AMN in the ZMM in matters of: Safeguarding of human life at sea,
maritime safety, traffic control and navigation safety.
Port Captaincy and Maritime Affairs Unit (UNICAPAM).
58. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Have knowledge of
the MDA through its Sections, UNAPROP's and REGINA's for
decision making.
Naval Commands (Forces, Regions, Zones and Sectors).
59. Their responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: monitoring and
analysis of the TM through the SC2, providing intelligence
products to the S3 and UNAPROP and sharing and updating data
with other Naval Commands for the control and domain of the
MDA.
Intelligence Section (S2).
60. His responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: representative of the
Naval Command before national and international organizations,
advise the Naval Command in the Planning and Execution of
Maritime Operations and Exercises and share and update data
with other Naval Commands for the control and domain of the
MDA.
Operations Section (S3).
61. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Keep the MDA
updated, coordinate and share the COP with the S2 EMGA, S3
EMGA and UNICAPAM, in order to maintain control and mastery
of the MDA.
Command and Control Room and Module (SC2/MC2).
62. Their responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Application of
PMyP measures in effective response to maritime incidents, and
executing their functions in accordance with the respective
Regulations, Ports Law and Navigation and Maritime Commerce
Law.
Unified Center for the Maritime Protection and Port
(CUMAR).
63. Your responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Perform
surveillance, verification, visit, inspection and control actions in
Coast Guard functions within port areas, in support of the exercise
of authority in matters of PMyP.
Naval Port Protection Unit (UNAPROP).
64. His responsibilities in the CNTM/NCAGS are: Provide intelligence
to SEMAR for decision making in the conception, preparation and
conduct of naval operations and share and update data with CC2-
EMGA, S2-EMGA and Naval Commands for control and domain
of the MDA.
Naval Intelligence Unit (UIN).
10.- DAM 1.3.4.3.- GRAL PLAN. SEARCH AND
RESCUE.
1. According to statistics from the EMGA Operations Section, what is
the range with respect to the coast where the highest percentage
of search and rescue cases occur.
20 MN.
2. How many Search, Rescue and Maritime Surveillance stations
were created due to the need to guarantee the physical safety of
people in the Mexican seas and coastlines, their operational range
is limited to 50 NM radio.
29 stations.
3. What is the percentage by which life expectancy decreases in the
38
By: AEGV
first 24 hours after the accident?
80%.
4. It is the most up-to-date computer tool for establishing the DATÚM
and determining a search pattern, considering sea currents and
winds in real time at the incident site.
Search and Rescue Optimal Planning System (SAROPS).
5. Stage of the SAR operation in which emergency information is
received from any person or agency and the Search and Rescue
system is activated.
Knowledge acquisition.
6. Stage of the SAR operation where the incident is evaluated and
the state of emergency is classified, the Mission Coordinator
(SMC) is designated, the means to carry out the operation are
alerted and the Alert messages are broadcast.
Initial action.
7. Stage of the SAR operation where the probable position of the
incident is determined (DATÚM), the search area is delimited, a
Search Plan (Search Pattern) is defined, and ground support is
determined.
Planning.
8. Stage of the SAR operation where the necessary information is
provided to the crews of the SAR units, the appropriate and
necessary units are sent, the coordinator on scene is defined, the
necessary support is provided at the scene, survivors are
transported and presents the corresponding report.
Operations.
9. Stage of the SAR operation where the Mission Coordinator
deactivates the System, the operational units return or continue
with their previously assigned mission, the material for the next
case is prepared and the case is documented.
Conclusion of the Mission.
10. Some of the concepts to consider to determine the search area
are: time and position, size and type of object, drift, weather
conditions and means available to carry out the search.
Uncertainty and probability.
11. It is the probability that the object to be searched is contained in
an area.
Probability of Containment (POC) Probability of Containment.
12. It is the probability that the object will be detected; assuming it was
in the area when searched.
Probability of Detection (POD) Probability of Detection.
13. It is the probability of finding the object you are looking for, it is
based on the contact probabilities for the search areas, as well as
the detection probabilities when searching in those areas.
Probability of Success (POS) Probability of Success.
14. These depend on the severity of the situation in which a vessel or
aircraft is immersed, so they are divided according to the case.
Phases of an emergency.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
15. Emergency phase that is activated when there are doubts about
the safety of a ship or aircraft, due to lack of information related to
its route or position, or due to knowledge of possible difficulties.
Uncertainty Phase (INCERFA).
16. Emergency phase that is activated when there is apprehension
regarding the safety of a ship or aircraft or its personnel, due to
lack of continuous information related to its position or route or
because information has been received that they presented
serious or unavoidable difficulties.
Alert Phase (ALERFA).
17. Emergency phase where immediate help is necessary due to lack
of continuous information related to the position or progress of the
ship or aircraft or because definitive information has been
received that the unit or its personnel are in serious or imminent
danger.
Danger Phase (DISTREFA).
18. This phase is activated for Air Units when no communication has
been received from the aircraft within 30 min. following the
scheduled landing time, time scheduled by air traffic or after an
unsuccessful attempt was made to establish communication with
it.
Uncertainty Phase (INCERFA).
19. This phase is activated for Air Units when no news can be
obtained from the aircraft through new communication
verifications, it has been authorized to land and does not do so
within 5 min. following and when reports of abnormal aircraft
operating conditions are received.
Alert Phase (ALERFA).
20. This phase is activated for Air Units when new attempts to
establish communication are unsuccessful, fuel is considered
exhausted, abnormal operating reports are received and loss of
air contact at sea with probable ditching or forced landing.
Danger Phase (DISTREFA).
21. This phase is activated for Surface Units when after an hour they
have not arrived at their destination point, or they have stopped
transmitting the notification that was expected from them in
relation to their situation or security.
Uncertainty Phase (INCERFA).
22. This phase is activated for Surface Units when attempts to
establish contact with the ship have failed and have not given
results and when information has been received that operational
capacity is diminished.
Alert Phase (ALERFA).
23. This phase is activated for Surface Units when undoubted
information is received that they are in serious danger and need
help, new unsuccessful attempts to establish contact or when
information is received that operational capacity has decreased.
Danger Phase (DISTREFA).
24. It is the detailed and precise data of an emergency collected by
the operator on duty, it is the most critical and relevant information
marked on the "SAR Incident Initial Verification Sheet" such as:
Position and description of the ship, nature of the emergency and
number of people on board.
Data from a SAR incident.
25. It contemplates all the foreseeable risks that the units may
encounter such as: sea conditions, limited visibility, sea conditions
in the bar and dangers in navigation. Mission information.
26. In this procedure, the 7 steps described in the “DECISION
39
By: AEGV
MATRIX FOR RISK ASSESSMENT” are followed, which are
complemented by the PEACE, GAR and STAAR models, which
will facilitate the decision-making of the SMC (Mission
Coordinator).
Risk assessment.
27. It can be the greatest limitation in the performance and capabilities
of SAR units, more than the environment, it is a condition of
mental and physical incapacity in the performance of the crew.
Fatigue.
28. These are the 7 steps of the "DECISION MATRIX TO EVALUATE
RISKS".
Define the mission or task, Identify Dangers, Risk Assessment,
Identify options, Evaluate risks vs. gains, Execute the mission and
Monitor the situation.
29. It is the model that is used to identify risks and its steps are:
Planning, Complexity of the event, Communications and
Environmental conditions.
PEACE model.
30. It is the model used to evaluate risks whose factors are:
Supervision, Planning and preparation, Physical Condition,
Environment, Mission Complexity and Calculate risk. GAR model.
31. It is the model that is used to identify options by making a
comparison of Gain vs. Risk.
STAAR model.
32. They are the most common risk factor that should be taken into
consideration, it is defined as the combination of seas or waves
that exceed 8 feet and/or winds greater than 30 knots.
Adverse weather conditions.
33. Element that will determine the adverse weather conditions in
which your Unit can operate.
Pattern.
34. Wave conditions of this type will be considered to exist at the
mouth of the breakwater when: The waves exceed 8 feet, in the
opinion of the boat skipper there are difficult bar wave conditions
or there is doubt about the present conditions.
Bar/surf wave.
35. It is defined as when the sea breaks intensely on the beach or on
the reefs, when there are difficult conditions of bar waves, a
trained skipper called "Surfer Skipper" will be appointed. SURF.
36. Rescue personnel in a SAR incident could be exposed to this
contagion of pathology that someone from the incident could
have, so the corresponding protective measures must be taken.
Blood Diseases.
37. During a SAR incident, rescue personnel may encounter people
with this disease or some other virus of an epidemic or pandemic
nature, so they must be trained to recognize the symptoms and
provide first attention. Respiratory diseases.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

38. It depends on many factors such as: the DATUM, the size of the
search area, the number and capacity of the SRU (Search Unit),
the environmental conditions and size of the searched object.
Search Pattern.
39. It is the point/position in the search pattern where the SRU starts
the scan.
Search starting point.
40. Extensive stretch along the path of any pattern.
Search leg.
41. Connection between two search legs.
Cross leg.
42. General direction in which an SRU travels through a rectangular or
square area, usually in the same direction as the cross sections.
Swept.
43. Relationship between search effort (Z) and search area (Z/A). For
searches by parallel sweeps, it can be computed as the ratio
between the sweep width W and the separation between paths.
Coverage factor (Coverage factor C).
44. A measure of the area in which a search facility can search
effectively within the limits of the speed, duration and sweep width
of the search.
Search effort (Search effort Z).
45. It is a 3-letter coded system, the first letter is the most significant
characteristic of the pattern, the second the number of SRU's and
the third designates specialized patterns or specific instructions.
Designation of Search Patterns.
46. They are used when the planned route of the wanted object is
known, it is the first action, since it is presumed that the wanted
object is close to the trajectory, and that it can be easily sighted or
the survivors will signal.
Route tracking patterns (Tracking Line Pattern T).
47. They are most adaptable to rectangular and square areas and
have straight search legs that are usually aligned parallel to the
long axis of the search area, they are generally used in large,
almost flat search areas, where only the approximate initial
position is known. .
Parallel patterns. (Parallel Pattern P).
48. They are parallel patterns where the direction of the transverse
tracking is along the long axis, contrary to the usual parallel
pattern and are used to cover one end of an area in the first
instance, or to change the direction of the search legs when the
reflection of the sun or the direction of the tide so requires.
Tracing patterns by transverse lines. (Creeping Line C).
49. They are used for searching in small areas when there is any
doubt about the location of the emergency, they offer more
uniform coverage than the search by sector and can be
expanded, they start in the DATÚM and extend outwards. Square
search patterns. (Square pattern S).
Search Action Plan (SAP).
52. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that will include a brief
description of the event, position, time, number of people on
board, search objects, including the amount and types of survival
equipment, weather forecast and search means at the scene of
the accident.
Situation.
53. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that contains information
on size and delimitation using geographic coordinates.
Search areas.
54. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that contemplates the
assignment of means to their corresponding zone within the
search area, configuration of the search pattern, direction of
movement, search start points (CSP), and altitude in case of
aircraft employment.
Execution.
55. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that contemplates the
designation of the Mission Coordinator (SMC) and the On-Scene
Coordinator (OSC), time of the search means at the scene of the
emergency, separation between routes and factors of desired
coverage, instructions to the OSC (On Scene Coordinator).
Coordination.
56. Section of the Search Action Plan (SAP) that contemplates the
corresponding communications plans.
Communications.
57. They are the backbone of the Search and Rescue Coordination
Centers (MRCC), and their effectiveness is a mandatory
requirement for the success of SAR operations.
SAR Communications.
58. They have a legal obligation to respond to any distress call and
provide coordination of assistance where needed, in order to
Safeguard human life at sea.
All SEMAR Units and Establishments.
59. They are derived from the strategy of the Naval Commands to
fulfill their tasks and functions, there are the Regional (Naval
Region) and the Local (Zones and Sectors), they must be
prepared considering the most detailed requirements that allow
establishing reliable and fast communications in any operational
and climatological condition.
Communications plan.
60. International Distress and Call Frequency in Radiotelegraphy
(Morse).
500 KHZ (MF).
61. International Distress and Radiotelephony Call Frequency, will be
used for distress and safety traffic in radiotelephony using the J3E
emission class.
2182 KHZ (HF).

50. They are used when the emergency position is reliable, or the
search area is not very large, and a concentration of effort in the
DATÚM is desired. Such a pattern resembles the spokes of a
bicycle wheel and is used to cover a circular search area.
Search patterns by sector. (Sector Pattern S).

51. Each Coordinating Center or Subcenter will prepare detailed plans

and instructions for SAR operations for its area of responsibility,
taking into account its own resources and available support. It is a
plan that consists of 5 parts: Situation, Search Area, Execution,
Coordination and Communications .

40 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
62. It will be used for the Relief and Safety traffic
Radiotelephony can be used by aircraft to communicate with
maritime mobile service stations for relief and safety purposes,
including search and rescue operations. Its use as a working
frequency is not authorized.
4125KHz (HF).
63. It is used for Distress and Safety traffic in Radiotelephony, it is also
used in communications by coast stations and the stations of the
simplex sideband radiotelephony units.
6215.5KHz (HF).
64. It is used for Distress and Safety traffic in radiotelephony. 16420
KHz (HF).
65. Frequency whose channel 13 is used in VHF ship-to-ship
communications related to Navigation Safety. 156.650 MHz (VHF).
66. Frequency whose channel 16 is used for Distress and Safety traffic
in radiotelephony. Likewise, it can only be used by aircraft for safety
purposes.
156.8 MHz (VHF).
67. Emergency radiotelephony frequency for joint/combined military
forces and international transmission frequency for radio direction
finding of lifeboats, Emergency Locators (ELT) and emergency
situation indicating radio beacons (EPIRB).
243.0 MHz (VHF).
68. Civil Band channel 9. The Mexican Navy is not required to monitor
this frequency.
27.065 MHz (VHF).
69. It can be used for communication between mobile stations
participating in coordinated Search and Rescue operations and
between such stations and ground stations participating in the
operations.
3023 KHz (HF) and 5680 KHz (HF).
70. It is the auxiliary frequency of the aeronautical emergency frequency
of 121.5 MHz, used by aeronautical mobile service stations and
other mobile and land stations that participate in coordinated search
and rescue operations.
70.1 MHz (VHF).
71. Frequency whose channel 6 in the marine band is used for
communication between the stations of surface and air units that
participate in coordinated Search and Rescue operations.
156.3MHz. (VHF).
72. It is the Marina band channel of “Digital Selective Call”.
Channel 70 (VHF).
73. They should be aimed at eliminating delays and errors in the
transmission and retransmission of information that cause loss of
vital time for searching and locating people in danger.
Communications.
74. It is used to collect incident information, they contain the minimum
information that must be gathered for each situation and its mission
is to reduce the uncertainty of the location and status of survivors.
These sheets can only be modified with authorization from S-3
EMGA.
Checklist formats.
75. It consists of contacting various stations and organizations in order
to obtain information related to the location and status of a vessel or
aircraft for which arrival or position information has not been
received.
Preliminary communications search (PRECOM).
76. These are specific activities for the MRCC (Regional Maritime
41
By: AEGV
Rescue Coordination Centers - Regions) and MRSC (Maritime
Rescue Sub-Coordination Centers - Zones and Sectors).
- Keep Search and Rescue Plans updated,
regional and local.
- Have the necessary information on logistical facilities that may
be required in SAR operations.
- Coordinate with the Port Captaincy, if necessary
necessary, of the Maritime Traffic Control in the area.
- Maintain constant link with ENSAR for the proper
coordination of SAR operations.
77. These are specific activities for Naval Search and Rescue Stations
(ENSAR).
- Provide corresponding support when you receive a call
and inform the MRCC or MRSC.
- Maintain an updated directory of consignees of
ships, cooperatives, port authorities, fishing authorities,
consular authorities, international maritime search and rescue
organizations.
- Gather as much information as possible about
an incident, requiring the corresponding forms.
- When assigned as SAR Mission Coordinator, carry out the
necessary actions for the planning, execution and monitoring
of operations.
78. It is when the search object(s) are located, assistance to the search
objects is completed and no other SAR issue is apparent, in this
case no further action will be necessary or contemplated by the
Navy.
Case closed.
79. This term will refer to an open case in which the objects of the
search have not yet been located and all search efforts have not yet
been completed.
Pending case.
80. It will be defined as when a SAR case cannot be closed and future
search efforts appear futile, the search may be discontinued,
however, the SAR case will remain open.
Active search suspended (ACTSUS).
81. It will be when another agency coordinates the SAR mission (P. e.g.
USCG) and
Navy units are participating in the efforts, all efforts will cease when
the Navy mission coordinator suspends the case.
Suspension by other SAR authorities.
82. They serve as support for decision making regarding the conclusion
of search missions and rescue and are the
survival at air and water temperatures.
Considerations for the suspension of OPSARs.
83. When the deadline to maintain the search has passed 96 hours,
when the EMGA order is received, when other state or municipal
authorities participate and continue the search after 96 hours and
when there is no information or reasons that justify continuing the
search.
Criteria for changing the status of a SAR operation.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

84. The Mission Coordinator (SMC) will order the units to carry out the 96. International term for evacuating patients. It can be extremely
rescue or provide other assistance as necessary, notifying the dangerous for both (patient and crew) due to the severe
OSC or SMC: number and name of the environmental conditions at sea. MEDEVAC.
survivors, additional help and period of
destiny of the 97. It is called Marine Assistance Request Broadcast (MARB) and is
Units that carried out the rescue. carried out with the purpose of providing assistance to a vessel
Fruitful search. that requires support, but is not in danger.
Radio broadcast of request for maritime assistance.
85. It occurs when there is no longer a reasonable possibility of finding
survivors and it is considered that the application of additional
search efforts will not have a significant percentage of success 11.- DAM 1.4.- NAVAL LOGISTICS.
and the search will be ended. (FIRST PART)
Unsuccessful search.
1. It is the planning and execution process to provide the armed
86. The objectives are to establish the physical presence of a rescue forces with the means in adequate quantity, quality, time and
helicopter at any point in the sea within 25 NM from the Mexican place, to fulfill the mission.
coast in a maximum of 60 minutes. and Area units in 75 min. Logistics.
Response times.
2. They are the means on which logistics acts and those that are
87. The Operational Commander is the SMC (Mission Coordinator)
needed to sustain the forces.
who is usually in the best position to evaluate the circumstances of
Personnel, Material and Services.
a particular case and make the best decision to safeguard human
life at sea. 3. Logistical principle that must be provided to operational units and
Responsibility of the action. establishments according to the role they play and the importance
of their effort.
88. Situation in the one that must give an immediate response,
Adequate support.
provided by any unit of the Mexican Navy, coordinated by the
SMC (Mission Coordinator) who must use all available assistance 4. Logistical principle that ensures the existence and conservation of
resources. the means of logistical support, the tasks and the functioning of
Imminent danger. the system, preventing them from being destroyed, nullified or
89. Situation when there are volunteers available who can provide disorganized by enemy action.
support, however, if their experience is unknown the SMC Safety.
(Mission Coordinator) must closely monitor the support provided. 5. Logistical principle that states that logistical support must be
Worrying situation without conflict. provided from the top down and from the rear to the front.
The impetus of the rearguard.
90. It occurs when the safety of people is not at risk and the
assistance of a commercial firm is requested for rescue activities 6. Logistical principle that is the security that you will have the
and when an AM unit decides to tow a vessel in trouble. necessary support at the time, quantity, quality and place that your
Guide to principles in non-hazardous cases. plans require it.
The confiability.
91. The AM must emphasize it in maritime activities by coordinating
actions with all those institutions and organizations that make up 7. Logistical principle that states that support must be available at the
the maritime community in the areas of jurisdiction of the naval right time, in the right place and in the necessary quality and
commands, with information that allows a crew member to be well quantity.
prepared before setting sail. The opportunity.
Prevention.
8. Logistical principle that states that the resources for support must
92. In the development of SAR operations, it is possible that the crew be adapted to the needs of the operation and this in turn is
members refuse to abandon the vessel even when their life is in adjusted to the available resources.
danger. In the first instance, the personnel on the scene will try to The balance.
convince the crew members to abandon the vessel, subsequently
the decision to force a civilian crew member to abandon their 9. Logistics principle where support must be provided through
vessel is the responsibility of the SAR Mission Coordinator (SMC) centralized planning and decentralized execution, implies
and/or the On-Scene Coordinator (SC). delegating authority to subordinates in charge.
Forced ship evacuation. The authority.
93. The responsibility for these activities in port facilities will be that of
10. Logistics principle that means something not complex or
the Port Captaincy, the AM should not carry out these operations
entangled, it applies to the planning, direction and execution of
except to save life, nor will it carry them out alone on commercial
logistics activities, it involves the elimination of unnecessary steps.
ships or port facilities except in support.
The simplicity.
Firefighting activities.
94. Responsibility for the navigation and safety of the ship is the
responsibility of the ship's captain. The operational units of the AM
can pass information on navigation aids, tidal updates, warnings to
seafarers, lists of lighthouses, etc. Assistance to Seafarers
(Direction and Navigation).
95. It is an international term that means passing medical information
via radio to a requesting ship because it does not have medical
personnel on board.
DOCTOR.
42 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
11. Logistical principle that seeks to ensure that the necessary
resources are used to support any operation, dosed to the extent
required to ensure the fulfillment of the mission.
The economy.
12. They are the 7 Logistics Functional Elements.
Supply, Maintenance, Personnel, Health, Transportation, Facilities
and Evacuation.
13. It is responsible for solving the problems generated by logistics in
the operational field, which must have infrastructure to carry out
logistics functions. Territorial Commands .
14. It is the basic function on which the efficiency of logistical support
rests and consists of providing, equipping, sustaining and allowing
the Units and Establishments to operate with the necessary
material, equipment and services.
Catering.
15. Logistics Functional Element whose basic tasks are to consolidate
and process the established requirements program, calculate the
net acquisition and acquire material and equipment for
consumption and fixed assets, scheduling their distribution.
Catering.
16. It is the Functional Classification of the Material.
Equipment, Spare Parts and Supplies and Consumer Goods.
17. It is the set of effects or items that are physical units that allow a
specific, technical or tactical function to be fulfilled (turbines,
engines, weapons, etc.) and that cannot be transformed by the
user.
Equipment.
18. They are those effects integrated by parts of equipment, auxiliary
elements or protective materials that are required as
complement to keep equipment and systems in good condition
and They are: pieces of
respect, auxiliary devices,
tools and clothing and household items.
Spare parts and supplies.
19. They are part of the Spare Parts and Equipment, they constitute
the type of supply of the largest quantity of items, the most
important and also the most complicated.
Pieces of respect.
20. They are those effects of rapid deterioration and frequent
replacement; Their useful life is fungible, they lose their original
properties with frequent use, their cost is low and they are easy
and quick to obtain. Consumer Items.
21. It is the Operational Classification of the Material.
Subsistence, Consumer Items, Equipment and Spare Parts, Fuels
and Lubricants, Respects and Ammunition and Pyrotechnics.
22. Operational Classification of the Material that are inputs or
consumer services within a constant periodic regime in all
circumstances (food, fresh, dry, frozen, water). CATEGORY I.-
Subsistence.
23. Operational Classification of the Material that constitutes the
elements of the organic staff of the forces and organizations
(vehicles, weapons, household goods, clothing, equipment).
CATEGORY II.- Consumer items, equipment and spare parts.
24. Operational Classification of the Material which are gasoline,
Diesel, airplane gas, jet fuel, oils, greases, etc.
43
By: AEGV
CATEGORY III.- Fuels and Lubricants.
25. Operational Classification of Material that are items not included in
another classification and do not appear as an organic provision
of a Unit.
CATEGORY IV.- Respects.
26. Operational Classification of Material that refers to all types of
Ammunition and pyrotechnic elements.
CATEGORY V.- Ammunition.
27. It is a structured set of bodies or areas that coordinately execute
the 8 Development Functions: Cataloging, Acquisition, Storage,
Material Accounting, Inventory Control, Transportation, Delivery
and Disposal.
Supply System.
28. It is the criterion of the Supply System that is to exercise inventory
control through a Central Body with the purpose of unifying the
general supply process.
Centralization in management.
29. It is the criterion of the Supply System that consists of developing
the practical tasks of supplying the Units, that is, carrying out the
physical delivery of the materials for their use. Decentralization in
execution.
30. It will adhere to the names integrated and organized in the Catalog
of Acquisition of Goods and Services (CABS).
Cataloging.
31. It is achieved through an inventory control system, verifying stocks
to determine needs and raise requirements.
Forecasting of needs.
32. Establishes and organizes different storage levels or steps, in
various geographical points to meet the requested requirements.
Setting levels.
33. Schedule and prioritize requirements in order of importance
considering their functionality.
Acquisition management.
34. It is to provide the Organization and Function Manuals, Directives
and Guidelines to establish a Distribution System that allows the
supply of the required materials and the effective and efficient
administration of the supply, as well as creating steps that serve
as auxiliaries for timely delivery. Supply System Tasks.
35. Type of Supply that is to supply, without prior order, all the
materials necessary to fulfill a mission.
Automatic.
36. Type of Supply that is executed through a request submitted by
the user in accordance with the Manual of Procedures for the
Determination of Needs of Naval Units and Establishments.
On request.
37. Type of Supply where the supported forces or organizations
(consumers) must move to the resupply points.
By distribution point.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
38. Type of Supply where the upper echelon will deliver the required
support to the consumer wherever they are.
Due to the location of the Unit.
39. They are the 8 Development Functions of the Logistics Supply
System.
Cataloging, Procurement, Warehousing, Material Accounting,
Inventory Control, Transportation, Delivery and Disposal.
40. Supply Development Function which is the description,
classification, nomination and numbering of each item, in order to
be identified by a single name, a single number and a single
description.
Cataloging.
41. Supply Development Function, which is the executive action
through which the material is obtained in quantities and
presentations that satisfy the user's needs.
Acquisitions.
42. Supply Development Function which is the accumulation and
protection of materials and supply items in the necessary quantity
for subsequent distribution.
Storage.
43. Supply Development Function that constitutes the basis for
maintaining strict control of material stocks from the obtaining
process to its storage.
Material Accounting.
44. Supply Development Function, which is the most important,
consists of the control of stocks, both actual and in the process of
obtaining.
Inventory Control.
45. Supply Development Function that represents moving the required
material from the production or procurement centers to the
accumulation points (depots or warehouses) to make it reach the
end user.
Transport.
46. Supply Development Function which is the link function between
storage and consumer units through the transfer of items from the
supplier to the consumer.
Delivery.
47. Supply Development Function that refers to the method used to
exclude that material that, due to irreparable breakdowns,
technological evolution, excess stock, wear, or any other cause, is
unusable.
Elimination.
48. It is called the structured set of organs that coordinately develop
each of the 8 Supply functions.
Supply system.
49. This supply level is the authorized quantity that must be found in
the warehouses of the units or departments, which must be equal
to the minimum level plus the operational level.
Maximum.
50. This supply level is the authorized quantity that must be found in
the warehouses of the units or departments that must grow and
be considered a reserve and will be consumed in any unforeseen
event.
Minimum.
51. This supply level is the amount necessary for the maintenance of
the units and is determined by the frequency and time of
operation.
44
By: AEGV
Operational.
52. It is the set of tasks and logistical methods necessary to entertain,
repair, restore and recover equipment, weapons, materials and
supplies.
Maintenance Logistics Function.
53. It is the set of management and execution bodies prepared to
coordinate, direct, supervise and manage the resources
necessary for the development and execution of the directives,
standards, techniques and procedures that Maintenance requires.
Maintenance Logistics Service.
54. Contribute to the operation of units and establishments, supervise
functions and levels of responsibility and coordinate, direct and
manage the necessary resources in terms of maintenance.
Functions of the Logistics Maintenance Service.
55. It is the set of tasks and logistical methods for the development of
actions aimed at preserving equipment, weapons, materials and
supplies in optimal conditions.
Maintenance Activities.
56. Maintenance Echelon aimed at preserving materials, weapons and
equipment in serviceable conditions, through the necessary care,
to prevent and/or reduce failures such as: reviews, verifications,
diagnoses, cleaning and adjustments.
First Step (Preventive).
57. Maintenance Echelon that handles repairs that correspond to
operating breakdowns and/or small wear that do not require
special tools or means, is the responsibility of the Units and
territorial commands, is synonymous with “first degree
maintenance.”
Second Step (Corrective).
58. Maintenance Echelon that carries out repairs of breakdowns
and/or deep material wear, the resolution of which requires
technical operations carried out by technical or specialized
personnel, is the responsibility of the Support Groups,
Maintenance Centers and Naval Armament.
Third Step (Restorative or modifying).
59. Maintenance Echelon that deals with serious breakdowns that
affect operation and require reconstructions, restorations,
modernization and/or modifications, it is the responsibility of the
Repair Centers and Shipyards, it is synonymous with “third
degree maintenance”.
Fourth Step (Recovery).
60. This type of maintenance is provided by specialized factories or
workshops of private initiative.
Fifth Step.
61. Type of Maintenance that consists of returning the operating and
service conditions to the equipment, weapons, materials and
supplies resulting from accidental breakdowns or caused by
replacing parts, mechanisms and implements.
Corrective maintenance.
62. Logistics Functional Element consisting of support organizations
that are operated by high quality and well-trained personnel from
the active and reserve forces, together with the civil sector, its
function is to provide administrative and personnel support to
keep combatant forces in functioning.
Staff.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
63. Personnel Development Function that consists of gathering
information that allows us to know the personnel needs to
maintain the operating capacity of the operational and
administrative organizations.
Maintenance of Cash.
64. Personnel Development Function which is the personnel
instructed or trained in a specialty intended to fill a vacancy
produced in a combat roll.
Replacement.
65. Personnel Development Function that consists of organizing and
using the available human resources seeking an adequate
balance between what is required of them and what they can
provide. Personnel Administration.
66. Personnel Development Function that aims to regulate the
conduct of military and civilian personnel in their rights and
obligations as members of the Armed Forces and as individuals
exercising their citizenship.
Discipline, Law and Order.
67. Personnel Development Function that determines the logistical
responsibility for prisoners of war, corresponding to their
collection, registration, maintenance, use and/or evacuation.
Prisoners of war.
68. Personnel Development Function that consists of achieving and
preserving behavior that allows you to face the rigors of any
situation with a balanced mental attitude.
Maintenance of Morale.
69. Personnel Development Function which are those activities of
search, collection, identification, temporary disposal and/or
evacuation of the remains of own and enemy personnel.
Obituary.
70. Personnel Development Function that seeks to achieve maximum
performance of civilian personnel through compliance with legal
bases and general procedures.
Civilian personnel.
71. Personnel Development Function that includes the activities
carried out by commanders to maintain relations between military
forces, authorities and the population in their own, allied or
occupied territory.
Civil Affairs and Military Government.
72. Its basic function is to provide human resources to the structures
of the Forces and Services, in sufficient quantity and adequate
quality, according to the corresponding
requirements.
Functional Personnel Element.
73. It consists of quantitatively and qualitatively specifying the
personnel necessary to fulfill the assigned task. Determination of
Personnel requirements.
74. It is the method to determine personnel needs.
Organic Form.
75. It is the transformation of requirements into suitable means,
quantitatively and qualitatively appropriate in the appropriate place
and time, carried out through: Mobilization, Recruitment and
Instruction.
Obtaining Personnel.
45
By: AEGV
76. It occurs in all its scope in times of war or emergency, in times of
peace it is reduced to setting the quotas for each replacement.
Mobilization.
77. It consists of the executive action of gathering the personnel that
must satisfy the human resources needs defined by the
command.
Recruitment.
78. It consists of the transformation of recruited personnel into military
personnel, suitable for war.
Instruction.
79. It is the provision of personnel to destinations, in accordance with
quantitative and qualitative requirements, at the appropriate time
and place. This is the most logistically delicate phase, especially
in time of war.
Staff distribution.
80. They are the Organic functions of Personnel Distribution.
Personnel classification, job assignment and personnel
administration.
81. They are the Operational functions of Personnel Distribution.
Replacement of casualties and staff rotation.
82. Linked to personnel reserves, it represents a numerical forecast
that must be carried out at the same time as the Determination of
Needs.
Replacement of casualties.
83. It is a consequence of the growing possibility of operational naval
units remaining at sea. A ship with great autonomy must have two
sets of personnel.
Staff turnover.
84. Logistic Functional Element that consists of attending to the
conservation and improvement of the state of physical and mental
efficiency of military human potential using medical techniques.
Health .
85. They are the Organic Health functions of a static and conservation
nature that face problems of a preventive nature.
Preventive Medicine, Prophylaxis, Health Selection, Health
Education, Research and Health Information.
86. They are the Health Operational functions of a dynamic and
transformative nature that are aimed at solving problems caused
by the 2 disturbing agents: disease and enemy action.
Rehabilitation, Evacuation and Hospitalization.
87. It is a specialized body that is in charge of directing healthcare
activity as a whole and executing functional activities.
Health Service.
88. They are the executive bodies of Health that are the "First step of
rehabilitation", they are the ships' infirmaries and the first aid
facilities adopted by the Internal Security organization of the ships.
Onboard organs.
89. It is the second level of the Organization of a Health Service, they
are located on land in the Naval Bases where the hospitalization
and recovery centers are located.
Organs on land.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

90. Their primary mission is to care for active military personnel. In 103. Responsible for planning, organizing, directing and supervising
addition, they are assigned two missions in peacetime: "Social Health
Care" for the families of military personnel and "Support for the
Civilian Population in Cases of Disasters."
Health Service and Technical Staff.
91. Health Service Material that is made up of all the instruments
necessary for the execution of surgical operations, and may be light 104. Phase of the Health Logistics Cycle that are the means to be able
or high performance.
Surgical material.
92. Health Service Material that is made up of medications, individual
impediments, bandages, tourniquets, medicines and materials used 105. Phase of the Health Logistics Cycle where the needs that
in the healing of patients. Healing material.
93. Health Service material that includes the necessary means to
guarantee the movement of patients within the evacuation chain,
including individual material and vehicles.
Evacuation material.
94. It has the responsibility of planning, coordinating and supervising the
logistics action, so that the subordinate echelons receive the
financial, human and material resources in the Health Logistics field.
Fourth Section (S-4) of the General Staff.
95. In the logistical field of Health, it transforms decisions into directives,
instructions and orders, it proposes the core personnel of the health
bodies and services to cover the organic forms of the health 108. Characteristic of the Naval Health Units which is the
echelons.
First Section (S-1) of the General Staff.
96. In the Health logistics field, it provides intelligence information, which
is necessary to determine health threats that affect the development 109. Characteristics of the Naval Health Units where the service
of operations.
Second Section (S-2) of the General Staff.
97. In the logistical field of Health, it provides the elements of judgment to
the Command for making decisions in the planning of naval
operations where it is necessary to provide medical support.
Third Section (S-3) of the General Staff.
98. Level of the Health Logistics Element where support is materialized
through coordination of the General Staff and the Chief Officer's
Office through the creation of health echelons and obtaining material
and human resources.
Strategic Level.
99. Level of the Health Logistics Element, where it is up to the Territorial
Commands to solve the problem, they have the means to satisfy the
needs generated by the operations.
Operational Level. 112. Characteristic of the Naval Health Units that exist for
100. Level of the Health Logistics Element, where the health service units
are able to fulfill their mission fit satisfactory
based in: Mobility,
Flexibility, Economy of forces, Command Support, Technical and
tactical preparation, Vulnerability and Recovery. 113. Characteristics of the Naval Health Units that must
Tactical Level.
101. It has the responsibility of managing human, financial and material
resources, command appointments and authorizing movements,
naval education and health programs, draft Annual Budget and
exercising authorized budget.
Administrative Office.
the medical care provided, execution of medical programs,
manage and administer the assigned human, material and
financial resources, Assess cost-benefit to determine subrogation
and authorize medical care for the non-entitled population.
Medical Echelons (hospitals and sanatoriums).
perform their tasks, human, material and financial resources are
required, it is detected from medical care. Determination of
Needs.
have been identified as valid are transformed into media,
destined for the health stages.
Obtaining.
106. Phase of the Health Logistics Cycle is where the
resources to the end user, the sanitary echelons distribute them
between the sanitary sections, aid stations and nests for the
wounded.
Distribution.
107. Characteristic of Naval Health Units which is speed
with which it can move with its elements from one point to
another, unfold, operate, fold its means and move again. Mobility.
ability to adapt to sudden changes in the situation and is
achieved by maintaining adequate reserves.
Flexibility.
It should not establish a greater number of facilities than
necessary, but rather make adequate and balanced use of the
means of action.
Economy of Forces.
110. Characteristics of the Naval Health Units that should give you
to the service the precise reports on the needs, and the
appropriate authority to overcome the obstacles that arise,
guaranteeing its proper functioning.
Command Support to the Service.
111. Characteristic of Naval Health Units that is not
The technical preparation is not enough to estimate a situation
and speed up the planning, but also to have a tactical preparation
that, together with the first, provides an adequate service.
Technical and Tactical Preparation.
If you do not have more protection elements than international
conventions, you must take advantage of masking so that you are
protected to the greatest extent possible.
Vulnerability.
To be based on a criterion of savings and care, specialized
personnel require long periods of preparation and their material is
expensive and difficult to obtain.
Recovery.

102. Has the responsibility of determining health conditions

physical and mental health of military personnel, health
educational programs, promoting medical teaching and research,
health care measures, health advice. Deputy General Directorate
of Naval Health.

46 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. BY: AEGV
114. Health Development Functions that aim to maintain a high level of 127. It presents two conceptual and methodological aspects: Epidemic
health for naval personnel, are static functional in nature and have State and Methodological Aspect, every epidemiologist will give
a preventive purpose. the diagnosis of the epidemic with the greatest possible urgency.
Organic. Recognition of a Pandemic .

115. Organic Function of Health, which are techniques to prevent 128.

You must obtain the history of the disease, establish
disease and promote health, is not a specialty, it is an aspect of
expectations, study current cases and demonstrate the existence
general medicine: prevention, diagnosis,
of a monthly upward deviation in order to apply control measures.
treatment and rehabilitation.
Epidemiological surveillance system.
Preventive medicine.

116. Organic Health Function that is linked to preventive medicine, 129.

It is the common short-term geographically limited, prolonged and
consists of the application of the rules of preventive medicine and
geographically extensive mass exposure, followed by secondary
the control of the process in defined cases, it is of greater
cases and prolonged epidemic of multiple exposure.
importance in infectious diseases.
Epidemic outbreak mechanisms.
Prophylaxis.

117. Organic Health Function whose objective is to ensure that military 130.
personnel have the appropriate physical and mental conditions for
the activity that each one must perform, applies medical
examinations for entry and promotions.
Health Selection.
118. Organic Health Function that teaches people how to live in a 131.
healthy state, is one of the pillars of preventive medicine and health
promotion, tries to help individuals achieve health through their own
behavior and effort . Health Education.
It is the administrative-technical organization, clinical diagnosis,
verification of its existence, designation of the responsible team,
preliminary analysis of cases, distribution of the epidemic, search
for cases, source of spread, etiology and analysis of the facts.
Stages of an emergency.
Health Selection whose purpose is to verify the fitness and
physical-athletic condition according to the age of the individual,
to perform the activities required within the military environment.
Physical capacity exam.

132. Sanitary Selection, which is the set of methods and techniques

119. Organic Health Function that aims to develop, carry out evaluation psychological in order to know your personality profile, skills,
tests and surveillance to improve the operations and performance interests and personal resources for the performance of your
of naval personnel and the health of entitled personnel. activities.
Medical Investigation . Evaluation of the psychological profile.

133. Health Selection that determines if the individual is

120. Organic Health Function that must be reported to the command and clinically healthy to enter the Institution, participate in promotion,
disseminated to the lower health echelons, will be useful in the degree adaptation, annual newspapers and selection of personnel
planning processes and decision making. for courses.
Health Information. Medical evaluation.

121. They include periodic health examination, application of specific 134.

immunization, laboratory tests and dentistry.
Common methods for disease prevention.
122. Notification of births anddeaths, statement of
communicable diseases, report detected sanitation and social
health problems.
Activities to help health programs.
123. They are the study, etiology and epidemiology of health and
disease, Educating the individual and the family and Medical control
of the health of the individual.
Techniques of preventive medicine and health promotion.
They are variations in the population, conditions of the social
124.
environment, human interventions in the environment and the
existence of pathogenic agents.
Factors that intervene in the evolution of a disease.
In the recognition of a pandemic, it corresponds to a
125.
moment in the social history of a disease in a community.
Epidemic state.
Physical capacity test that is defined as the maximum volume of
oxygen that the body captures and uses during physical activity.
Aerobic capacity.
135. Physical capacity exam that promotes the learning and acquisition
of good postural habits, the correct alignment of the hips and the
proper functioning of the lumbar spine.
Strength and resistance of the abdominal muscles.
136. Physical capacity test whose analysis allows the early detection of
back problems, a factor that contributes to many disabilities and
discomforts.
Strength and flexibility of the trunk extensor muscles.
137.
Physical ability test which is the push-up test (push-ups), modified
push-up test and the suspended arm push-up test (pull-ups).
Strength and resistance of the muscles of the upper limbs.
138. Physical capacity test that is applied through forward trunk flexion
and shoulder extension tests. Flexibility.

126. In the recognition of a pandemic, it refers to the diagnosis of the 139. Evaluation that is carried out on all people that they
epidemic and the control measures to stop the emergency that request
always means an epidemic. enter the Mexican Navy.
Methodological aspect. External selection.

47 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
140. They are evaluations carried out on in-serviceSTUDY
personnel
GUIDEin order
⁃ SPECIFIC
155. KNOWLEDGE
Medical evaluation with the in order to determine
MARINE
to know whether or not they meet the FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT
requirements to enter TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
structural balance apparatus. otorhinolaryngological, hearing
training and specialization courses. PFAM – 2 0 2 2. Otorhinolaryngology. and
Internal Selection.
141.
Evaluation done according to the grade, the evaluation methods, 156. Medical evaluation in order to verify if there are conditions or
tests, activities that provide more information are added. injuries that require surgery or when these limit the capacity of the
Complementary evaluation. staff.
General Surgery.
142. They are clinical studies in order to know the emotional stability
157. Medical evaluation to establish problems in internal organs and
and the adaptive capacity to the military environment due to
pathological or physiological diseases.
having suffered some maladjustment.
Internal Medicine.
Special evaluations.
158. Medical evaluation to determine aspects of eye health, eye
143. Psychological characteristic that are skills and qualities that an
individual possesses to solve any type of problem. Intelligence diseases and visual disorders.
quotient (IQ). Ophthalmological.

144. Psychological characteristic that is the ability of an individual to 159. Medical evaluation to check for obvious congenital or acquired
face adverse situations that allow him or her to adequately malformations in the mouth, salivary glands and
achieve an activity or goal. temporomandibular joint.
Frustration tolerance. Dental.

145. 160.
Psychological personality disorder due to antisocial behavior. Medical evaluation to determine diseases specific to women.
Psychopathology. Gynecological.

146. Psychological disorder characterized by distortions of thinking and 161. Medical evaluation to observe structural, functional alterations
perception due to blunted effects and and in the electrical conduction system of the heart.
inappropriate. Cardiological.
Schizophrenia.

Psychological disorder characterized by behaviors that 11.- DAM 1.4.- NAVAL LOGISTICS. (SECOND PART)
147.
transgresses socially established norms and rules and includes Educational methods of Health Education where instruction is
162.
criminal behavior. given directly to one or a group of individuals.
Sociopathy. Unilateral or didactic.
148.
Psychological disorder that are severe alterations in the Educational method of Health Education where it is based on the
personality and behavioral tendencies of the individual. 163.
exchange of knowledge between two or more people.
Personality disorder. Bilateral or Socratic .
149. Disorder psychological characterized by behavior
164. They are the means to impart health education.
eccentric, cold or inappropriate affectivity, tendency to social Oral teaching, Written, Visual demonstrations, Competitions and
withdrawal, paranoid or strange ideas. contests and Group activities.
Schizotypal disorder.
Disorder psychologicalthat includes symptoms affective 165.
150. It is knowing and identifying health needs, studying motivations,
and
using methods, techniques and principles, starting activities with
schizophrenic, affective symptoms that precede pre-existing
the population and carrying out local research.
schizophrenia or delusional disorders.
Practical health education plan.
Schizoaffective disorder.
166. Medical research into methods of protecting naval personnel in
151. Psychological disorder that presents physical symptoms of a non-
the event of a biological attack and provides testing and analysis
existent disease without an organic basis, including hypochondria.
services to detect biological risks.
Somatoform disorder.
Biological Defense.
152. Psychological disorder that is harmful consumption resistant to
treatment and addiction with or without associated psychosis. 167.
Medical research on diseases that can incapacitate deployed
Alcoholism. forces, a community or in areas devastated by natural disasters.
Infectious diseases.
153. Psychological disorder that is the individual's dependence on the
use of drugs, psychotropic substances or narcotics. 168. Medical Research that focuses on how to improve the health,
Drug dependence. safety, performance and recovery of naval personnel. Care of
wounded in combat.
154. Medical evaluation of abnormalities in the lumbar and sacral
spine, shortening of the lower extremities or abnormalities of both Medical investigation of problems related to oral health, well-
169.
feet. being, diseases and injuries.
Orthopedic. Dental and Biomedical Research.
44 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
BY: AEGV
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

170. Medical research whose objective is to understand and manage hours.

the Priority THREE.
risks associated with human exposure to radiofrequency fields,
microwaves, lasers and low frequency sources. 185. Emergency Level who are ill or non-serious injured, who
Bioeffects due to exposure to energies. They are not included in the preceding categories whose
treatment could be deferred by 24 hours.
171. Medical Research on the Environmental Health Effects of Priority FOUR.
interest to naval personnel, to determine toxicity and define
appropriate exposure limits. 186. It is the set of health facilities and means of transportation
Enviromental health . dedicated to the gathering, transfer and emergency treatment of
the sick and injured.
172. Medical Research with spatial orientation of performance Evacuation Chain.
human, aeronautical standards and aviation medicine. Aerospace
Medicine. 187. It is the means to control that recovery patients
In the short term, they are not evacuated further to the rear than
173. Medical research focused on the physiology of personnel required, avoiding losses of personnel with combat experience.
underwater work, biological effects to which they are subjected Evacuation Rules and Policies.
underwater.
Underwater Medicine. 188. Hospitalization step in wounded nests, emergency posts
relief and infirmaries.
174. Medical Research focuses on the study of virology, First Step.
bacteriology, epidemiology, immunology, parasitology,
189. Hospitalization step in collection and care posts
entomology in the areas where operations are carried out.
medical, clearance posts and mobile surgical hospitals. Second
Tropical Medicine.
Step.
175. Medical Research for the analysis and development of models for
190. Hospitalization step in mobile surgical hospital, hospital
support in making medical decisions to operational commanders,
semi-mobile Evacuation and Convalescence hospital.
medical logisticians and medical personnel in the field.
Simulations, Medical Models and Support Missions. Third Step.

176. Medical research in measurement, maintenance, restoration, 191. Hospitalization level that are General and Convalescent Hospitals.
improvement and training of human performance in military Fourth Step.
operations.
192. Hospitalization level that are Special, General and Convalescent
Fighter Performance.
Hospitals.
177. Medical Research that includes epidemiological and Fifth Step.
health in active service personnel and their beneficiaries.
193. It is called curative medicine, it is based on the existence of
Epidemiology and human behavioral sciences.
trained doctors and establishments equipped with the human and
178. It consists of the return of the state of physical or mental material elements necessary to offer efficient and sufficient care.
effectiveness to the Medical attention.
personnel who have lost it due to injury or illness. Rehabilitation.
194. It is a company dedicated to the service of health through
179. It consists of the transfer of injured or sick people from the place of restoration, prevention and promotion, as well as educational and
accident to recovery centers using appropriate means of research activities.
transportation. Hospital.
Evacuation.
195. Hospital function that is the diagnosis of services, curative and
180. It consists of inclusion in rehabilitation centers or hospitals palliative treatment, physical, mental and social rehabilitation and
(Afloat or ashore) of personnel discharged from their activities and assistance in emergency cases.
evacuated from the combat zone, they may be afloat or ashore. Restoration of health.
Hospitalization.
196. Hospital function that consists of monitoring pregnancy, childbirth
181. It is the return of discharged personnel to the state of activity, and child development, disease control, early diagnosis to prevent
where the personnel will return to provide their services in the death, hygiene, occupational medicine and health education.
same Unit in which they were assigned when they were Disease prevention.
discharged.
Recovery. 197. Hospital function that involves students, doctors, specialists,
nurses, assistants and training of health personnel.
182. Level of Urgency that deals with those injured or sick in Teaching and personnel training functions.
imminent danger of death requiring immediate medical or surgical
treatment in less than 3 hours.
Priority ONE.

183. Level of Urgency that Corresponds to the sick and injured in

danger of death or loss of a limb or sense, the period is a
maximum of 6 hours.
Priority TWO.
184. Emergency Level who are sick or injured who are not in
danger of death, at least immediately, can be delayed 8 or 10

45 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
198. Hospital function that deals with clinical,
epidemiological, laboratory and social research,
psychological and cultural aspects of the patients
and technical administrative methods of the
hospital.
Investigation.
199. Level of the National Health System characterized
by smaller institutions where the general doctor
and dentist assists for outpatient consultation,
emergencies and short-stay hospitalization.
First Level of Care.
200. Level of the National Health System made up of
larger hospitals with medical care: internal
medicine, surgery, pediatrics, gynecology-
obstetrics, traumatology.
Second Level of Care.
201. Level of the National Health System characterized
by dental services and supraspecialist doctors in
the area of internal medicine: cardiology,
pulmonology, nephrology,
dermatology, endocrinology, etc.
Third Level of Care.
202. It is the classification of Hospitals based on their
degree of Complexity.
General and Specialty.
203. It is the second or third level establishment for
patient care, in the four basic specialties: general
surgery, gynecology-obstetrics, internal medicine
and pediatrics.
General Hospital.
204. It is a second and third level establishment for the
care of patients, of one or more medical, surgical
or medical-surgical specialties that provides
emergency services, outpatient consultation and
hospitalization.
Specialty Hospital.
205. Health Echelon, which is made up of health
sections in surface and land units, provides military
care in health promotion, specific protection, 24-
hour care, transitional beds and general dentistry.
Type I step.
206. Health Echelon that provides care to the military
and their beneficiaries, 24-hour care h.,
hospitalization, 15 beds,
X-ray, laboratory and operating room.
Type II A step.
207. Health Echelon that provides care to the military
and their beneficiaries, outpatient consultation,
general medicine. and specialties, 25 beds,
laboratory, operating room, surgical and dentistry.
Type II B step.
208. Health Echelon that provides comprehensive
medical care, 40 beds, X-rays, ultrasound,
laboratory, blood transfusion, operating room, OT,
dentistry, medical education and undergraduate
internship.
Step type III (HOSPITALS).
209. Health Echelon that provides comprehensive
46
By: AEGV
medical care, 24-hour care, 50 beds, complete
clinical laboratory, blood pool, operating room, OT,
dentistry, undergraduate internship and continuous
medical care.
Step type III (REGIONAL HOSPITALS).
210. Health Echelon of concentration and
comprehensive medical care, outpatient
consultation and general medicine, 80 to 120
beds, specialized laboratory, blood bank, operating
rooms, OT, specialized dentistry, undergraduate
internship and residency of medical specialties.
Step type IV (GENERAL HOSPITAL).
211. Phase of the Organization in cases of Disasters
that is aimed at avoiding and/or mitigating the
destructive effects of a disturbing phenomenon,
before its effects impact a geographic area.
Prevention.
212. Phase of the Organization in cases of Disasters,
which is the set of response actions to protect
people individually and society, in the face of the
threat or impact of destructive agents.
Help.
213. In the event of disasters, its function is to integrate
mobile medical-surgical teams for immediate
reaction, with the capacity to provide the
population with basic medical care, in their own
locations or wherever ordered.
SAY.
214. Classification of health echelons in disaster cases
that would be the highest level hospital center, with
human and physical resources for subspecialties:
traumatology, burns, ophthalmology, etc.
National medical center.
215. Classification of the health echelons in cases of
disaster that would be the healthcare center that
would assume responsibility for care
hospitable in a region, state,
province, or
department.
Lead hospital or regional base hospital.
216. Classification of healthcare levels in disaster cases
that would be minor healthcare centers, with
hospital capacity, but with limited human and
material resources.
Satellite care units.
217. Classification of health echelons in disaster cases
that would be care centers with hospital capacity,
action limited to specialties, used as satellite care
units or evacuation centers.
Special care centers.
218. Classification of health care levels in disaster
cases that would be primary care centers without
hospital capacity, located in rural areas or
peripheral urban areas.
Assistance positions.
219. These groups are created and maintained
permanently, in order to guarantee the
conservation of troops and respond quickly to the
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
aid of the
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC civilian population in cases and areas of
KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A disaster. FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. Immediate Reaction Surgical Medical Groups.

220. Phase of the Organization in cases of Disasters

where groups will be formed in each guard
headquarters 365 days a year, with available
personnel, the deputy director will be the
coordinator of the immediate reaction medical
surgical group, with 30 minutes to set sail when
ordered and You must carry out a scheduled
supervision program.
Execution.

47 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
221. Logistics Functional Element that includes the set of activities
necessary to carry out the movement of means from one place to
another using surface, air-naval and land units.
Transport.
222. It is defined as the action of moving or the fact of being
transported, its basic function is to effectively move from one point
to other logistical means within a given period and under certain
conditions.
Transport.
223. They are the means that are transported regardless of whether
they are personnel or material.
Cargo.
224. They are the points between which transportation takes place.
Terminals.
225. They are the intermediate points of transportation.
Scales.
226. Phase of the transport action that consists of placing the cargo on
the vehicle in the best conditions of safety and economy of space.
This action is carried out at the terminal of origin of the transport.
Burden.
227. Phase of the transportation action that consists of moving the
loaded vehicle to the destination terminal.
Motion.
228. Phase of the transportation action that is the reverse operation of
loading and is carried out at the destination terminal.
Download.
229. A form of transportation that consists of the surface of the sea or
the body of water, there are several vehicles to use: boats and
vessels, submarines, gliders.
Marine transport.
230. Form of transportation that will be carried out on the surface of the
earth, the vehicles used can be: railway, automobile, river,
pipeline, animals, porters.
Ground transportation.
231. Form of transportation where the route by which it is carried out is
atmospheric air or aerial surface and the vehicles used are:
airplane or helicopter.
Air Transport.
232. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation, which is the amount
of cargo per unit vehicle.
Transport Capacity.
233. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation that is the cost of the
unit of cargo per unit of distance.
Economy.
234. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation which is the speed
of transfer (movement, loading, unloading).
Speed.
235. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation that is the ease of
admission of voluminous cargo.
Flexibility.
236. Characteristic of Forms of Transport that is the ability to accept
various types of cargo.
Adaptability.
48
By: AEGV
237. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation that is the reach and
penetration of the road according to the degree of geographical
limitation. Accessibility.
238. Characteristic of Forms of Transportation that is the possibility of
exercising control of movement.
Ease of Control.
239. Characteristic of the Forms of Transportation that is the guarantee
of operational performance.
Technical Security.
240. Characteristic of Forms of Transportation that is the degree of
invulnerability against enemy action.
Tactical Security.
241. This is the name given to the route that connects two terminals
where regular transportation will take place.
Transportation Lines.
242. It is the set of several "transport lines."
Transport network.
243. It is when two or more forms of transportation are used
simultaneously for the same shipment.
Mixed Transport.
244. They are the Development Functions of transportation.
Discrimination, Priority, Evaluation, Exploitation, Integration,
Regulation and Traffic Control.
245. Transport development function that consists of determining what
is essential and what is accessory or superfluous within the
cargoes to be transported in order to establish priorities.
Discrimination.
246. Transport development function that consists of determining the
precedence of shipments according to the qualification assigned
to them after the application of discrimination rules.
Priority.
247. Transport development function which is the calculation of the
transport capacity of the means of infrastructure available at a
given time.
Assessment.
248. Transportation development function that consists of obtaining the
maximum performance of the infrastructure (vehicles, roads,
terminals) of a Line or transportation network.
Exploitation.
249. Transport development function that consists of harmoniously
bringing together the various forms of transport, coordinating them
so that they can support each other in time and space.
Integration.
250. Transportation development function that consists of controlling
the pace of movement of various vehicles on the same road,
through: Retention, Storage, Deviation, Acceleration. Regulation.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE
M AKIN A FROM:
FROM: NAVY
NAVY LIEUTENANT
LIEUTENANT TO:TO: CORVETTE
CORVETTE
CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
251. Transportation development function that consists
of planning, organizing, coordinating and
controlling the movement of goods and personnel
along transportation lines, networks and systems.
Traffic control.
252. Modality of Military Transport when the cargo is
not organized in military units, presents two
variants, in peacetime: the transport systems are
controlled by civil and military authorities, in
wartime only military authorities, with civil transport
becoming part of the military transport.
Military Cargo Transportation.
253. Military Transport Modality when it comes to
transporting a Military Force respecting its
organization and simultaneously transporting its
personnel, weapons, equipment and supplies.
Transportation of Organized Military Units.
254. It constitutes one of the most outstanding activities
in the effectiveness of any logistics process, it
intervenes in the development of all other logistical
Functional Elements, it is the activity that presents
the greatest strategic content.
Transport.
255. Management Body responsible for providing the
factors in quantity, quality, place and opportunity,
that allow the efficient development of the tasks
assigned to the operational and administrative
units of SEMAR.
YOU SAY.
256. Management Body directly linked to land
transportation, which carries out transportation and
delivery; with traffic integration, regulation and
control activities.
Transportation Subdirectorate.
257. Management Body that plans comprehensive
logistical support for naval operations, develops
and establishes the basic communications plan of
the AM and transforms the decisions of the High
Command into orders related to logistical
functions.
S-4 EMGA.
258. They are the Transport Bodies called “logistics
support bodies”, in charge of materializing the
application of the logistics effort, executing
solutions at the operational level, they are provided
by the commands in the regions and naval zones.
Execution Bodies.
259. Bodies Responsible for the Functional Element of
Transportation constituted by DIGABAS,
Subdirectorate of Transportation and in S-4
EMGA.
Management Bodies.
260. It is the Logistics Functional Element that includes
the set of activities involved in the project,
construction, adaptation and conservation of
material works for all types of needs, and is
developed by the Undersecretary of the Navy.
Facilities.
49
CAPTAIN.
By: AEGV
261. It is the Logistics Functional Element whose main
activity is the release of material (vehicles,
weapons, equipment, etc.), which is in poor
condition or out of service and its recovery or
restoration is not affordable, it is developed by the
Chief Officer's Office.
Evacuation.
262. It consists of providing logistical means (personnel,
material and services) to the Armed Forces in
adequate quantity, quality, time and place to
satisfy the demands of a strategic, operational
and/or tactical activity (mission) in given
circumstances (situation).” .
The Logistics Problem.
263. It is the process of decisive action, a core concept
in high-level and operational logistics, describing
that every action, whatever its objective, nature or
level, begins from the existence of a need for
means that must be satisfied.
The Logistics Cycle.
264. These are the phases of the Logistics Cycle.
Determination of needs, Procurement and
Distribution.
265. Phase of the Logistics Cycle that is defined as the
positive and responsible action of calculating and
defining the needs for logistical means that must
be satisfied to carry out a strategic or operational
action.
Determination of Needs.
266. Phase of the Logistics Cycle where the needs that
have been identified as valid are transformed into
means, "nothing should be obtained if it has not
previously been defined as necessary by the
command."
Obtaining.
267. Phase of the Logistics Cycle that consists of
delivering it in the appropriate manner, time and
place to the units and facilities that require it.
The distribution.
268. Factor for Obtaining the Logistics Cycle, which are
the dimensional, qualitative, functional and
conditioning physical characteristics of its service.
The specifications.
269. Obtaining Factor, which is the uniformity or
discipline in the use of the same good for the same
service, is the regulation, organization and
unification of phenomena and object. The
normalization.
270. Obtaining Factor that consists of the description,
coding and compilation of all the elements to which
we have given specifications within a query
system.
The cataloguing.
271. Procurement Factor that is based on an analysis of
the cost-effectiveness of acquisitions.
The cost inspection.
272. Procurement Factor that makes up a system that
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
is implemented when necessary, with the purpose
of determining which materials will be obtained.
The priorities.

273. Procurement Factor, which is the commercial

process of obtaining goods and services, which is
directly related to the availability of financial
resources.
The acquisition.

274. Procurement Factor, which is the way in which

materials or equipment must be prepared for
handling and conservation before being stored or
used.
The conditioning.

50 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

275 Procurement Factor, which is the storage or collection of the
elements or articles obtained to later be distributed in an
appropriate manner to the destination places. The accumulation
276 To carry out logistical support, the AM uses EDOMAYGRAL
through its S-4, which consolidates, controls and supervises the
logistical processes until the needs are satisfied through the
General Directorates The Naval Logistics System
277 It has the responsibility of organizing, managing and preparing the
Navy; manage assets and reserves, build, reconstruct and
preserve port works, organize and provide Naval Health services;
and acquire, design and manufacture weapons, ammunition,
clothing and all types of naval resources Secretary of the Navy
278 He is responsible for directing, supervising and controlling the
construction, repair, renovation and updating of naval
infrastructure, equipment and units Undersecretary of the Navy
279 Its mission is to provide the logistical support required by naval, air-
naval, marine infantry and naval establishments and to coordinate
and participate in port studies and dredging operations General
Directorate of Services
Verifies the integration of the “Determination of Needs of Units
and Establishments” evaluated by the Regional Logistics
Committee
S-4 Naval Region
289 Supervises that the logistics and communications needs are
covered, coordinates the updating of the logistics files of the units
and establishments and Verifies the Determination of Needs of
Units and Establishments of its jurisdiction, evaluated by the Local
Logistics Committee
S-4 Naval Zone
290 Implements plans and directives for the administration of
communications and logistics, supervises that personnel, logistics
and naval communications needs are covered, coordinates
matters related to personnel, logistics plans, communications,
proposals and directives to regulate logistics activity
S-4 Naval Sector
291 They are responsible for the conception, preparation, conduct and
logistical support of Naval operations in their area of responsibility.
Naval Zones

280 Its mission is to carry out research and development in the 292 They are in charge of the conception, preparation and conduct of
oceanographic, hydrographic, meteorological, cartographic and Naval operations within their jurisdiction; Likewise, they provide
technological fields, as well as to provide logistical support, to logistical support to the attached, incorporated and deployed units
contribute to the growth of the national maritime sector General under their command.
Directorate of Research and Development Naval Sectors
281 Its mission is to build, repair, renew and update surface units, in 293 They carry out operations, logistics is the responsibility of the
order to keep the fleet operational, as well as rehabilitate and commanders, they must ensure the satisfaction of their own
recover vehicles, furniture and equipment and design and build operational needs, they are responsible for preparing the
naval units. determination of needs taking into account their maintenance
General Directorate of Naval Constructions plans and programs
Units and Establishments
282 Establishes the standards, systems and procedures for the
administration of human, financial and material resources,
294 It is understood as that part of the Logistics Doctrine that deals with
integrates the preliminary draft annual expenditure budget Senior
the resolution of logistical problems that arise at the level of the
Navy Officer
Armed Forces, it is a science of calculation rather than
imagination.
283 Its mission is to manage the human resources of the Ministry of the
Operational Logistics
Navy, developing the skills and knowledge of naval personnel, in
accordance with the needs of the institution. 295 It is the creation and maintenance of the armed forces of
General Directorate of Human Resources Operational Logistics
284 Its mission is to carry out programming – budgeting, exercise, Objective of Operational logistics
control, evaluation and accounting of financial resources, carry out
296 Satisfy the needs of Naval Operations, which as such must be
the acquisition, control and distribution of material and real estate
carried out at sea, since they can begin at sea and some others
resources.
end on land
General Directorate of Administration and Finance
Purpose of Operational logistics
285 It is the advisory body of the High Command that assists in the
297 It consists of providing logistical means (personnel, material and
planning, coordination and supervision of operations, it is the body
services) to a specific operational force in adequate quantity,
responsible for the Determination of Needs General Staff of the
quality, time and place and in the circumstances imposed by the
Navy
fulfillment of a mission within a situation.
Operational Logistics Problem
286 Provides the elements of judgment on technical logistics aspects
for the planning of operations and information on the existence of
insured assets and their distribution, supervises the development
and operation of the Navy's logistics process
S-4 EMGA

287 Must support the logistical effort towards operational units, provide
naval and logistical services to Establishments, Surface Units,
Marine Infantry Units, and Air-Naval Units
Naval Regions

288 Provides technical-logistical information, plans, coordinates and

supervises the logistical actions necessary to sustain operations,

51 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
298. It is the set of the determination of the theoretical
solution (Logistics Technique) and the execution or
practical realization of said solution (Logistics
Support).
Operational Logistics Effort.
299. It is the system of obtaining solutions that marks
the direction of the logistics effort.
Management functions.
300. They are the elements on which action must be
taken, which will define the magnitude of the
logistical effort.
Logistics Functional Elements.
301. It is the resolution process that sets the direction of
the logistical effort.
Logistics Cycle.
302. They are the executing bodies, which indicate the
point of application of the logistical effort.
Logistics Support Bodies.
303. It is any effort to solve an operational logistics
problem and must consist of applying the
Management Functions to the Logistics Functional
Elements following the Logistics Cycle process
and executing the solutions through the Logistics
Support Bodies.
Operational Logistics Effort.
304. They are those that must be developed by every
Command body within a Military Organization
applied to logistics activity: Information, Planning,
Documentation, Inspection and Discipline,
Coordination and Organization.
Management Functions.
305. It is the grouping of technical logistics activities
that have a common basic function. Each one
represents a basic technical function, which is
common to all the activities included in it and are:
Supply, Maintenance, Personnel, Health,
Transportation, Facilities and Evacuation.
Logistics Functional Elements.
306. It is the ordered process of all complete logistical
action, this procedural organization is integrated
into three phases: Determination of needs,
obtaining and Distribution.
Logistics Cycle.
307. They are elements of operational action, in which
logistical activities to support the Forces are
developed, there are two classes: Static and
Dynamic.
Support Bodies.
12.- DAM 1.5.- NAVAL OPERATIONAL
PLANNING.
1. It is a comprehensive and comprehensive process
that allows commanders and staffs at all levels and
in all arms to make informed decisions, solve
complex problems and ultimately achieve assigned
missions.
Military Planning.
2. It is the process by which a commander visualizes
52
By: AEGV
an end state and determines the most effective
ways by which to achieve that state.
Naval Planning.
3. It is defined as the conception and construction of
the framework that underpins a plan for a
campaign or major operation and its subsequent
execution.
Operational Design.
4. It is defined as the application of creative
imagination by commanders and staffs, supported
by their skills, knowledge and experience to design
strategies, campaigns, major operations and
organize and employ military forces.
Operational Art.
5. Through this, a commander can plan and execute
operations effectively, ensure that the employment
of forces is linked to objectives, and integrate
naval operations seamlessly with the actions of a
joint force.
The Naval Planning process.
6. It is the order that the Naval Planning Process
(NPP) must follow.
Mission Analysis, Development of Courses of
Action, Analysis of Courses of Action, Comparison
of Courses of Action and Decision, Development
of Orders and Transition Plans.
7. As a first step of the NPP, its purpose is to review
and analyze orders, directives, intelligence and
other information, so that the commander, staff
and planning team obtain an understanding of the
situation to define the mission. Mission Analysis.
8. NPP step where planners use the mission,
commander's intent, and planning directive to
develop multiple courses of action. They then
examine every possible COA, ensuring
his fitness, feasibility,
acceptability,
differentiability and completeness.
Development of Courses of Action.
9. It is a detailed evaluation of each COA with
reference to the enemy and operational area. Each
COA is confronted in the war game against the
selected ECOAs. This step helps planners identify
strengths, weaknesses, and associated risks and
estimate gaps for each possible COA.
Analysis of Courses of Action (War Game).
10. In this step, all retained COAs are evaluated
against each other based on the criteria
established by the commander, so that the
decision is finally made by him.
Comparison of Courses of Action and Decision.
11. They are the main means through which the
commander expresses his decision, intention and
directive to govern the actions of subordinates,
using his decision, mission, intention and directive.
Development of Order Plans.
12. It is the systematic delivery of the plan or order to
those in charge of executing the operation,
providing staff with the situational knowledge and
reasoning for the key decisions necessary, to
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
ensure KNOWLEDGE
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC that there is a coherent transition from
M AKIN A planning to execution. FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. Transition.

13. It must link the commanders, as well as their staffs,

with the Command at the highest level, laterally
with other commands of the components of other
arms and with subordinate commanders and their
staffs.
Naval Operational Planning (NPP).

14. At this level of warfare, on which the NPP focuses,

the effects are typically associated with the direct
results of offensive and defensive tactical actions,
often involving the use of weapons.
Tactical.

53 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
15. The NPP is a dynamic process that requires the cooperation and
direct participation of these 3 elements, to ensure that time is used
efficiently and that the most effective plan is developed that meets
the commander's intention.
The commander, the general staff and the planning team.
16. An integral element of the NPP that provides experience,
knowledge, judgment, direction and direction, must be very aware
of the current condition of the planning effort and make sound
decisions.
Commander.
17. They are the 3 main qualities of the Commander in the Naval
Planning Process.
Personal experience, personal judgment and personal
relationships
18. They are functional organizations and are often focused between
planning current and future operations, and the daily support of
the naval force, must be properly organized.
The General Staff.
19. Personnel who are involved in the different areas of the staff,
capable of providing a complete and dedicated effort for the NPP.
The Planning Team.
20. It is the link that unites the members and activities of an
organization, improving operational success by allowing the
command to react more quickly and effectively than the enemy.
The planning.
21. It is what gives direction to the force in the absence of specific
orders.
The commander's intention.
22. They are intended to ensure that planning efforts are in the same
direction as those of higher-ranking, subordinate and lateral
managers. Continuous and reliable communications are important;
they can be formal or informal. Links.
23. It is a process where the commander and staff synchronize daily
operational time within the planning, decision, execution and
evaluation cycle, to make timely decisions.
Battle rhythm.
24. Type of planning used when time is not a critical factor and there
is sufficient time available so that each echelon can complete its
initial planning before information or orders are passed to
subordinates.
Non-Time Sensitive Planning.
25. Type of planning used when time becomes a critical factor capable
of responding to changing events, promoting a logical and rapid
flow of information and the timely preparation of courses of action.
Time Sensitive Planning.
26. It governs the entire NPP, its purpose is to give the Naval
Commander, the staff and the team a general evaluation of the
situation, it begins with a review of orders, plans, intelligence
information and directives from the Command, in order to define
the mission and establish the necessary tasks.
Mission Analysis.
27. It is the input information needed in the MISSION ANALYSIS.
Plans, Orders and Directives, Intelligence Information, EDOMAY
Estimates and Preliminary Planning Directive.
28. These are some processes of MISSION ANALYSIS.
54
By: AEGV
Identify the Source of the Mission, Determine Support
Relationships, Analyze the Superior Commander's Mission and
Determine Specific, Implicit and Essential Tasks, establish
purpose and identify imposed limitations.
29. They provide the initial information necessary for the analysis of
the mission, it is normally contained OPLAN's, CONPLAN's,
WARNORD's and OPORD's. If they are confusing, the
commander, staff or planning team should request clarification.
Plans, Orders and Directives of Higher Naval Commands.
30. It serves as a basis for the Naval Commander's intelligence,
containing the IPOE results, intelligence summaries, identification
and analysis of enemy objectives, critical strengths and
weaknesses, centers of gravity, critical capabilities, requirements
and critical vulnerabilities.
Intelligence Information from Higher Naval Commands.
31. They can provide a current status and an assessment of the ability
to meet the assigned mission requirements, identify gaps,
potential issues and weigh the different COAs, according to the
functions of the different sections of the staff.
Estimates of the General Staff of Higher Naval Commands.
32. It will be the support for the analysis of the mission, the Naval
Commander is responsible for its preparation where he evaluates
the situation, based on the directive of the senior naval commands
and his perspective, knowledge and personal experience.
Preliminary Planning Directive.
33. Process consisting of several non-sequential activities adjusted to
the situation, the time available, and the commander's preliminary
directive. This process is neither rigid nor
static; It is continuous, immersive, interactive and dynamic.
Mission analysis process.
34. Mission Analysis Process normally found in the directive of senior
naval commands (OPLAN, OPORD or WARNORD).
Identify the Source(s) of the Mission.
35. Mission Analysis Process that exists at the operational level
between the different weapons and/or component force
commanders and can also establish Support Relationships at the
tactical level.
36. Mission Analysis Process that must be studied and draw
conclusions regarding future military action, assumptions should
not be made about issues not addressed in the directive from
senior naval commands, if it is confusing, clarification should be
requested.
Analyze the Mission of the Superior Commander.
37. Mission Analysis Process that consists of two elements: the tasks
that the forces must perform and their purpose.
Determine Specific, Implicit and Essential Tasks.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
38. Mission Analysis Process that follows after the term "In order to",
is found in the "EXECUTION" paragraph of the superior's
directive, always masters the tasks and answers the question
"Why?"
Establish the Purpose.
39. These are the tasks that are assigned by higher naval commands
to a unit. They are indicated in the EXECUTION paragraph of an
OO, they can also be found in the mission, coordination
instructions or annexes.
Specific.
40. These are the tasks that become the central focus of operation
planning and define mission success and apply to the force as a
whole.
Essentials.
41. These are tasks that are not specifically indicated in the order of
the Higher Naval Command, but must be developed in order to
achieve the mission. They emerge from the analysis of the order
and the commander's preliminary directive.
Implicit.
42. Mission Analysis Process that are established in the directive of
the Higher Naval Command and are divided into two categories:
impediments and restrictions. They place limitations on the
commander's freedom of action.
Externally Imposed Limitations.
43. Mission Analysis Process that consists of reviewing forces,
identifying their locations, establishing or modifying current task
support relationships, and determining what and when reserve
forces will be available.
Analyze Available Units and Forces.
44. Mission Analysis Process that is aimed at identifying critical
strengths and weaknesses, this analysis must be done for both
own and enemy forces.
Determine Critical Factors, Centers of Gravity (COGs) and
Decisive Points (DPs).
45. Mission Analysis Process that includes matters over which a
commander normally has no control, is done for own and enemy
situations and is used at any level of planning.
Development of Assumptions.
46. Mission Analysis Process where the commander performs a
personal evaluation, it is inherent to any use of military force or
routine military activity, it has two categories: for the mission and
for the forces.
Initial Risk Assessment.
47. Mission Analysis Process where the planning team makes an
outline for the commander to review, edit and approve, it must be
clear and concise with the essential tasks and purpose.
Develop Your Own Mission.
48. Mission Analysis Process where the specific results developed
and refined are reviewed before proceeding to the development of
the COA, the review of the IPOE, mission of the higher naval
command, intention and preliminary directive of the commander
are considered.
Presentation of the Mission Analysis.
49. Mission Analysis Process that is broad, concise and expresses the
purpose of the force's activities and the desired results. It is a
clear and brief vision of how to conduct action, allowing
55
By: AEGV
subordinate commanders flexibility and freedom of action.
Commander's Initial Intent.
50. Mission Analysis Process where their generation is necessary for
the analysis of the mission, they have a great effect on actions
and decisions and can influence the direction of an operation.
They answer the question: What does the Commander need to
know and when does he require it?
Commander's Essential Information Elements (CCIRs).
51. Mission Analysis Process that focuses on the establishment of the
COA, must be specific and not so strict, depends on the
leadership style of the Commander and can be general or
specific.
Commander's Planning Directive.
52. They are the results of the MISSION ANALYSIS.
Approved Mission, Directive and Intent of the Commander,
WARNORD and Information Requirements.
53. It is done for subordinate units once the Naval Commander
approves the Mission Analysis, it must include the Commander's
intention and directive, it consists of 5 paragraphs: Situation,
Mission, Execution, Administration and Logistics and Command
and Control.
Preparatory Order (WARNORD).
54. It is prepared by the planning team after receiving the
Commander's directive, it is a deliberate attempt to design
unpredictable alternatives for the enemy.
Development of COAs.
55. It is the input information That need for him
DEVELOPMENT OF THE COA'S.
WARNORD, OPORD, Mission and intention
of the Commander,
Planning Directive, IPOE and ECOA's.
56. COA DEVELOPMENT process that is generated through a
combination of maneuver capabilities, firepower, protection,
leadership and combat information directed against the enemy.
Relative Combat Power.
57. It is based on the principle that a good COA must defeat all
ECOAs. The goal of the planning team is to develop as many
COAs as possible; brainstorming is a preferred technique.
to generate Options and requires
of time,
Imagination and creativity.
Options for defining COAs.
58. COA Development Process where planners will establish the C2,
grouping forces for each COA and considering the types of units
that are assigned to each component and the scope of control.
Relationships between Command, Control and Support.
59. COA Validity Test where you must achieve the mission and
comply with the commander's directive.
Fitness.
60. COA Validity Test where the Force must have the capacity to
achieve the mission, in terms of available time, space and
resources.
Feasibility.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
61. COA Validity Test where you must justify the cost of resources,
especially in casualties.
Acceptability.
62. Validity Test where each COA must differ substantially from the
others.
Differentiability.
63. COA Validity Test where it must include operations and tasks
execute, forces required, deployment, time
estimated, criterion of success and desired end.
Complete.
64. COA Development Process that in a Joint Task Force includes the
actions by each component arm in each phase of the operation,
contains "who", "what", "how", "when", "where " and because".
Graphic Presentation and Writing of the Course of Action.
65. At this stage of COA development, The team of
Planning may propose a briefing on the COAs developed and
retained, the purpose being to obtain approval from the
Commander.
Presentation of the Course of Action.
66. At this point, the planning team recommends to the commander
additional analysis and evaluation criteria such as: established
success, comparison of the merits of the COA's, force objectives
and being quantifiable and measurable.
Directives for Analysis and Evaluation of the Course of Action.
67. Contains an illustration of the use of force and control measures,
such as: Unit and command limits, deployments, control charts,
sequence of events, operation designations and location template.
Graphic presentation of the Course of Action.
68. It describes how forces will develop the commander's intent in a
concise manner, directing the development of plans where planners
develop a refined concept of the initial disposition of forces:
deployment, employment and support. Drafting the Course of
Action.
69. These are some processes of the DEVELOPMENT OF COURSES
OF ACTION.
Analysis of Combat Power, Definitions of the COA's, Validity Test,
Relationships between Command, Control and Support, Graphic
Presentation and Drafting of the COA.
70. They are the results of the DEVELOPMENT OF COURSES OF
ACTION.
Directives for the analysis and evaluation of the COA, approved
Intention of the Comdte, Directives of the JG, approved COA's and
ECOA's and EDOMAY Estimates.
71. It is the input information for the ANALYSIS OF COURSES OF
ACTION.
Intention of the Commander, JG Directives, approved COA's and
ECOA's, EDOMAY Estimates and Directives for the analysis and
evaluation of the COA's.
72. This step, which is the heart of the NPP, identifies which of the
COA's will best achieve the mission using the War Game, while
positioning the force for future operations.
Analysis of the COA's.
73. It is a disciplined process, with rules and steps that help visualize
the flow of the operation, it is a critical part of the planning process
and more time should be allocated to it than any other step.
War Game.
By: AEGV
74. During this step, the equipment planning
evaluate the
effectiveness of each COA against all ECOAs, wearing he
Commander's evaluation criteria, makes adjustments to the
problems and weaknesses identified, each COA, is confronted
against each ECOA.
Analysis of the COA's.
to 75. COA Analysis Process where the necessary tools, materials and
data must be gathered, the units carry out the game on maps,
cards, simulators by
computer and other tools, which accurately reflect the nature of the
terrain.
Organization for the War Game.
76. COA Analysis Process where the commander, staff and planning
team consider all units that may be involved in the operation, paying
special attention to support relationships and limitations.
Register of All Friendly Forces.
77. Within COA Analysis, they are essential tasks or a series of critical
tasks, performed over a period of time, that require detailed
analysis.
Critical Events.
78. Within the Analysis of the COA's, they are those criteria that the
general staff uses after the War Game to measure the effectiveness
and efficiency of a COA with respect to that of other COAs.
Governing Factors.
79. They are the 4 methods of the Game of War.
Sequence of essential tasks, Avenue of depth, Belts and From the
Box.
80. War Game Method that highlights the initial form of actions
necessary to establish a sustainable capability and engage enemy
units deep in the combat area.
Essential Task Sequence Method.
81. War Game Method that focuses on a timed path of approach,
starting with the main effort, is good for offensive COAs or for
defensive situations, when the operational space does not allow
mutual support.
Avenue in Depth Method.
82. War Game Method that divides the operational space into areas
covering the width of the AO, is based on the sequential analysis of
events, the events are expected to occur more or less
simultaneously.
Belt Method.
83. War Game Method which is a detailed analysis of a critical area,
such as a landing beach or attack on a target. Using it isolates the
area and focuses on critical events within it.
Box Method.
84. It is based on a Worksheet, and gives the General Staff a reference
to build task organizations, synchronize activities, prepare plans or
orders and analyze COAs based on identified strengths and
weaknesses.
Registration and Display of Results.
56 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

85. During the War Game, this member acts as the controller of the game 99. NPP process where a decision comparison matrix is used to
and ensures that the staff stays within the set time and meets the facilitate the process.
goal of the game. Comparison of Courses of Action and decision.
The Chief of the General Staff or planning team .
100. It is the comparison matrix that represents subjectively selected
86. During the War Game, this member acts as the home force and governing factors, which are compared/evaluated on their
ensures that the War Game covers all operational aspects of the individual merits and treated equally.
mission. Without numerical weighting.
The Head of the Third Section.
101. It is the comparison matrix that represents balanced and
87. During the War Game, this member has a dual role: he takes the role subjectively selected governing factors, a numerical value is
of the enemy commander and provides requests for information. assigned to each COA.
The Head of the Second Section. Numerical weighting.
88. During the War Game, this member provides input variables as to
102. It is the comparison matrix used when quantitative results for
how personnel support will be given and how the operation may
each COA are not evident and qualitative comparisons must be
affect personnel condition.
used.
The Head of the First Section.
More / Less / Neutral.
89. During the War Game, this member provides logistical feasibility
analysis; identifies potential supply, transportation and sustainment 103. It is the comparison matrix where the staff lists the
issues. advantages and disadvantages of each COA and should be
The Head of the Fourth Section. used with one or more previous matrices.
Advantages and disadvantages.
90. It is made up of specialist personnel in communications and electronic
warfare, the legal advisor, the public relations officer and the medical 104. COA Comparison Process that is carried out
officer. based on the results of the analysis of the previous step
Auxiliary staff of the general staff. comparing the possible COAs to identify the one with the highest
probability of success, against the most probable and dangerous
91. It consists of individuals of different operational knowledge and ECOAs.
specialties who combine their operational experience with enemy Final Feasibility and Acceptability Tests.
tactics, weapons and doctrine, providing enemy reactions to the
COA's.
105. It is a clear and concise directive from the commander,
Red Cell.
By sticking to the selected COA, you make it what the force as a
92. It is the Objective of the Red Cell. whole is going to do.
Assistant in the development and testing of COAs. Commander's Decision.

93. These are the movements of each turn during the War Game. 2 from 106. It is used based on the final decision and directive of the
your own force and 1 from the enemy force. Commander, staff and planning team transition to operational
planning, refine the COA and prepare to issue the order,
94. The S-2 or Red Cell uses this method to describe enemy activities, converting it into CONOPS (Concept of Operations).
updating them as new intelligence and the outcome of the game are Synchronization Matrix.
received.
Enemy timing matrix and event template. 107. Describe how the forces will achieve the intention of the
commander. It is the central expression of the commander's
95. It is a parallel and continuous process that is carried out during all
operational design and governs the development of support
stages of planning, updating, perfecting and preparing the results
plans or annexes. CONOPS (Concept of Operations).
reflecting the results of the COA game, facilitating the next step.
Intelligence preparation of the operational area (IPOE).
108. They are the results of the COMPARISON OF THE COA's.
96. They are the results of the Game of War. Commander's Decision, CONOPS, updated IPOE, updated
Decision support matrix, update of the task organization and EDOMAY and WARNORD estimates.
deployment of forces, Identification of Units and support, DP's, IO 109. NPP step clearly communicates the intent, directive and
tasks, worksheet and synchronization Matrix, IPOE, alternatives and
commander's decision, so that they are easily understood by
support consequences.
those who will execute the order.
Development of Plans and Orders.
97. NPP pass where Comdte. Each COA is evaluated for its advantages
and disadvantages, a final test of feasibility and acceptability is
110. It is prepared in advance of operations and is normally
carried out until the one that offers the greatest possibility of fulfilling
serves as the basis for an order.
the mission is selected.
A plan.
Comparison of COA's and decision.

98. It is the input information to perform the COA COMPARISON

step.
JG Worksheet, IPOE Update, Decision Support Matrix,
Debugging Estimates and Governing Factors.

57 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

111. It is an oral or written communication, which directs the actions and commander that was obtained during the analysis of the mission
focuses subordinate tasks and activities to achieve the mission. and contains those essential tasks estimated to achieve it.
An order. Mission.

112. Characteristic of a Directive where each commander
subordinate who will execute the operation must be able to
understand it, it is written simply, understandable and with
appropriate military terms.
Clarity.
125. Paragraph of the Plans and Orders that expresses the intention of the
commander for the operation, allowing subordinate commanders
to exercise their initiative, keeping their actions aligned with the
overall purpose.
Execution.

113. Characteristic of a Directive that avoids superfluous words and
unnecessary details without sacrificing clarity and detail.
Brevity.
114. Characteristic of a Directive that uses simplicity and clarity,
the affirmative form of expression throughout all combat orders
and plans.
Authority.
115. Characteristic of a Directive that requires that all
elements be reduced to their simplest forms and all possibilities of
misunderstanding must be eliminated. Simplicity.
116. Characteristic of a Directive that leaves room for adjustments by
unexpected conditions.
Flexibility.
117. Characteristic of a Directive that allows dissemination over time
sufficient for adequate planning and preparation on the part of
subordinate commanders.
Prompt.
126. Paragraph of the Plans and Orders that describes the concepts of
support, logistics, personnel, public affairs, civil affairs and
medical services.
Administration and Logistics.
127. Paragraph of the Plans and Orders that specifies the relations of
command, succession of command and in general the
communications and control plan.
Command and Control.
128. They are used to keep the directive as simple and comprehensive
as possible and include plans for intelligence and operations,
instructions and complex information.
Annexes, Appendices and Tables .
129. During this process the planning team compares the order
own, with the orders of higher commands and that of other
weapons and/or components, in order to maximize
synchronization and unity of efforts, ensuring the intention of
higher command. Feedback Meetings and Information Crossing of
Plans and Orders.

118. Characteristic of a Directive that tells us that it must contain 130. It is the final action in the DEVELOPMENT OF PLANS AND
all necessary information complete and understandable. ORDERS.
Complete. Approval of the plan or order by the commander.

119. Characteristic of a Directive that clearly establishes the 131. They are the results of the DEVELOPMENT OF PLANS AND
command and support relationships and establishes ORDERS.
responsibilities. OPORD, OPLAN, FRAGORD, updated IPOE and planning
Organization. support tools.

120. It is the input information required for the Development of
Plans and orders.
Initial task organization, mission, commander's intent, CONOPS,
staff estimates, specific and implicit tasks .
121. Process of Development of Plans and Orders where they are
prepared in
a wide variety of forms, they can be: detailed written documents
with many supporting annexes or simple verbal instructions from
the commander.
Preparation of Plans and Orders.
122. Internal process of the Development of Plans and Orders in which the
planning team, performs a detailed review of the entire order and
ensures that the basic order and all annexes or appendices are
complete.
Reconciliation of Plans and Orders.
123. Paragraph of the Plans and Orders that is the summary of the
situation
commander's general and ensures that subordinates understand
the background.
Situation.
124. Paragraph of the Plans and Orders that carries the mission of the
132. NPP step that guarantees a successful transformation of the
planning to execution, improves the situational knowledge of those
who will execute the order, maintains the CONOPS, promotes
unity of effort and generates harmony in actions.
Transition.
133. It is the input information that is required in the
TRANSITION.
OPORD, OPLAN, refined IPOE, FRAGORDS for unforeseen
events, information for future missions and sequels.
134. He is the representative of current operations before the team of
planning of the higher level designated by the commander, takes
the approved plan or order to the staff of the higher command.
Exhibitor.
135. TRANSITION process that provides an overview
general of the mission, the commander's intention, the
organization of the task and the situation of oneself and the
enemy.
Transition Information Meeting.
136. They are important techniques used during TRANSITION to
ensure the best understanding of the plan or order by those who
must execute it and improve the ability of the commander and

58 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM
staff –to2supervise
0 2 2. operations.
Transition Exercises.

59 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
137. TRANSITION process that is given by a
Subordinate commander Once the planning has been completed,
in the presence of all force commanders, they confirm the plan to
their subordinates, who will execute the mission, allowing
discrepancies to be identified.
Confirmation of Plans and Orders.
138. They lead the internal transition briefing, inform
detail about all the tools, assist the commander in the
transition/execution exercise and coordinate with subordinate
commanders, on confirmation of their plan to the superior
commander.
Function of the Planning Team.
139. It is the result of TRANSITION.
That subordinate commanders and staff understand the CONOPS
and are prepared to execute the order and possible unforeseen
events and are also prepared for subsequent plans in order of
priorities.
140. They are the key points of the MISSION ANALYSIS.
Analysis of the mission, Comdte. You must get involved from the
beginning, establish a program in time, EDOMAY estimates and
prepare the team.
141. They are the key points of the DEVELOPMENT OF THE COA's.
A COA is a concept of operation open to a commander, it must
comply with: suitability, feasibility, acceptability,
differentiability and completeness.
142. They are the key points of the ANALYSIS OF THE COA's.
War game is a process of actions, reactions and counter-actions,
pitting a COA against an ECOA, the game better illustrates the
results and is only part of the analysis of the COA.
143. These are the key points of the COA COMPARISON.
Keep the chain of command informed, members conducting the
COA comparison should be the same in the analysis and use
guiding factors and judgment to choose the best COA.
144. They are the key points of the DEVELOPMENT OF PLANS AND
ORDERS.
Hold meetings to share and exchange information, OPORD and
FRAGORD's must be the only authorized source of information.
145. They are the key points of the TRANSITION.
Designate a representative as presenter of the plan or order and
informative meetings, practical exercises or rehearsals.
13.- DAM 1.6.- OPERATIONAL COMMAND AND
CONTROL.
1. It is the set of fundamental principles, concepts and guidelines that
guide the organization, preparation and use of the naval power of
the federation for the full fulfillment of the mission of the Mexican
Navy.
Naval Doctrine.
2. It is the platform on which the planning and execution of naval
operations is based, becoming the tool that allows a Commander
to understand the situation in the theater of operations.
Command and Control (C2)
3. It is the functional element of C2 through which the Commander
exercises his functions: planning, direction, coordination and
control of forces and operations.
The process.
4. It is the structural element of C2 that includes the personnel,
equipment, communications, facilities and procedures used by a
Commander.
60
By: AEGV
The system.
5. It allows the Commander to control time and uncertainty in the
development of operations, factors that affect operations, and
against which he will always have to fight to accomplish the
mission.
C2.
6. Component of C2 understood as the authority of a Commander,
implies leadership, authority and responsibility for the effective
use of available resources and operational forces. The Command.
7. Component of C2, which is the action through which the
Commander conducts the development of operations,
corroborating that the actions are being executed in accordance
with his plans and orders.
The control.
8. It is a continuous and cyclical process through which the
Commander obtains information, makes decisions and executes
actions, exercising authority over subordinate Commanders.
The C2 Cycle.
9. It is the essence of the C2 cycle.
Maintain quick decision and execution cycles and ensure that both
superiors and subordinates have a shared vision of what needs to
be done.
10. It is the key objective of the C2 process and they must be sensible
and timely, the enemy will do the same, the first gains the
advantage. It requires intuition and analysis to recognize the
problem and implement the solution.
Decision making.
11. This type of decision making tends to be complete, but it takes
time to compare multiple options simultaneously, under the same
criteria, to select an optimal solution. It is appropriate when you
have the necessary time.
Analytical decision making.
12. This type of decision making depends on the ability and judgment
of an experienced Commander to recognize the key elements of a
problem, quickly integrate them, and make the appropriate
decision. It is appropriate when time and uncertainty are critical
factors.
Intuitive decision making.
13. Control method when the Commander exercises control with a
“strong hand”, centralizes C2 with explicit orders and plans,
emphasizing the vertical flow, both of orders and information, in
the chain of command.
Detailed control.
14. Control method when seeking to create a system capable of
responding quickly to any situation, instead of waiting for
uncertainty to decrease before deciding and acting.
Flexible control.
15. Operations must be organized with authority structure and defined
responsibilities; each Commander must have authority within his
or her scope of responsibility.
Organization.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

16. It is the raw material of decision making and execution, since it is
necessary to understand the situation and from there make the
best decision.
Information.
17. It covers the personnel, systems and resources that support the
flow and process of information, in order to improve the abilities of
Commanders to make decisions and execute them.
Medium.
18. They integrate the tangible structure that supports the C2 process;
they are the information systems, equipment, software and
infrastructure with which the Commander collects, processes,
protects and disseminates information.
Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs).
19. These are the 6 fundamental principles for an effective C2.
1) Key personnel, 2) Flexible control, 3) Unity of effort, 4)
Decentralized decision making and execution, 5) Initiative of
subordinates and 6) Essential communications.
20. It is based on two essential capabilities: understanding and
response capacity, it seeks to provide available Command with
information on what is happening or may happen.
C2 Operational Concept.
30. C2 Support Element that is defined as the set of technologies that
allow the acquisition, production, storage, treatment,
communication, registration and presentation of information, in the
form of voice, images and data.
ICT's.
31. They are the 3 general capabilities of the C2 System.
Common Operational Overview (COP), Tools to support the Naval
Planning Process and Tools to support the conduct and
supervision of operations.
32. Capacity of the C2 System, which is the concentration of graphic
information of operations through the use of ICT, involves
monitoring, images, communications, language, symbology and
graphic display.
Common Operational Overview (COP).
33. Capacity of the C2 System that is based on the 6 steps of the
NPP to create electronic formats for each of them. Tools to
support the Naval Planning Process.
34. Capacity of the C2 System, which are graphical tools of the COP
to graph maneuvers and make calculations of autonomy,
displacements, and time and space.
Tools to support the conduct and supervision of operations.

21. They are the 3 strategic vectors in which Naval Operations are
generically classified.
The maritime defense of the territory, the maintenance of the rule
of law at sea and diplomatic action.
35. C2 System Tool to configure the roles with which the operators
will work in the system, with authorizations and restrictions to
operate.
Tools for role definition.

22. It is the core of the C2 system, it interacts with other information 36. C2 System tool that covers analysis of maritime traffic, crisis
systems, both institutional and external, and includes a diversity of situation, SAR emergency and non-compliance with scheduled
subsystems through which it is fed with strategic, operational and unit movements.
tactical information. SICCAM. Alarm of significant events.

23. It is the main tool of the High Command to assist in its functions of 37. C2 System tool that includes entry and storage of information,
authority and strategic direction to execute the C2 process at that documents with military classification and security key and access
level. control by roles.
CC2 EMGA. Administration of a library.

24. It is executed more expeditiously, to achieve three objectives: 38. C2 System tool that contemplates different formats and scales
monitoring operations, monitoring the deployment of forces, and and incorporation of satellite images.
identifying possible points of conflict/contingencies. Digital cartography administration.
The C2 process.
39. System C2 tool regarding security in the event of an accident or
25. They are the 3 components of the C2 System. failure.
The Command and Control Organization, Information and Support Information preservation.
of C2.
40. Aspect of information for Command and Control that contemplates
26. Component of the C2 system that includes the Commander and tactical deployment of own units and National Maritime Panorama
the chain of command that connects him with his superiors and (SENTINEL Maritime Traffic and Surveillance Systems and
his subordinate commanders. Targets of interest).
The Command and Control Organization. Common Operational Overview (COP).

27. Component of the C2 system that is an essential link that allows it

to function, integrates the Common Operational Panorama (COP)
and transmits the flow of orders from the Commander.
Information.

28. Component of the C2 system, which is the structure through which

the Commander exercises C2, includes personnel, equipment and
facilities.
C2 Support.
29. C2 Support Element considered as a key element, it must be
selected, organized and trained in the CC2 EMGA and in the SC2,
organized in shifts to monitor operations 24 hours a day.
Staff.

61 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

41. Aspect of information for Command and Control that involves authorities and be the transmission of the orders of the High
Government agencies (SEDENA, CONAPESCA, SCT, FGR) and Command and support in appropriate decision making.
International Agencies. CC2 EMGA mission.
Information from other Organizations.
56. Manage the CC2 System, advise the AM, monitor operations,
42. Aspect of information for Command and Control that is obtained transmit directives from the AM, maintain liaison with Naval
from Operational, Administrative and Intelligence systems. Commands, conduct and coordinate rescue and maritime traffic,
SEMAR Information System.
development and updating of ICTs.
CC2 EMGA functions.
43. Aspect of information for Command and Control that must reach a
high level for the information that circulates through the network,
considering authenticity, access list, protected domains, 57. CC2 EMGA is also considered as “Naval Maritime Traffic Control
encryption, login registration, antivirus and physical security. Coordination Center” (SCC) and “Search and Rescue
Security of the information. Coordination Center” (MRCC).
Organization of CC2 EMGA.
44. It is carried out through the chain of command established by the
institutional organization, each Commander has a defined 58. CC2 EMGA module that tracks operations, events and incidents,
authority and responsibility structure. receiving and processing information for the integration of the
Organization of C2. COP. transmits AM orders to Naval Commands and operational
units.
45. It must establish command, support and coordination relationships Shift Captain Module.
between command levels, considering that decisions and orders
range from the strategic to the tactical level. 59. CC2 EMGA module that plots the events being monitored,
The chain of command. prepares and updates the graphic news report and the tactical
deployment.
46. It is when the different sections of the General Staff or Command COP Presentation Module.
Groups assist the Commanders in the conception, preparation
and conduct of operations.
C2 process. 60. CC2 EMGA module that operates the SIOPARM and the SICCAM
for the tracking and location of surface units and the SISMEP for
47. They are those in which a command of equal level supports fishing vessels.
another command with its forces in the same operation. Surface Unit control module.
Command and Support Relationships.
61. CC2 EMGA module that operates the SIOPARM for air units, as
48. Provides the type of support you require, when and where. well as international (CNIES and RITN) and national information
Mission control is maintained by the supported Commander. exchange with SEDENA (SIVA).
Supported command. Air Unit control module.

49. Command that supports another command with its means, as 62. CC2 EMGA module that operates the SIOPARM for ground units,
long as it has been ordered or authorized by the upper echelon of in addition to Skype, Omega Soltrack and Axis for monitoring
both. tactical vehicles in operation.
Command in support. Ground Unit Control Module.
50. It is that support that is given to the supported forces as a whole
and not to a particular unit. The supporting unit retains 63. CC2 EMGA module that provides the High Command with an
administrative, tactical and operational control. updated list of events of interest and a weekly report on events in
General support. the fight against organized crime.
Module for preparing reports and reports.
51. It is that mission in which a force is designated to support another
in a particular/individual manner and is authorized to respond to 64. CC2 EMGA module that retrieves operational information reports
the requested requirements. related to emergency situations (COSPAS, SSAS), SAR
Direct support. operations and contingency response.
Contingency Assistance Module and SAR Coordination Center
52. It is made up of the High Command Situation Room, the CC2 (MRCC).
EMGA, the SC2 of the Naval Forces, Regions, Zones and
Sectors, C2 Modules in Subordinate Commands and C2 mobile 65. CC2 EMGA module that establishes the required communications,
posts. as well as transmitting the necessary instructions to the Naval
C2 system of the Mexican Navy. Commands and operational units.
Naval Communications Module (COMUNAV).
53. It is the center where you have access to all the information from
CC2 EMGA, it is linked to the Presidency of the Republic,
Secretariats of State and the Naval Commands themselves.
66. CC2 EMGA module that coordinates with national and foreign
authorities in cases of crisis.
High Command Situation Room.
Coordination module with authorities.
54. It assists the High Command in the exercise of its functions of
authority and direction of naval operations, receiving and
processing information from the Naval Commands and national
and international agencies.
EMGA Command and Control Center.
55. It is to collect and process information, establish operational
coordination with the Naval Commands and civil and military

62 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
67. They are conceived as a support tool to the Command for the
control and monitoring of the operations carried out by the
operational units in their jurisdiction and coordinated by the JEMR,
made up of all sections, making the S-3 or S-23 responsible for
their operation and functioning. .
Command and Control Rooms of the Naval Commands (SC2).
68. They are established in Subordinate Commands that are outside
the Naval Commands and/or that do not have access to the
Institutional Computer Network, they assist in the capture of
information through SIOPARM and SICCAM.
Command and Control Modules of Subordinate Commands
(MC2).
69. It is established when the nature of the operations requires a
command post outside the Headquarters (MARINE PLAN). Mobile
Command and Control Post.
14.- DAM 1.7.- NAVAL COMMUNICATIONS.
1. It is establishing and maintaining reliable, timely and secure links
both in times of war and in times of peace.
Mission of the COMUNAV.
2. Serve Command, allowing you to exercise your personal
Command and Control influence over a force in a greater scope
than it would be without them.
Main Objective of the COMUNAV.
3. Facilitate the exchange of information. They support intelligence,
logistics and administration operations, all of which are essential
for the exercise of Command.
Secondary Objective of the COMUNAV.
4. They must be reliable, timely and secure.
Characteristics of the COMUNAV.
5. A characteristic of the COMUNAV is the certainty that there will
always be a communications channel to guarantee the sender
that their messages will reach the recipient in their entirety,
without alterations or mutilations.
Trust.
6. Characteristic of the COMUNAV that is achieved with the
appropriate use of transmission and reception equipment,
standardization of equipment and components, establishment of
alternate and redundancy means, optimal frequencies and
supervision of the effectiveness of the communications system.
Trust.
7. Characteristic of the COMUNAV, which is the protection resulting
from the application of measures to deny unauthorized persons
access and interpretation of the information transmitted through
communications channels.
Security.
8. Characteristic of COMUNAV that is achieved with the correct
security classification, use of appropriate cryptographic
equipment, minimization of links, use of appropriate physical
security devices, selection, instruction and training of users.
Security.
9. Characteristic of COMUNAV that guarantees that messages are
received by the recipient with adequate speed to be able to take
the corresponding actions under the prevailing circumstances.
Chance.
10. Characteristic of the COMUNAV that is achieved with the brief and
63
By: AEGV
concise writing of the messages, correct assignment of
precedence, standardized, simple and effective procedures.
Chance.
11. Trust and timeliness must always be guaranteed in the
transmission of messages, they must always reach their recipient,
security is relative and depends on a combination between the
sensitivity of the information and the tactical situation.
Importance of communications characteristics.
12. It is the integration of all the regulatory precepts, principles and
theories that govern the conduct and activities of the personnel
involved in the naval communications system, requiring good
judgment and common sense for its application.
Naval Communications Doctrine.
13. Principle of the COMUNAV that is achieved through the
alignment of training and coaching with
available technology and the way the units operate. Media
awareness .
14. COMUNAV principle that is the responsibility of the Commands
and authorities involved in all levels of conducting naval
operations, will help avoid equipment losses and guarantee
effective maintenance.
Media control.
15. COMUNAV principle so that communications are reliable, timely
and secure, as well as adopting strict measures to control it, these
must cover all echelons of Command.
Discipline.
16. COMUNAV principle where messages must be written briefly,
avoiding verbosity in both the text and the header, but not
sacrificing the clarity of the message. Brevity.
17. Principle of the COMUNAV that must correspond to the time
available to take actions, not to the importance of the content or
its security classification.
Precedence.
18. COMUNAV principle, which is a fundamental characteristic of
communications, must correspond to the sensitivity of the
information; exceeding it may cause delays in delivery. Safety
classification.
19. Principle of COMUNAV where the complexity of the system
demands the existence of instructions and procedures
standardized to ensure that all personnel involved in the system
act in a similar way in similar circumstances.
Standardized operating procedures.
20. Principle of the COMUNAV where the communications means
available in peacetime must be designed in such a way that they
can be expanded quickly in the event of war, to evolve to a
system with greater capabilities.
Scalability.
21. COMUNAV principle that states that communications are present
in all naval operations and command levels and have no reason to
exist on their own.
Cohesion.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
22. COMUNAV principle that must be carried out at all levels of
conducting operations (strategic, operational and tactical), in order
to guarantee connectivity between operational forces (Naval
Commands, CC2, EMGA and Friendly Forces.
Planning.
23. This is the name given to the set of facilities, equipment, means
and personnel organized to fulfill the mission of naval
communications.
Naval Communications System.
24. Characteristic of COMUNAV, which is the system's ability to adapt
to any operational situation (strategic, operational and tactical), is
obtained with media redundancy, self-manageable architecture
and modular construction of the system.
Flexibility.
25. Characteristic of the COMUNAV that must be made up of means
whose use is easy to understand and apply, allowing the
Command to focus its attention on operations and not be
distracted by complicated procedures.
Simplicity.
26. Characteristic of COMUNAV, which is the system's ability to
withstand any physical or electromagnetic attack without
becoming inoperative.
Survival.
27. Characteristic of the COMUNAV that must obey standardized
specifications so that equipment can be exchanged between units
or parts between them, facilitating acquisition and maintenance
logistics.
Standardization.
28. Characteristic of the COMUNAV where it must have sufficient and
adequate means to satisfy the needs in operational and
administrative aspects.
Ability.
29. Characteristic of COMUNAV that must ensure that the different
network architectures can exchange information when the user
requires it.
Interoperability.
30. It is the personnel that establishes and applies naval
communications policies, exercises the direction and control of
communications at their respective level.
Executive.
31. It is the personnel that conceives the various naval
communications plans at the strategic, operational and tactical
levels. These personnel are assigned to the General Staff and
Command Groups.
Planners.
32. They execute communications plans and operate the media. This
personnel is assigned to the CCOM's, Communications Stations
(ESCOM) and related administrative areas. Operators.
33. Provides technical, logistical and maintenance support to the
communications system. These personnel are assigned to the
Communications and Informatics Unit (UCI) and CEMANELE's.
Technical, logistical and maintenance support personnel.
34. Management Personnel of the COMUNAV System that
establishes the communications policies of the SEMAR and will
issue the doctrinal manuals for the use of the naval
communications system.
Secretary of the Navy.
64
By: AEGV
35. Management Personnel of the COMUNAV System that has the
responsibility of applying the communications policies
issued by the High Command and exercise the direction and
control of naval communications of its operational units and its
headquarters.
Naval Forces Commands.
36. Management Personnel of the COMUNAV System that has the
responsibility of applying the communications policies issued by
the High Command and exercising the direction and control of the
communications of the Zones, Sectors, Advanced Naval Stations
(ENA's) and operational units of their Jurisdiction . Naval Region
Commands.
37. Management Personnel of the COMUNAV System who have the
responsibility of applying the communications policies issued by
the High Command and directives of the Naval Region and Zone
Command, as well as exercising the direction and control of Naval
communications of their Headquarters, Sectors, ENA's and
operational units of its jurisdiction.
Commands of Naval Zones and Sectors.
38. Management Personnel of the COMUNAV System who have the
responsibility of applying the communications policies issued by
the High Command and directives of the Command of the Region,
Zone or Naval Sector, as well as exercising the direction and
control of the naval communications of their unit.
Commands of Operational Units.
39. Advises the High Command in the field of communications and
electronic warfare; plans, supervises and directs the use and
development of information, communications and electronic
warfare systems. EMGA S-5.
40. He has the responsibility of advising his Command on aspects of
communications and electronic warfare; as well as plan, supervise
and conduct communications for the development of operations
carried out in their respective area of responsibility.
Communications Subsection of the General Staff or Command
Groups.
41. Personnel responsible for conducting the operation and
maintenance of the communications system established in each
Naval Command.
Naval Information and Communications Technologies (ICT)
Headquarters.
42. They are responsible for the correct operation of the
communications systems and equipment and their peripherals,
installed in the respective CCOM's and ESCOM's.
Headquarters of the CCOM's and ESCOM's.
43. They are directly responsible for the operation of the equipment
assigned to each of the networks, in such a way as to guarantee
reliable, timely and secure communication. Operators.
44. He is responsible for the acquisition, distribution, technical support
and maintenance of the media that make up the communications
system and will keep it constantly updated in accordance with
technological evolution.
Communications and IT Unit (UCI).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
45. The main function is to carry out maintenance on electronic
equipment to eliminate or reduce the causes or reasons that
cause the loss of efficiency of a piece of equipment in order to
ensure that the equipment is in perfect operating condition.
Electronic Maintenance Centers (CEMANELE).
46. It is the set of facilities, personnel and material that is conveniently
organized, processes and records the processing of messages
generated by the Naval Commands and Authorities it serves, as
well as messages in transit through the SEMAR naval
communications system.
Communications Center (CCOM).
47. It depends on the UCI, from here the radio communications
networks of the AM are administered, and it provides
communications services (voice, data and cw) to all the
organizations assigned to the headquarters of the High
Command.
CCOM Main.
48. They are the communications centers assigned to the
headquarters of a Force Command, Region, Zone and Naval
Sector, these provide communications service (voice, data and
cw) to all units, establishments and component forces assigned to
the headquarters of the respective Command. .
CCOM Secondary.
49. It is the set of personnel and communications material located
within the jurisdiction of a secondary CCOM, such as: IM Brigades
and Battalions, Naval Air Bases and Stations, Embarked Fleet
Commands, ENA's, groupings, Surface and Naval Air Units.
Communications station (ESCOM).
50. It is the one that is established on a temporary basis for the
execution of an operations order, they are identified by the call
sign that establishes the specific communications plan of the
operation, such as logistics bases (BL's), detachments, bases of
operations (BO's) and highway control posts (PCC).
Campaign communications station or command post
(ESCOCAM).
51. Vehicle equipped with communications terminals with the capacity
to establish voice, data and telegraphy links, at short, medium and
long distances, in order to support the Command and Control (C2)
in the area of operations.
Land mobile communications station (ESCOMOV).
52. It is installed in the event of an accident, in a suitable place close
to the facilities of the respective Command to provide continuity to
operations.
Emergency communications centers and stations.
53. They provide communications service (voice, data and cw) in the
event of failure or destruction of the primary and secondary
CCOM.
Alternate communications center.
54. It will be designated by the High Command through the UCI,
selecting the secondary CCOM that, according to the situation,
has the best possibilities of providing service to replace the main
CCOM.
Alternate CCOM of the main CCOM.
55. He will be designated by the respective Command from among
the CCOM's of the establishments and/or ESCOM's of the units
under his Command who, according to the situation, have the
best possibilities of providing service in replacement of the
corresponding secondary CCOM. Alternate CCOM of the
secondary CCOMs.
65
By: AEGV
56. These are communications equipment that serve as a
communications bridge (RELAY) for the retransmission of
information, to extend the range and avoid the use of large
antennas and higher power equipment.
Relay stations.
57. They are each of the pieces of equipment in a network, through
which the operator transmits and receives information: radios,
telephones or data terminals installed in the CCOM's, ESCOM's
and administrative areas.
Communications Terminal (TC).
58. It is the organization of two or more communications terminals that
can establish and maintain a link on a common frequency,
channel or transmission line.
Communications Networks.
59. Networks used for the exchange of operational messages that
involve, among others, tactical, operational and emergency
logistics messages, as well as coordination messages for the
conduct and development of naval operations.
Operational Communications Networks.
60. Networks used for the routine processing of non-operational
information, and all those messages that are sent to comply with
the logistics cycle in support of naval operations.
Administrative Communications Networks.
61. Operational Networks that link directly to the controls in the
various levels, for coordination between these at the same level;
as well as the transmission of orders and receipt of reports to and
from subordinate commands.
Command Networks.
62. Operational Networks that are used for the free and rapid
exchange of information between operational units during the
execution of operations.
Tactical networks.
63. Operational Networks used for the free, rapid and secure
exchange of information between naval intelligence bodies; and
among these with national and international intelligence agencies.
Intelligence networks.
64. Operational Networks used to carry out the logistics process
during the development of operations, messages can be sent
through tactical networks.
Operational logistics coordination networks.
65. Operational Networks used for transmission, control and
coordination of SAR messages; The international call and
emergency channels correspond to this network (VHF marine
channel 16, VHF aeronautical 121.5 and HF 2182 kHz, etc.).
Search and rescue networks (SAR).
66. Operational Networks used for connectivity between
meteorological stations and processing centers. Meteorological
information will be transmitted to naval commands and
operational units through the available administrative and tactical
networks.
Meteorological networks.
67. Operational Networks used for the retransmission of messages in
order to expand the reach of line-of-sight communications.
Relay networks.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
68. Operational Networks used to provide connectivity to the CC2
EMGA, Command and control rooms of the Naval Commands
and mobile Command and Control posts when established,
provide connectivity to guarantee the visualization of the
deployment of own forces and the possible positions of the
enemy.
Connectivity networks to Command and Control (C2).
69. Operational Networks used for the exchange of information within
operational units: intercoms, self-excited telephones, acoustic
tubes, pneumatic tubes, general sound, order telegraphs, etc.
Interior communications networks.
70. Operational Networks used for the exchange of information
between surface units and the respective command, when they
are in port or bay.
Port and bay communications networks.
71. Operational Networks used for the automatic transfer of data
between stations that make up a tactical network with minimal
intervention by operators, generating a Common Operational
Panorama between the units of a Task Force. Tactical Data Link.
72. Operational Networks used by the Naval Forces to satisfy the
liaison needs in war operations. Fleet-specific networks.
73. These networks are used by the Naval Forces and their surface,
air-naval, amphibious, submarine and special units for the
exchange of tactical information.
Tactical fleet networks.
74. These networks are used by the Naval Forces for the transmission
and reception of early warning messages, naval fire support, anti-
submarine warfare coordination, anti-aircraft warfare coordination
and mine warfare.
Fleet coordination networks.
75. Administrative Networks that directly link managers and directors
at the various levels, for administrative coordination between them
at the same level; as well as the transmission of orders and
receipt of reports.
Executive networks.
76. Administrative Networks that provide voice and data services for
the transmission and reception of information related to
administrative and logistical procedures between the different
Commands and naval establishments.
Administrative processing networks.
77. Administrative Networks that are used for administrative and
logistical coordination between Commands and naval
establishments.
Administrative coordination networks.
78. Administrative Networks that provide voice and data services to
extend medical, educational and technical support services to
distant naval units and establishments. Service networks.
79. Administrative networks that are used for communications within
SEMAR establishments.
Internal administrative networks.
80. This is the name given to all those elements that allow a link to be
established between two or more stations; they are classified as
exterior and interior.
Naval Communications Media.
81. They are all those that are used for communication with units,
establishments, organizations and in general with any individual
who is not within the facilities of the barracks, establishment or
66
By: AEGV
unit.
External communications media.
82. They are all those that are used for communication within units,
establishments and organizations.
Internal communications means.
83. They are those that serve for the transmission or reception of
signs, signals, writings, images, sounds, video or information of
any nature at distances greater than the range of mechanical
waves.
Telecommunications.
84. They are those means of communication that require electrical
power for their operation. These media use physical transmission
lines and the electromagnetic spectrum for signal propagation.
Electrical/Electronic .
85. They use the visible spectrum for signal propagation, to transmit
and receive messages within visual range using pre-established
codes (Morse, traffic light, lights and flag codes). Visuals.
86. External communications that use: post office, transport,
courier/post office and Hertian cable.
Physical media.
87. They are those that use a physical medium (air, water,
transmission line) to propagate signals. For external
communications, the following are used: megaphone, bells,
whistles, underwater telephone, etc.
Communications by mechanical waves.
88. It is a central amplification system where messages, mainly orders
or information and in some cases alarm signals, are transmitted
simultaneously through microphones and speakers.
Overall sound.
89. It is a system of commands from the bridge to the engine rooms to
control the ship's propulsion.
Telegraph of orders.
90. It is a two-way intercom system, where orders and information are
transmitted between two or more stations. Intercoms.
91. They are very flexible systems for two-way communication, their
variation and functions is wide, they can be called three very
marked types: wired, wireless and self-excited.
Phones.
92. It is a one-way communication system, where regulations and
general information, as well as entertainment, are transmitted.
Closed circuit television (CCTV).
93. It is a system of orders or prevention generally located in places of
intense noise.
Mermaids.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
94. It is a system of orders or general prevention, connected to the
general sound.
Doorbells.
95. It is a very simple system that consists of a metal tube that
generally connects two departments and does not require
electricity, being two-way.
Acoustic tubes.
96. It is a system of orders or visual prevention generally located in
places of intense noise.
Lights.
97. It is a system that consists of a metal tube into which a special
cylindrical cartridge is inserted where the message is deposited
and it is propelled by air pressure at an almost instantaneous
speed.
Pneumatic tubes.
98. This equipment allows the CIC to provide weapons control stations
with a signal for target engagement.
Target Designator Equipment (TDS).
99. The operational radio communications circuits, satellite system,
last mile links and Multiple Protocol Systems (MPLS) of the
Mexican Navy are assigned to these networks. Operational
networks.
100. The administrative radio communications circuits, satellite system,
last mile links and Multiple Protocol Systems (MPLS) of the
Mexican Navy are assigned to these networks. Administrative
networks.
101. They are intended to establish and maintain voice, data and CW
links between the main CCOM, the secondary CCOMs, campaign
or command post, ESCOMMOV, alternates, ESCOMs and TCs.
HF radio media.
102. They are intended to establish and maintain tactical links
between surface, land and air units providing voice, data and
video services, and between naval establishments for
administrative and logistical coordination.
VHF radio media.
103. Through these means, tactical information is transmitted between
operational units in line of sight when maximum protection against
enemy interception and indoor radio communications is required.
UHF radio media.
104. They are operational data circuits of the satellite system and MPLS, as
well
such as radio communications and other wired or fiber optic
networks for the transmission and reception of data, will have
secure circuits (private, virtual networks, https, etc.).
Data transmission media.
105. They are operational voice circuits of the satellite system and MPLS
and
They interact with operational radio communications networks
through radio-telephone interfaces (telephone patch).
Telephone means.
106. Provides security in voice, data and video communications to
through public networks such as the Internet, using virtual tunnels,
encryption services and communications authentication.
VPN`s (Virtual Private Network).
107. They are the means used by the administrative circuit of the system
67
By: AEGV
satellite and MPLS for data transmission and reception.
Data media.
108. They are the means used by the administrative circuit of the system
satellite, MPLS and as an alternate network the commercial
network for voice transmission and reception.
Telephone means.
109. Assignment of Corporate internet terminals to High Command and
Commercial internet to the Forces, Regions, Zones, Sectors and
establishments, its use will be regulated by the Manual that
regulates SEMAR information.
Internet use.
110. It is made up of the different voice and data subsystems,
highlighting satellite, multiple protocol and radio frequency
networks, these networks must be interoperable, approval is
required, compatible and standardized equipment, it does not
imply that the equipment is the same.
Integration of the COMUNAV.
111. Network that, through a “Backbone IP” architecture, uses nodes
of Naval Communications (NCN), which allow the interoperability
of communications subsystems and therefore supports
interoperability.
Integrated Naval Communications Network (CONAIN).
112. Provide reliable connectivity between Naval Commands and
operational units, Improve the quality of communications,
Guarantee interoperability between own forces and Increase the
range of communication between units that operate distantly.
Objectives of the Integration of the COMUNAV.
113. They are the set of interfaces that interconnect the different
means of communications of a given CCOM. Their quantity and
characteristics depend on the level of Command they serve, they
increase the range of the integrated communications means.
Naval Communications Nodes (NCN).
114. They are permanent nodes established in the CCOM of each
Command.
Naval. interconnect all installed communications media and link
operational units with others.
NCN Fixed (NCNF).
115. They are nodes implemented in operational bases and ENA's or
well, in humanitarian aid stations abroad. Its function is to
tactically link the operational units operating in the area.
NCN Deployed (NCND).
116. They are nodes implemented temporarily or permanently to
aboard flagships, depending on the needs of the Command. Its
function is to tactically link the surface units that operate in a
flotilla.
NCN Surface (NCNS).
117. They are nodes with mobility capacity in different types of
terrain depending on the vehicle used. Its function is to tactically
link the operational units operating in the area.
NCN Vehicular (NCNV).
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
M AKIN A FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2.
118. Its mission is to preserve the functional COMUNAV System
for as long as possible, eliminating or reducing the causes or
reasons that cause the loss of efficiency of the material that
comprises it in order to ensure that it is in perfect operating
condition.
The Maintenance.
119. Maintenance Echelon of the COMUNAV System that serves
to the development of preventive maintenance, for the
conservation of the material, reducing its natural wear and
avoiding its misuse, is carried out by the user with advice from
CEMANELE's.
First step.
120. Maintenance Echelon of the COMUNAV System that serves
The development of corrective maintenance (repair), to eliminate
the consequences of both accidental and caused breakdowns, is
carried out by the CEMANELE`s.
Second step.
121. Maintenance Echelon of the COMUNAV System that serves
Restorative and modifying maintenance, to modernize the old
design material by incorporating new general characteristics, is
carried out by the CEMANELE`s.
Third step .
122. Maintenance Echelon of the COMUNAV System that serves
to the development of recovery and rescue maintenance of
seriously damaged units, is carried out by the UCI maintenance
centers.
Fourth step.
123. They are caused by small accidental malfunctions.
or small wear that can be resolved by simple operations that do
not require special means of repair. First degree repairs.
124. Repairs that correspond to breakdowns of a certain entity
fortuitous or provoked or due to deep material wear, the resolution
of which requires technical operations carried out by specialized
personnel, with the help of facilities.
Second degree repairs.
125. They are the repairs corresponding to serious breakdowns,
generally caused by war action or air or maritime accident, which
profoundly affect the effectiveness of the affected unit, requiring
extensive repair works, with immobilization of the unit for a
prolonged period of time. Third degree repairs.
126. These are those repairs that must be carried out in the
The very moment the breakdown occurs on board a ship, both at
sea and in port, which if not attacked immediately can lead to
greater harm, falls within the internal security and breakdown
control system of the affected ship and is the responsibility of the
first level of maintenance.
Emergency repairs.
127. 1st Maintenance Centers. and 2nd. Step are
assigned to the Naval Commands, and 4th. Echelon and
specialized that attend to the maintenance of 3rd. and 4th. Step,
according to the maintenance needs determined by the UCI.
Organization of the CEMANELE's.
128. Provide all security-related personnel and
control of communications, instructions and procedures to deny
the enemy or unauthorized persons from obtaining information
that allows them to violate our operations.
68
By: AEGV
Objective of Communications Security.
129. It is the protection resulting from the application of measures to deny
unauthorized persons access and interpretation of the information
transmitted through communications channels. Definition of
Communications Security.
130. It is compliance with the principles of confidentiality,
integrity, availability, authenticity and non-repudiation through
controls.
Security of the information .
131. Principle of Information Security that is referred to
Ensure that information is accessible only to authorized persons.
Confidentiality.
132. Principle of Information Security that seeks to preserve the
accuracy in all information.
Integrity.
133. Principle of Information Security that is aimed at
guarantee that authorized users have access to the information
and resources related to it, whenever they require it.
Availability.
134. Principle of Information Security that seeks to guarantee
the origin of the information, validating the issuer to avoid identity
theft.
Authenticity.
135. Principle of Information Security that prevents the issuer
or receiver deny the transmission or reception of a message.
I do not repudiate.
136. They are responsible for managing the security of the
communications within their command or jurisdiction, in
accordance with the standards of this doctrine, and must make all
personnel involved aware of the importance of maintaining this.
Commander.
137. It is responsible for coordinating and making it possible for
communications are reliable, timely and secure, it will exercise
control over the security of the communications, as well as the
custody, count, management, safeguarding and destruction of the
communications security material placed in its charge.
Head of ICT.
138. It is responsible for taking all necessary measures to
maintain and improve the security and efficiency of the
communications system and, in particular, ensure compliance with
the communications instructions and procedures relating to the
transmission, reception and processing of messages, treating
them according to the security classification.
Personnel involved in processing messages.
139. It is the result of taking all measures to safeguard the
classified material from access or observation by unauthorized
persons.
Physical security.
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT
STUDY GUIDE ⁃ SPECIFIC KNOWLEDGE
MARINE FROM: NAVY LIEUTENANT TO: CORVETTE CAPTAIN.
PFAM – 2 0 2 2. By: AEGV

140. It is the component of communications security that

It results from having equipment to send classified information in a manner that is unintelligible to
unauthorized persons, using methods, techniques and means with an integrated encryption system
(ON-LINE).
Cryptographic security.
141. It is the area assigned to carry out encryption and decryption
actions of classified information located in a white area, dependent
on the second sections of the General Staff.
Cryptographic Center (CC).

142. Its objective is to deny the enemy all possible information about
the content and direction of a message. To achieve this, the full
address of a message will be contained only within the ciphertext.
CODRESS.
It is the component of COMSEC that results from all the measures
143. established to protect transmissions from interception, traffic
analysis and imitative deception of communications.
Transmission security.

It is the action of searching; listen to and/or record

communications emissions, in order to obtain intelligence, from
144. signal analysis and cryptographic analysis.
Interception.

It is the analysis of transmissions to obtain networks of links and/or

to obtain information related to the order of battle, operational
145. activities, plans and organization of enemy communications.
Traffic analysis.

146. It is the introduction of false transmissions, imitating transmissions

authentic, within the enemy's communications systems, with the intention of confusing or deceiving
him.
Imitative communications deception.

69 UNOFFICIAL DOCUMENT